Class XII Study Material - Pol. Science

केन्द्रीय विद्यालय संगठन
क्षेत्रीय कायाालय, जयपुर

KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN
REGIONAL OFFICE JAIPUR
CLASS – XII
Study Material (English)
POLITICAL SCIENCE (028)

Based on Latest CBSE Exam Pattern
For the Session 2022-23
केन्द्रीय विद्यालय संगठन क्षेत्रीय कायाालय जयपुर

KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN
REGIONAL OFFICE JAIPUR
Our Patron
Sh. B.L. Morodia

Honourable Deputy Commissioner
KVS RO Jaipur
Sh. D.R. Meena Sh. M.R. Rawal

Honourable Assistant Commissioner Honourable Assistant Commissioner
KVS RO Jaipur KVS RO Jaipur
Sh. Vinod Bhartiya

Principal, Kendriya Vidyalaya Jalore
The following Teachers have contributed in
making Study Material
S.No. Name of Teacher Name of KV
KV NO. 05
1. (2 Shift)
Jaipur
Mr. Hemant Kumar Bhardwaj
PGT – Pol. Science
(Contractual)
KV
2.
Banswara
Mrs. Neelam Vaishnav

PGT – Pol. Science
(Contractual)
POLITICAL SCIENCE
Code No. – 028
Class – XII (2022-23)
PART – A
CONTEMPORARY WORLD POLITICS
S.NO. Contents Marks
1. The End of Bipolarity 8
2. New Centres of Power 12
3. Contemporary South Asia
4. United Nations and its Organizations 10
5. Security in Contemporary World
6. Environment and Natural Resources 10
7. Globalization
Total 40
PART – B
POLITICS IN INDIA SINCE INDEPENDENCE
S.NO. Contents Marks
1. Challenges of Nation-Building 08
2. Planned Development
3. India’s Foreign Policy 08
4. Parties and Party System in India 12
5. Democratic Resurgence
6. Regional Aspirations 12
7. Indian Politics: Recent Trends and Development
Total 40
* 20 Marks (10 marks for Viva and 10 marks for project work)
* See the guidelines given with the document.
Grant Total = Part – A = 40 Marks
Part – B = 40 Marks
Viva+Project = 20 Marks
= 100 Marks
END OF BIPOLARITY
What Was Soviet System
➢ The Union of Soviet Socialist Republics (USSR) came into being after the socialist revolution in
Russia in 1917.
➢ The revolution was inspired by the ideals of socialism, as opposed to capitalism and the need for
an egalitarian society.
➢ The biggest attempt in human history to abolish the institution of private property and
consciously design a society based on principles of equality.
➢ The Soviet political system centred on the communist party.
➢ No other political party or opposition was allowed.
➢ The economy was planned and controlled by the state.
➢ The east European countries that the Soviet army had liberated from the fascist forces came under
the control of the USSR.
➢ The political and the economic systems of all these (Socialist) countries were modelled after the
USSR.
➢ This group of countries was called the Second World or the ‘Socialist Bloc’.
➢ The Warsaw Pact (1955), a military alliance, held them together. The USSR was the leader of the
Bloc.
➢ The Soviet Union became a great power after the Second World War.
➢ The Soviet economy was then more developed than the rest of the world except for the USA.
➢ It had a complex communications network, vast energy resources including Oil, Iron and Steel,
Machinery Production.
➢ Transport Sector connected its remotest areas with efficiency.
➢ It has a domestic consumer industry that produce everything from Pins to Cars.
➢ Quality of Goods and Services was not good as compare to Western Countries.
➢ Soviet state ensured a minimum standard of living for all citizens.
➢ Government subsidised basic necessities including Health, Education, Child-care and other
Welfare Schemes.
➢ There was no unemployment.
➢ State ownership was the dominant form of ownership.
➢ Land and productive assets were owned and controlled by Soviet State.
➢ Soviet System became very Bureaucratic and Authoritarian making life very difficult for citizens.
Life was difficult for the citizens.
➢ Lack of Democracy and absence of Freedom of Speech for citizens.
➢ People expressed their dissent through Jokes and Cartoons.
➢ Institutions of Soviet State needed Reform.
➢ One Party system represented by Communist Party.
➢ Communist Party was not Accountable to the people.
➢ 15 Republics formed Soviet Union.
➢ Russia was only one of the 15 Republics.
➢ People from other regions felt neglected and often suppressed.
➢ Soviet Union lagged behind in Technology and Infrastructure as compare to the West.
➢ Political and Economic aspirations was not fulfilled.
➢ Soviet invasion in Afghanistan in 1979 weakened the economic conditions.
➢ Shortage of all Consumer Goods.
➢ Food was imported.
➢ Soviet Economy was Faltering and Stagnant.
Gorbachev and the Disintegration:

➢ Mikhail Gorbachev became General Secretary of Communist Party in 1985.
➢ Information and Technological revolution taking place in West.
➢ Decision of Gorbachev was to Normalise Relations with the West.
➢ The people of East European Countries started to protest against their own Government and Soviet
Control.
➢ Gorbachev initiated the policies of economic and political reform and democratisation.
➢ Reforms were opposed by leaders within the Communist Party.
➢ A Coup took place in 1991.
➢ This coup encouraged by Communist Party hardliners.
➢ Boris Yeltsin emerged as a National Hero in opposing coup.
➢ Boris Yeltsin won election and shake off Centralised Control.
➢ Power began to shift from Soviet Centre to Republics.
➢ The Central Asian Republics did not ask for independence.
➢ Central Asian Republics (CARs) wanted to remain with Soviet Federation.
➢ Under the leadership of Yeltsin, Russia, Ukraine and Belarus declared that Soviet Union was
disbanded.
➢ Communist Party was banned.
➢ Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) came as other Republics.
➢ Russia was now accepted as the successor state of the Soviet Union.
➢ Russia accepted all the International Treaties and commitments of the Soviet Union.
➢ The Old Soviet Union was dead and buried.
Why did Soviet Union Disintegrate?

➢ Internal weaknesses of Soviet Political and Economic institution was failed to fulfilled aspirations
of the people.
➢ Economic Stagnation.
➢ Shortages of Consumer Goods.
➢ Large section of the society began doubt.
➢ The Soviet economy used much of its resources in maintaining a nuclear and military arsenal.
➢ This led to a huge economic burden.
➢ Ordinary citizens became more knowledgeable about the economic advance of the West.
➢ They could see the disparities between their system and the systems of the West.
➢ The reality of its backwardness came as a political and psychological shock.
➢ The Soviet Union had become stagnant in an administrative political sense.
➢ The Communist Party that had ruled the Soviet Union for over 70 years.
➢ The Communist Party was not accountable to the people.
➢ Rampant corruption.
➢ Inability of the system to correct mistakes.
➢ The unwillingness to allow more openness in government.
➢ Centralisation of authority in a vast land.
➢ The party bureaucrats gained more privileges than ordinary citizens.
➢ Gorbachev promised to reform the economy and loosen the administrative system.
➢ Gorbachev’s accurate diagnosis of the problem.
➢ There were sections of Soviet society which felt that Gorbachev should have moved much faster.
➢ They did not benefit in the way they had hoped, or they benefited too slowly.
➢ In this ‘tug of war’, Gorbachev lost support on all sides and divided public opinion.
➢ People felt that he did not adequately defend his own policies.
➢ The rise of nationalism and the desire for sovereignty within various republics including Russia.
➢ Baltic Republics (Estonia, Latvia and Lithuania), Ukraine, Georgia, and others proved to be the
final and most immediate cause for the disintegration of the USSR.
➢ During the Cold War many thought that nationalist unrest would be strongest in the Central Asian
republics.
➢ Ethnic and religious differences with the rest of the Soviet Union.
➢ The collapse of the second world of the Soviet Union and the socialist systems in Eastern Europe
had profound consequences for world politics.
➢ Three broad kinds of enduring changes that resulted from it.
• I - End of Cold War:

❖ Ideological dispute over.
❖ Capitalist system was not an issue.
❖ Dispute had engaged the military of the two blocs, had triggered a massive arms race and
accumulation of nuclear weapons.
❖ End of the confrontation demanded an end to this arms race and a possible new peace.
• II- Power Relations Changed:

❖ The end of the Cold War open only two possibilities: 1- world dominate, 2- create a unipolar
system.
❖ Different countries or groups of countries could become important players in the international
system, thereby bringing in a multi-polar system.
❖ Where no one power could dominate. As it turned out, the US became the sole superpower.
❖ The capitalist economy was now the dominant economic system internationally.
• III- Emergence of New Countries:

❖ WARSAW countries had their own independent aspirations.
❖ The Baltic and East European States, wanted to join the European Union and become part of the
North Atlantic Treaty Organisation (NATO).
❖ The Central Asian countries wanted to take advantage of their geographical location and continue
their close ties with Russia.
❖ The international system saw many new countries emerge, each with its own identity, interests,
and economic and political difficulties.
Shock Therapy
➢ Countries by a painful process of transition from an authoritarian socialist system to a
democratic capitalist system.
➢ The model of transition in Russia, Central Asia and east Europe that was influenced by the World
Bank and the IMF came to be known as ‘Shock Therapy’.
➢ Shock therapy varied in intensity and speed amongst the former second world countries, but its
direction and features were quite similar.
➢ These countries were required to make a total shift to a capitalist economy,
➢ Private ownership was to be the dominant pattern of ownership of property.
➢ Privatisation of state assets and corporate ownership patterns were to be immediately brought in.
➢ Collective farms were to be replaced by private farming and capitalism in agriculture.
➢ Shock therapy also involved a drastic change in the external orientation of economies.
➢ The free trade regime and foreign direct investment (FDI) were to be the main engines of change.
➢ This involved openness to foreign investment, financial opening up or deregulation and currency
convertibility.
Consequences of Shock Therapy

➢ Shock therapy did not lead the people into the promised utopia of mass consumption.
➢ Ruin to the economies.
➢ Large state-controlled over industrial complex almost collapsed.
➢ 90 per cent of its industries were put up for sale to private individuals.
➢ Restructuring was carried out through market forces and not by government-directed industrial
policies. This was called ‘the largest garage sale in history’, as valuable industries were
undervalued and sold at throwaway prices.
➢ Vouchers were given to citizens.
➢ Citizens sold their vouchers in the black market because they needed the money.
➢ The value of the RUBLE, (Russian currency) declined dramatically.
➢ Rate of inflation was so high.
➢ People lost all their savings.
➢ The collective farm system disintegrated.
➢ Russia started to import food.
➢ The old trading structure broke down.
➢ The old system of social welfare was systematically destroyed.
➢ Withdrawal of government subsidies.
➢ Large sections of the people fell into poverty.
➢ The middle classes were pushed to the periphery of society,
➢ Academic and intellectual manpower disintegrated or migrated.
➢ A mafia emerged in these countries and started controlling many economic activities.
➢ Privatisation led to new disparities.
➢ Russia, were divided between rich and poor regions.
➢ The construction of democratic institutions was not given the same attention and priority as the
demands of economic transformation.
➢ The constitutions of all these countries were drafted in a hurry, including Russia.
➢ In Central Asia, the presidents had great powers and became very authoritarian.
➢ The presidents of Turkmenistan and Uzbekistan appointed themselves to power first for ten
years.
➢ Economy of Russia, started reviving in 2000, ten years after their independence.
➢ The reason for the revival for most of their economies was the export of natural resources like oil,
natural gas and minerals.
➢ Azerbaijan, Kazakhstan, Russia, Turkmenistan and Uzbekistan are major oil and gas
producers.
Tensions and Conflict

➢ Soviet Republics are prone to conflicts and many have civil wars and insurgencies.
➢ In Russia, two republics, Chechnya and Dagestan, have had violent secessionist movements.
➢ Moscow’s method of dealing with the Chechen rebels and indiscriminate military bombings have
led to many human rights violations but failed to deter the aspirations for independence.
➢ Tajikistan witnessed a civil war that went on for ten years till 2001.
➢ In Azerbaijan’s province of Nagorno-Karabakh, some local Armenians want to secede and join
Armenia.
➢ In Georgia, the demand for independence has come from two provinces, resulting in a civil war.
➢ There are movements against the existing regimes in Ukraine, Kyrgyzstan and Georgia. Countries
and provinces are fighting over river waters.
➢ The Central Asian Republics are areas with vast Hydrocarbon Resources, which have brought
them economic benefit.
➢ Central Asia has also become a zone of competition between outside powers and oil companies.
➢ After 11 September 2001, the US wanted military bases in the region.
➢ Russia perceives these states as its ‘Near Abroad’ and believes that they should be under Russian
influence.
➢ China has interests here because of the oil resources.
➢ Czechoslovakia split peacefully into two, with the Czechs and the Slovaks forming independent
countries.
➢ Balkan republics of Yugoslavia. After 1991, it broke apart with several provinces like Croatia,
Slovenia and Bosnia and Herzegovina declaring independence.
India and Post-Communist

➢ India has maintained good relations with all the post-communist countries strongest relations are
still those between Russia and India.
➢ India’s relations with Russia are an important aspect of India’s foreign policy.
➢ Indo-Russian relations are embedded in a history of trust and common interests.
➢ Russia and India share a vision of a multipolar world order.
➢ A Multipolar World is the co-existence of several powers in the international system, collective
security greater regionalism, negotiated settlements of international conflicts and an independent
foreign policy for all countries.
➢ More than 80 Bi-lateral Agreements have been signed between India and Russia as part of the
Indo-Russian Strategic Agreement of 2001.
➢ India stands to benefit from its relationship with Russia on issues like Kashmir, Energy Supplies,
➢ Sharing information on international terrorism access to Central Asia, and balancing its relations
with China.
➢ India is the Second Largest Arms Market for Russia.
➢ The Indian military gets most of its Hardware from Russia.
➢ India is an Oil Importing Nation.
➢ India is seeking to increase its energy imports from Russia and the republics of Kazakhstan and
Turkmenistan.
➢ Russia is important for India’s Nuclear Energy plans and assisted India’s Space Industry by giving,
for example, the Cryogenic Rocket when India needed it.
➢ Russia and India have collaborated on various Scientific Projects.
MCQ TYPE QUESTIONS -

Q.1- Who was the founder of ‘Bolshevik Communist Party’?
(A) Lenin
(B) Stalin
(C) Vladimir Putin
(D) Gorbachev
Q.2- ‘Socialist Bloc’ Countries were called?
(A) Second World
(B) First World
(C) Third World
(D) Fourth World
Q.3-Who started the policy of Perestroika (Restructuring) and Glasnost (Openness)?
(A) Boris Yeltsin
(B) Nikita Khrushchev
(C) Joseph Stalin
(D) Gorbachev
Q.4-The Union of Soviet Socialist Republic (USSR) came into being after the socialist revolution in
Russia in?
(A) 1919
(B) 1920
(C) 1916
(D) 1917
Q.5-Who gave the Model of Shock Therapy?
(A) World Bank and Asian Development Bank
(B) IMF and ADB
(C) World Bank and IMF
(D) World Bank and IAEA
Q.6-Give the name of the two republics where violent secessionist movements took place?
(A) Tajikistan and Dagestan
(B) Dagestan and Nagorno Karabakh
(C) Chechnya and Tajikistan
(D) Chechnya and Dagestan
Q.7-Give the name first Soviet Republic among these who declared its independence?
(A) Chechnya
(B) Dagestan
(C) Lithuania
(D) Latvia
Q.8-Who gave the name of New World Order?
(A) Bill Clinton
(B) Barak Hussain Obama
(C) George Bush
(D) George W. Bush
Q.9-Which country is not included in CIS?
(A) Russia
(B) Georgia
(C) Belarus
(D) Indonesia
Q.10-When CIS was founded?
(A) 1990
(B) 1991
(C) 1992
(D) 1993
Q.11-When did the Arab Revolution begin?
(A) 2004
(B) 2006
(C) 2010
(D) 2009
Q.12-The struggle was started in Tunisia against………..?
(A) Poverty
(B) Corruption
(C) Unemployment
(D) All of these
Q.13-How many countries were included in the Soviet Union?
(A) 10
(B) 15
(C) 20
(D) 25
Q.14- Arrange the following in chronological order?
(i) Unification of Germany.
(ii) Disintegration of Soviet Union.
(iii) Berlin Wall Built.
(iv) Marshall Plan.
(A) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i)
(B)(ii) (iii) (iv) (i)
(C) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii)
(D) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii)
Q.15-When did India sign the 20-yearss ‘Treaty of Peace and Friendship’ with the Soviet Union?
(A) 1962
(B) 1965
(C) 1971
(D) 1984
Q.16-In August 1990, Iraq invaded…………………….?
(A) Saudi Arab
(B) Vietnam
(C) Iran
(D) Kuwait
(i) Declaration of its independence from Soviet Union by Russian Parliament.
(ii) Formation of Commonwealth of Independent States.
(iii) Beginning of the movement for independence in Lithuania.
(iv) Gorbachev became the General Secretary of the Communist Party of the Soviet Union.
(A) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii)
(B) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv)
(C) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii)
(D) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii)
Q.18. The question below, there are two statements marked as Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Read
the statements and choose the correct option.
Assertion: - Russia got the seat of Soviet Union in the Security Council.
Reason: - Russia was accepted as the successor state of the Soviet Union.
(A) If both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the correct explanation of (A).
(B) If both (A) and (R) are true, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A).
(C) If (A) is true but (R) is false.
(D) If (A) is false but (R) is true.
VERY SHORT TYPE ANSWER - 2 Marks

Q.1-What do you understand by Second World?
Ans.- The nations of Eastern Europe came under the control of USSR. Soviet army had liberated them from
fascist forces. The political and economic system of all these countries were moulded as per USSR’s
political and socialist ideals. This group of countries was termed as Second World or Socialist Bloc.
Q.2-Which was the ‘Largest Garage Sale in History’ of Soviet Union?
Ans.- The large state controlled industrial complex almost collapsed in Soviet System, about 90% of its
industries were put up for sale to private individuals and companies.
Q.3- Give a brief description of Vladimir Lenin?
Ans.- Karl Marx’s theory of communism inspired Vladimir Lenin. Lenin founded Bolshevik communist
party of Russia. He became founder head of the Soviet Union by revolutionising against capitalism in 1977.
Q.4-Who was Joseph Stalin?
Ans. – Joseph Stalin is known to be the successor of Lenin. Stalin introduced rapid industrialisation and
forcible collectivisation of agriculture. Stalin was responsible for the authoritarian functioning and
elimination of rivals within the party.
Q.5-Write a short note about Nikita Khrushchev?
Ans. – He was President of Soviet Union from 1953 – 1964, After Joseph Stalin. He was a strong opponent
of Stalin’s leadership style. He introduced some reforms in 1956. He suggested the philosophy of ‘Peaceful
Co-Existence’ and improve the relations with West in Cold War.
Q.6-What was Soviet System?
Ans. – USSR came after the socialist revolution in Russia in 1917. Revolution was inspired by the ideals of
socialism and need for egalitarian society. This attempt was to abolish the institution of private property.
Q.7-Write two features of Soviet System?
Ans. – To give preference to communist party without accepting any other political party’s identity.
- Economy was planned and controlled by the state.
Q.8-What is Shock Therapy?
Ans. - Soviet Union Republics went through painful process of transition from an authoritarian socialist
system to a democratic capitalist system after the collapse of communism. The model of transition in
Russia, Central Asia and East Europe was influenced by World Bank and IMF came to be known as Shock
Therapy.
Q.9-When and why did India sign ‘20 years Treaty of Friendship and Peace’ with USSR?
Ans.- India signed 20th years treaty of friendship and peace in August 1971 with USSR. USSR ensured India
that if any outsider attacks India, USSR would provide its military support to India.
Q.10- How many years did ‘Civil War’ continue in Tajikistan? When did civil war end?
Ans. – Tajikistan witnessed ‘Civil War’ for ten years till 2001.
SHORT TYPE ANSWERS - 4 Marks

Q.1-Write the features that made Soviet System an exemplary Model?
Ans. Features of Soviet System are:
1- Soviet Union had complex communication network. It had vast energy resources including iron,
oil and steel.
2- It had machinery production system and transport sector that connected its remote areas with
efficiency.
3- It had a domestic consumer industry that produce everything from pins to cars.
4- Soviet State ensured a minimum standard of living for all citizens.
5- Soviet government subsidised basic necessities including health, education, childcare and
welfare schemes.
Q.2-Explain the four consequences of Shock Therapy?
Ans. Consequences of Shock Therapy are following:
I- Collapse of Industries - About 90 percent of its industries were put up for sale to private
individuals and companies. The restructuring was carried out through marked forces. It lead to
the virtual disappearance of all the industries.
II- Decline of Food Security – The value of Rubel, the Russian currency, declined dramatically. The
rate of inflation was high that people lost their savings. The collective farm system disintegrated.
III- Social Changes - The old system of social welfare was systematically destroyed. The middle
classes were pushed to the periphery of society. The academic and intellectual men migrated.
IV- Insolvency - Result of Shock Therapy banks and financial institution went bankrupt in Russia.
Private shareholders was lost.
Q.3-Describe the factors that made most of the former Soviet Republics prone to conflict and
threats?
Ans:
A- Internal weaknesses of Soviet political and economic institution.
B- Economic stagnation for many years led to sever shortage of consumer goods.
C- Soviet economy used of its resources in maintaining a nuclear and military arsenal.
D- They could see disparities between their system and the system of the West.
E- Rise of Nationalism and the desire of Sovereignty within various republics.
Q.4-Who was Mikhail Gorbachev? Was he responsible for the disintegration of the Soviet Union?
Ans.
1- Mikhail Gorbachev was the last President of Soviet Union.
2- His policies was the reason behind the disintegration of Soviet Union. He introduced economic and
political reform policies of Perestroika (Reconstructing) and Glasnost (Openness) to remove the
dissatisfaction of public.
3- He established peace by withdrawing Soviet troops from Afghanistan.
4- It was his political failure that inspire of his efforts.
Q.5-Whom did President George Bush call the ‘New World Order’?
Ans. –
1- Iraq invaded Kuwait and captured it and disturbed the peace of the Gulf region in August 1990.
2- The entire International Community appealed to Iraq to free Kuwait, but all diplomatic efforts to
accept Iraq failed.
3- As a result the United Nations declared Iraq an invader and liberated Kuwait.
4- It is a dramatic turn for the United Nations that the United Nations was able to decide on the Iraq
matter so easily.
5- US President George Bush described it as the New World Order.
Q.6-Describe the military actions taken during the Clinton Era?
Ans. –
A- Proceeding Against Yugoslavia – During Clinton’s time, the United States took military action
against Yugoslavia. Albanians living in the Kosovo province of Yugoslavia were in crisis due to the
army of Yugoslavia. NATO forces, led by the US, bombed Yugoslavia for nearly two months. This led
to two major changes the collapse of the government of Slobodan Milosevic and the stagnation of
NATO forces in Kosovo.
B- Operation Infinite Reach: - The second military campaign of the Clinton era was ‘Operation
Infinite Reach’. In 1919 the terrorist organisation Al-Qaeda bombed the US embassies in Nairobi
(Kenya) and Dar-E-Salam (Tanzania). The bombings were based on radical Muslim views. Attacks
were carried out by cruise missiles in Afghanistan and Sudan targeting Al-Qaeda’s Camps. It also
targeted some cities or civilian areas.
Q.7-Write a short note on the Arab Revolution?
Ans. –
1- The 21st century saw the emergence of new developments democratisation in West Asian
countries.
2- This is known as the ‘Arab Revolution’, which began in 2009.
3- The Arab Revolution started in Tunisia, where people started their struggle against corruption,
unemployment and poverty.
4- This struggle turned into a political movement because people were considering their troubles as
the result of autocratic dictatorship.
Q.8-Briefly describe about Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS)?
Ans. –
1- CIS was established in Belarus on December 8, 1991.
2- The participant of CIS spoke on basis of Sovereign equality.
3- It is called Russian Commonwealth of Nations.
4- Head of the CIS states signed an agreement to from an economic union to create a common
economic space based on the free movement of goods, services, force labour, capital in 1939.
Q.9-Describe positive and negative features of Soviet System in the Soviet Union?
Ans.-Positive Features-
I- The government subsidised the basic needs including health, education.
II- There were no unemployment.
III- Minimum standard of living was ensured for all.
Negative Features-
I- Lack of democracy
II- Absence of freedom of speech
III- System was authoritarian.
Q.10-Why were people dissatisfied with Soviet System?
Ans.-
A- Soviet system was based on Ideology Socialist.
B- Social, economic and political life was under of state control.
C- System was Centred Communist Party.
D- The Party Bureaucrats have more Privileges.
LONG TYPE ANSWERS - 6 MARKS

Q.1-Describe the role of Gorbachev to reform the Soviet System and the effects of these reforms on
the USSR?
Ans:
i- The policies of economic and political reforms- Perestroika (Restructuring).
ii- Glasnost (Openness)
iii- To stop the arms race with the US
iv- The withdrawal of Soviet troop from Afghanistan and Eastern Europe.
Effects of the Reform:
i- Gorbachev promised to reform the economy catch up with the West yet Soviet Union collapsed.
ii- The Communist Party members felt that their power and privileges were eroding.
iii- His reform gave rise of nationalism and desire for sovereignty within various republics.
iv- The ordinary people felt alienated from the Central Asian Countries.
Q.2-What was Soviet System? Explain the features of Soviet System?
Ans.
The USSR came into being after the Bolshevik revolution in 1917. The revolution was inspired by the ideals
of socialism with the aim to setup egalitarian society. Bolshevik revolution opposed to capitalism and
abolished the institution of private property and consciously design a society based on the principles of
equality. No other political party was allowed. This Bolshevik controlled system was known as Soviet
System.
1- Soviet Union had complex machinery production system and transport sector that connected its
remotest areas with efficiency.
2- It had complex communication network.
3- It had vast energy resources including iron, oil and steel.
4- It had domestic consumer industry that produced everything from pins to cars.
5- The Soviet state ensured a minimum standard of living for all citizens.
6- State ownership was the dominant form of ownership.
Q.3-Explain the reasons that forced Gorbachev to bring improvement in Soviet Union?
Ans.
I- Political and Economic Aspirations of people in USSR were not fulfilled.
II- People of Soviet Union were dissatisfied with the bureaucratic and authoritarian system.
III- Reform were necessary to keep USSR abreast of information and technical revolution taking place
in West.
IV- Communist party had full control and neutral towards aspiration of people of 15 Republics.
V- After the death of Brezhnev, Gorbachev took the leadership of Soviet Union.
VI- Gorbachev felt that economy had become stagnant.
VII- A Coup took place in 1991 which was encouraged by Communist party hardliners.
Q.4-Describe the loopholes of Soviet System?
Ans.
A- Social, economic and political life of Soviet Citizens was fully under the control of State.
B- Communist Party of Soviet Union had control over all the institutions and unaccountable to the
people.
C- Lack of democracy and absence of freedom of speech of people.
D- The party refused to recognise the urge of people in the 15th republics.
E- The Soviet Union lagged behind the west in technology, infrastructure.
F- Soviet invasion of Afghanistan in 1979 weakened the system even further.
Q.5-How did the Soviet Union suddenly disintegrate? Explain any sis reasons?
Or
Describe the six factors responsible for the disintegration of USSR?
Ans.-
i- Soviet Union emerged as a super power after the Second World War.
ii- Communist party had a complete control over Soviet Union. Party failed to accomplish the
aspirations of people of Soviet Union.
iii- Leaders of Soviet Union guaranteed respected standard of living after Soviet Revolution to common
citizens.
iv- Some people believed that Soviet Union had dominated Eastern Europe after the II World War.
v- Communist party was the only party that ruled 72 years after the revolution of 1917.
vi- Gorbachev implemented policies of Perestroika and Glasnost.
vii- Soviet Union created problems for itself by doing military interference in Afghanistan.
viii- There were serious reaction of citizens of Soviet Union over economic reforms and policies
of openness.
Q.6-Explain any six consequences of disintegration of Soviet Union?
Ans.
1- End of Cold War: The ideological dispute over, whether the socialist system would beat the
capitalist system was not an issue anymore.
2- End of Arms Race: Cold war had engaged the two blocs, had triggered a massive arms race and
accumulation of nuclear weapons of military blocs.
3- Unipolar System: The possibility of disintegration of Soviet Union was expressed as either unipolar
international politics with domination of remaining one superpower on the rapidly changing
international stage EU, SAARC, ASEAN, could become important players in international system.
4- Emergence of New Countries: The end of Soviet Bloc meant the emergence of new countries. New
countries had their own independent aspirations to join the EU and NATO. The Central Asian
Republics wanted to take advantage of their geographical location.
5- Supremacy of Capitalist Ideology: This was proved after disintegration of Soviet Union and
conflict between Capitalist and Communist ideology was over.
6- Emergence of Unipolar Power: India had successfully maintained its relations with USA and
Soviet Union under the policy of Non-Alignment.
Q.7-What was Shock Therapy? Was this the best way to make a transition from Communism to
Capitalism?
Ans. Soviet Union Republics went through painful process of transition from an authoritarian socialist
system to a democratic capitalist system after the collapse of communism. The model of transition in
Russia, Central Asia and East Europe was influenced by World Bank and IMF came to be known as Shock
Therapy.
Shortcomings:
1- It brought ruin to the economies and disaster upon the people of the entire region.
2- State controlled industrial complex collapsed.
3- The rate of inflation raised high
4- Value of Rubel declined
5- Food crisis arose because of this they started importing food.
6- Inequality between rich and poor increased.
7- The building of democratic institution was weak.
4 MARKS PASSAGE AND MAP BASED-
Q.1-Read the passage below and answer the following questions:
The 21st century witnessed emergence of new developments for democracies and democratization in West
Asian Countries, one such event is characterised as Arab Spring that began in 2009. Located in Tunisia, the
Arab Spring took its roots where the struggle against corruption, unemployment and poverty was started
by the public which turned into a political movement because the people considered the existing problems
as outcome of autocratic dictatorship. The demand for democracy that started in Tunisia spread
throughout the Muslim dominated Arab countries in West Asia.
(I) Emergence of new developments for democracies and democratization in West Asian Countries,
started when?
(A) 20th Century
(B) Mid of 20th Century
(C) 21st Century
(D) 19th Century
(II) Where Arab Spring took its roots?
(A) East Timor
(B) Nepal
(C) Iran
(D) Tunisia
(III) Which form is Arab Spring?
(A) A World Order
(B) A movement
(C) A planning
(D) A characterized
(IV) In which form did the struggle of Tunisia people against corruption, unemployment and poverty
transform?
(A)Political Movement
(B) Cultural Movement
(C) Social Movement
(D) Economic Movement
The value of the rubel declined dramatically. The rate of inflation was so high that people lost all their
savings. The collective farm system disintegrated leaving people without food security and the government
started to import food. The old trading structure broke down with no alternative in its place. The old system
of social welfare was systematically destroyed. The withdrawal of government subsidies pushed large
sections of the people into poverty.
(I) How did the disintegration of collective farms system lead to the loss of food security?
(A) Farming privatised
(B) Good grains come to be purchased form the open market.
(C) The government had no control over the prices.
(D) All of above
(II) Why the government did started importing food?
(A) Due to farming becoming privatised.
(B) Providing food grains to people became difficult.
(C) Both (A) and (B)
(D) None of these
(III) What is meant by subsidy?
(A)The low price of a product as compared to the open market price.
(B) People have to give only 25% price of product.
(C) People get free product from the government.
(D) All of these
(IV) This passage is associated with which country?
(A) China
(B) India
(C) France
(D) Russia
The soviet economy used much of its resources in maintaining a nuclear and military arsenal and the
development of its satellite states in Eastern Europe and within the Soviet System. This led to a huge
economic burden that the system could not cope with. At the same time, ordinary citizen became more
knowledgeable about the economic advance of West. They could see the disparities between their systems
and the systems of the West.
(I) How did citizens of Soviet Union identify their own backwardness?
(A)Seeing their government system and Asian Countries.
(B) Prosperity of citizens.
(C) Difference between their government system and the West.
(D) All of these.
(II) What were the Soviet Citizens being told?
(A) High corruption.
(B) Openness of the administration.
(C) System is better than Western Capitalism.
(D) None of these.
(III) What does this passage state about Soviet Union?
(A)Reasons of disintegration of Soviet Union.
(B) About the foreign relations of Soviet Union.
(C) About the capitalist system of America.
(D) None of these.
(IV) On which field Soviet Union spent most of its resources?
(A) Culture of Soviet Union.
(B)Military hardware and nuclear weapons.
(C) On their citizens.
(D) On Asian countries.
Q.4-In the given map of world, identify the places marked as (A), (B), (C) and (D) write their correct
names, their serial number and related alphabet?
In the given outline political map of India, four states have been marked as (A) (B) (C) and (D). Identify
these states on the basis of the information given below and write their correct names in your answer book
along with the respective serial numbers of the information used and the concerned alphabets as per the
format that follows: 1+1+1+1=4
Sr. Number for the Alphabet Concerned Name of the States

information used
(I)
(II)
(III)
(IV)
(A) Nation that came into existence after the socialist revolution of 1917. Russia
(B) A nation that was interfered by Soviet Union in 1979. Afghanistan
(C) Countries that came into existence after 1991. Slovenia
(D) Nation that suffered due to Civil War for 10 Years up to 2001. Tajikistan
NEW CENTERS OF POWER

Gist of New Centres of Power
➢ ASEAN – Association of South East Asian Nations.
➢ EU – European Union.
➢ In 1945, the European states confronted the ruin of their economies and the destruction of the
assumptions and structures on which Europe had been founded.
➢ European integration after 1945 was aided by the Cold War.
➢ America extended massive financial help for reviving Europe’s economy under the ‘Marshall Plan’.
➢ The US also created a new collective security structure under NATO.
➢ Under the Marshall Plan, the Organisation for European Economic Cooperation (OEEC) was
established in 1948 to channel aid to the West European States.
➢ It became a forum where the western European states began to cooperate on trade and economic
issues.
➢ The Council of Europe established in 1949, was another step forward in political cooperation.
➢ The process of economic integration of European capitalist countries proceeded step by step
leading to the formation of the European Economic Community in 1957.
➢ This process acquired a political dimension with the creation of the European Parliament.
➢ The collapse of the Soviet bloc put Europe on a fast track and resulted in the establishment of the
European Union in 1992.
➢ The foundation was thus laid for a common foreign and security policy cooperation on justice and
home affairs, and the creation of a single currency.
➢ The EU has started to act more as a nation state.
➢ A Constitution for the EU have failed, it has its own flag, anthem, founding date, and currency.
➢ It also has some form of a common foreign and security policy in its dealings with other nations.
➢ The European Union has tried to expand areas of cooperation.
➢ Many countries are not very enthusiastic in giving the EU powers.
➢ The EU has economic, political and diplomatic, and military influence.
➢ The EU is the world’s biggest economy.
➢ Its currency, the Euro, can pose a threat to the dominance of the US dollar.
➢ Its share of world trade is three times larger.
➢ It also functions as an important bloc in international economic organisations such as the World
Trade Organisation (WTO).
➢ The EU also has political and diplomatic influence.
➢ Two members of the EU, Britain and France, hold permanent seats on the UN Security Council.
➢ The EU includes several non-permanent members of the UNSC.
➢ Its use of diplomacy, economic investments, and negotiations rather than coercion and military
force has been effective as in the case of its dialogue with China on human rights and environmental
degradation.
➢ Military, The EU’s combined armed forces are the second largest in the world.
➢ The EU’s total expenditure on defence is second after the US.
➢ Two EU member states, Britain and France, also have nuclear arsenals.
➢ It is also the world’s second most important source of space and communications technology.
➢ The EU is able to intervene in economic, political and social areas.
EUROPEAN UNION
➢ Member states have their own foreign relations and defence policies.
➢ Britain’s Prime Minister Tony Blair was America’s partner in the Iraq invasion.
➢ EU’s newer members made up the US led ‘coalition of the willing’ whereas Germany and France
opposed American policy.
➢ There is also a deep-seated ‘Euro Skepticism’ in some parts of Europe about the EU’s integrationist
agenda.
➢ Britain’s former Prime Minister, Margaret Thatcher, kept the UK out of the European Market.
➢ Denmark and Sweden have resisted the Maastricht Treaty and the adoption of the euro, the
common European currency.
ASEAN
➢ During the Second World War, South –East Asian region suffered the economic and political
consequences.
➢ It confronted problems of nation-building, the ravages of poverty and economic backwardness
and the pressure to align with one great power or another during the Cold War.
➢ Efforts at Asian and Third World unity, such as the Bandung Conference and the Non-Aligned
Movement, were ineffective in establishing the conventions for informal cooperation and
interaction.
➢ The Southeast Asian nations sought an alternative by establishing the Association for South East
Asian Nations (ASEAN).
➢ ASEAN was established in 1967 by five countries Indonesia, Malaysia, Philippines, Singapore
and Thailand (Five Founder) — by signing the Bangkok Declaration.
➢ The objectives of ASEAN were primarily to accelerate economic growth and through that ‘social
progress and cultural development.
➢ Secondary objective was to promote regional peace and stability based on the rule of law and
the principles of the United Nations Charter.
➢ Over the years, Brunei Darussalam, Vietnam, Lao PDR, Myanmar (Burma) and Cambodia joined
ASEAN taking its strength to ten.
➢ Unlike the EU there is little desire in ASEAN for supranational structures and institutions.
➢ The ‘ASEAN Way’, a form of interaction that is informal, non-confrontationist and cooperative. The
respect for national sovereignty is critical to the functioning of ASEAN.
➢ The fastest growing economies in the world, ASEAN broadened its objectives beyond the economic
and social spheres.
➢ Three pillars, namely, the ASEAN Security Community, the ASEAN Economic Community and
the ASEAN Socio-Cultural Community in 2003.
➢ The ASEAN security community was based on the conviction that outstanding territorial disputes
should not escalate into armed confrontation.
➢ ASEAN had several agreements in place by which member states promised to uphold peace,
neutrality, cooperation, non-interference and respect for national differences and sovereign
rights.
➢ The ASEAN Regional Forum (ARF), which was established in 1994.
➢ The objectives of ARF is the organisation that carries out coordination of security and foreign
policy.
➢ ASEAN was and still remains principally an economic association.
➢ ASEAN region as a whole is a much smaller economy compared to the US, the EU, and Japan. Its
economy is growing much faster than all these.
➢ The objectives of the ASEAN Economic Community are to create a common market and
production base within ASEAN states and to aid social and economic development in the
region.
➢ The Economic Community like to improve the existing ASEAN Dispute Settlement Mechanism to
resolve economic disputes.
➢ ASEAN has focused on creating a Free Trade Area (FTA) for investment, labour, and services.
➢ The US and China have already moved fast to negotiate FTAs with ASEAN.
➢ ASEAN is rapidly growing into a very important regional organisation.
➢ Vision 2020 :- has defined an outward-looking role for ASEAN in the international community. This
builds on the existing ASEAN policy to encourage negotiation over conflicts in the region.
➢ ASEAN has mediated the end of Cambodian conflict and East Timor crisis.
➢ Economic strength of ASEAN relevance as a trading and investment partner.
➢ During the Cold War years Indian foreign policy did not pay adequate attention to ASEAN.
➢ India has tried to make amends in FTA and signed FTAs with three ASEAN members, Singapore,
Malaysia and Thailand. India sign an FTA with ASEAN itself in 2010.
➢ ASEAN’s strength :- policies of interaction and consultation with member states.
➢ ASEAN is the only regional association in Asia that provides a political forum where Asian countries
and the major powers can discuss political and security concerns.
Rise of the Chinese Economy

➢ Third major alternative centre of power is China.
➢ China’s economic success since 1978 has been linked to its rise as a great power.
➢ China has been the fastest growing economy.
➢ The US as the world’s largest economy by 2040.
➢ Its economic integration into the region makes it the driver of East Asian growth.
➢ It enormous influence in regional affairs.
➢ The strength of its Economic factors such as population, land mass, resources, regional location
and political influence, together with other.
➢ People’s Republic of China in 1949, following the communist revolution under the leadership of
Mao.
➢ Its economy was based on the Soviet model.
➢ The economically backward communist China chose to sever its links with the capitalist world.
➢ The model was to create a state-owned heavy industries sector from the capital accumulated
from agriculture.
➢ It was short of foreign exchange.
➢ It needed in order to buy technology and goods on the world market.
➢ China decided to substitute imports by domestic goods.
➢ Employment and social welfare was assured to all citizens.
➢ China moved ahead of most developing countries in educating its citizens and ensuring better
health.
➢ The economy also grew at a respectable rate of 5-6 per cent.
➢ But an annual growth of 2-3 per cent in population meant that economic growth was insufficient.
➢ Agricultural production was not sufficient to generate a surplus for industry.
➢ A similar crisis was to faced China - its industrial production was not growing fast enough,
international trade was minimal and per capita income was very low.
➢ The Chinese leadership took major policy decisions in the 1970s.
➢ China ended its political and economic isolation with the establishment of relations with the
United States in 1972.
➢ Zhou Enlai proposed the ‘Four Modernisations’ (Agriculture, Industry, Science and Technology
and Military) in 1973.
➢ Deng Xiaoping announced the ‘Open Door’ policy and economic reforms in China in 1978.
➢ The policy was to generate higher productivity by investments of capital and technology.
➢ China followed its own path in introducing a market economy.
➢ Chinese did not go for ‘shock therapy’ but opened their economy step by step.
➢ The privatisation of agriculture was followed in 1982.
➢ Privatisation of industry was followed in 1998.
➢ Trade barriers were eliminated only in Special Economic Zones (SEZs).
➢ In China, the state played central role in setting up a market economy.
➢ New economic policies helped the Chinese economy to break from stagnation.
➢ Privatisation of agriculture led to a remarkable rise in agricultural production and rural incomes.
➢ Personal savings in the rural economy lead to an exponential growth in rural industry.
➢ Chinese economy grew a faster rate including both industry and agriculture.
➢ New trading laws and the creation of Special Economic Zones led to rise in foreign trade.
➢ China has become the most important destination for foreign direct investment (FDI) in the world.
➢ China has large foreign exchange reserves.
➢ China’s accession to the WTO in 2001 has been a further step in its opening to the outside world.
➢ China plans to deepen its integration into the world economy and shape the future world economic
order.
➢ China has become an economic power regionally and globally.
➢ Fears of China’s rise have also been mitigated by its contributions to the stability of the ASEAN
economies after the 1997 financial crisis.
India-China Relations
➢ India and China are great powers in Asia. China has long history of dynastic rulers. Mongolia, Korea
was the parts of Indo-China.
➢ Tibet accepted China’s authority.
➢ Various kingdoms and empires in India also extended their influence beyond their Borders.
➢ India and China exercised influence rarely ever overlapped.
➢ There was limited political and cultural interaction.
➢ There is a hope that both the countries would come together to shape the future.
➢ The slogan of ‘Hindi-Chini Bhai-Bhai’ was popular.
➢ Military conflict over a border dispute.
➢ Both states were involved in differences arising when the Chinese takeover over the Tibet in 1950.
➢ China and India were involved in a border conflict in 1962, territorial claims in Arunachal
Pradesh and Aksai Chin region of Ladakh.
➢ The conflict of 1962, in which India suffered military reverses, which had long-term implications
for India–China relations.
➢ Diplomatic relations between the two countries were downgraded until 1976.
➢ China’s policy became more pragmatic and less ideological.
➢ A series of talks to resolve the border issue were also initiated in 1981.
➢ After the end of the Cold War, there have been significant changes in India– China relations.
➢ Their relations are now strategic as well as an economic.
➢ As rising powers in global politics, both the countries play a major role in the Asian economy and
politics.
➢ In December 1988, Rajiv Gandhi’s (Prime Minister) visited to China provided an improvement in
Indo-China Relations.
➢ India China have taken measures to contain conflict and maintain ‘peace and tranquillity’ on the
border.
➢ They have also signed agreements on cultural exchanges, cooperation in science and technology
and opened four border posts for trade.
➢ Bilateral trade relations between India and China has increased. Both countries have agreed to
cooperate with each other.
➢ India and China have adopted similar policies in international Issues like the World Trade
Organisation and Environment.
➢ Conflict between India and China : Nuclear Tests in 1998, China’s military relations with
Bangladesh and Myanmar, Border Disputes, Arunachal Pradesh and Aksai Chin.
➢ India and China are now becoming more familiar with each other.
MCQ TYPE QUESTIONS -

Q.-1- Name the currency of the ‘European Union’?
(A) Ruble
(B) Dollar
(C ) Pound
(D) Euro
Q.-2- Which two countries of the European Union are the permanent members of the UN Security
Council?
(A) France-America
(B) France-Britain
(C ) Britain- China
(D) China - America
Q.3- Which organisation was established to give economic aid to the West-European Countries?
(A) ASEAN
(B) EU
(C ) OEEC
(D) All of these
Q.4- What do you mean by Marshall Plan?
(A) USA extended massive financial help for Europe’s economy.
(B) Russian help to reorganise the East European economy.
(C ) To reorganise the economy of the Eastern Europe, assistance given by USA and USSR.
(D) None of these
Q.5- Which of the following included in BRICS?
(A) America
(B) India
(C ) Japan
(D) Italy
Q.-6- Where is the Headquarter of SAARC?
(A) Islamabad (Pakistan)
(B) Dhaka (Bangladesh)
(C ) New Delhi (India)
(D) Kathmandu (Nepal)
Q.7- The nations involved in SAARC are?
(A) India
(B) Bhutan
(C ) Maldives
(D) All of these
Q.8- India has signed ‘Free Trade Agreements’ with which two ASEAN Countries?
(A) Vietnam - Myanmar
(B) Malaysia - Thailand
(C ) Singapore - Thailand
(D) Cambodia - Brunei
Q.9- ASEAN is an organisation, whose basic objective is?
(A) Political
(B) Economic
(C ) Social
(D) None of these
Q.10- Which two countries resisted on the ‘Maastricht Treaty’ and the adoption of the EURO?
(A) Denmark - Sweden
(B) Sweden - Britain
(C ) Denmark - Britain
(D) All of these
Q.11- Which of the following country is not part of SAARC?
(A) Myanmar
(B) Bangladesh
(C ) Nepal
(D) India
Q.12- In which year under the leadership of Mao, the Communist Revolution took place?
(A) 1949
(B) 1949
(C ) 1950
(D) 1952
Q.13- Which country has adopted the ‘Open Door Policy’?
(A) Japan
(B) Soviet Union
(C ) America
(D) China
Q.14- In which year did China accede to World Trade Organisation?
(A) 2004
(B) 2003
(C ) 2002
(D) 2001
Q.15- Which country is known as Little Jewish Zionist Nation?
(A) India
(B) Nepal
(C ) China
(D) Israel
VERY SHORT TYPE ANSWERS - 2 Marks

Q.1- What is the significance of ‘Circle of 12 gold stars’ shown in the European Union Flag?
Ans. – The circle of gold stars stands for solidarity and harmony between the people of Europe. It has 12
stars, a number 12 is traditionally the symbol of perfection, completeness and unity.
Q.2- After the establishment in 1992, what changes could be seen in European Union?
Ans. – the European Union has evolved over the time from and economic union to an increasingly political
one. The EU has started to act more as a national state. It has its own flag, anthem and currency. It has
common foreign and security policy.
Q.3- Explain military capacity of European Union?
Ans. – European Union has strong and influential position in terms of strategy and military. Its armed forces
are the second largest in the world. Its spending on defence is second after the US.
Q.4- Write a reason for the formation of European Union?
Ans. – European Union was formed to make all European Countries capable of facing world’s superpower
at political, economic and cultural level and establish unity and coordination.
Q.5- Write any two features of EU which make it an effective organisation?
Ans. – Economic development – EU was the world’s largest economy.
Political and diplomatic power- It has strong political and diplomatic influence.
Q.-6- Write the name of Member countries included in European Union?
Ans. – Sweden, Finland, Denmark, Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, Netherlands, Ireland, UK, Poland, Belgium,
Germany, Luxembourg, Czech Republic, Slovakia, France, Austria, Hungary, Slovenia, Italy, Spain, Portugal,
Malta, Greece, Cyprus, Bulgaria, Croatia, Romania.
Q.7- What was Marshall Plan?
Ans. – USA extended massive financial help for reviving Europe’s economy. Under this plan the
organisation for European Economic Cooperation was established to channel aid to the western European
States.
Q.8- Which two alternative centres emerged after the end of bipolar structure?
Ans.- After the end of Bipolar structure in Europe, European Union. In Asia the Association of South-East
Asian Nations have emerged as forces to reckon with.
Q.9- What is ASEAN?
Ans.- ASEAN is an Association for South-East Asian Nations. It was established in 1967 in Asia to increase
unity and cooperation among countries of the third world.
Q.10- How has Open Door Policy benefitted China?
Ans. – Deng Xiaoping announced the ‘Open Door Policy’ and economic reform in China. Privatisation of
agriculture led to a remarkable rise in agriculture production and rural incomes.
SHORT TYPE ANSWERS - 4 Marks

Q.-1- How was European Union established?
Ans.- In 1945, the European states confronted the ruin of their economies and the destruction of the
assumptions and structures on which Europe had been founded, European integration after 1945 was
aided by the Cold War.
A- USA extended financial help for reviving Europe’s economy under the ‘Marshall Plan’.
B- Organisation for European Economic Co-operation (OEEC) was established in 1948 to aid to the
West European Countries.
C- The Council of Europe (CE) established in 1949 was another step forward in political co-operation.
D- European Economic Community (EEC) established in 1957 was process of economic integration of
Western European Countries.
E- Collapse of USSR put Europe on a fast and resulted in the establishment of the European Union in
1992.
Q.2- What is mean by ASEAN Way? Write its two objectives?
Ans. – ASEAN countries have celebrated what has become known as ‘ASEAN Way’, a form of interaction
that is Informal, Non-Confrontationist and Co-Operative.
Objectives:
1- To accelerate economic growth which will further promote Social Progress and Cultural
Development.
2- To Promote Regional Peace and Stability based on the rule of Law and the principles of the Charter
of the United Nations.
Q.3- Write any four features of ASEAN?
Ans. –
i- ASEAN countries adopted a form of interaction that informal, non-confrontationist and
cooperative.
ii- ASEAN is an economic organisation.
iii- ASEAN Vision 2020 has defined an outward looking role for ASEAN in the International
Community.
iv- ASEAN has focused on creating a Free Trade Area (FTA) for investment.
Q.4- Explain India’s policies towards ASEAN?
Ans. –
A- ASEAN is rapidly growing into a very important regional organisation.
B- The current economic strength of ASEAN, especially its economic relevance as a trading and
investment partner to the growing Asian economies such as India and China make this to attractive
proposition.
C- ASEAN came into effect in 1967, held no importance in India’s Foreign Policy.
D- India adopted Look East Policy which helped Asian Countries to expand their trade.
Q.5- Write the opportunities of ASEAN?
Ans. –
I- ASEAN has adopted the policy as form of interaction which is Informal, Non-confrontationist and
Co-operative.
II- It is an economic association. Its economy is faster.
III- It has adopted a policy encourages negotiation over conflicts in the region.
IV- It has captured the attention of countries with developing economies.
Q.-6- Mention any four factors that led to the rise of the Chinese economy?
Ans. –
1- Open door policy and economic reforms.
2- Four Modernisation (Agriculture, Industries, Military and Science and Technology) in 1973 by Zhou
Enlai.
3- Elimination of trade barriers in SEZs.
4- End of political and economic isolation.
Q.7- While the Chinese economy has improved dramatically, why has every Chinese not received
the benefits of the reforms? Give any four reasons?
Ans.-
i- The population of China has increased dramatically and economy has not been able to absorb so
many people thereby leading to unemployment.
ii- There has lopsided development with the coastal parts of China.
iii- There has not been an equal distribution of wealth across China leading to income and wealth
inequality.
iv- One child policy has skewed the demography in China.
Q.8- Write about the treaties of India-China?
Ans. –
A- Agreement on assistance in oil and natural gas.
B- To improve trust with defence cooperation.
C- To fasten work done by United work force formed due to boundary conflicts.
D- To improve mutual cooperation in communication and technology.
E- To celebrate ‘India Festival’ in China and ‘China Festival’ in India.
Q.9- ‘China and India are emerging as economic power’. Do you agree? Support your answer with
arguments?
Ans. –
I- India and China can develop significantly in their fields of science and technology with mutual
efforts.
II- India and China can control the baseless conditions of USA and other countries while taking loan
from World Bank and IMF.
III- A huge population can serve as a huge market for goods made by USA.
IV- India and China are favour of country’s economy, free trade policy, liberalisation and
globalisation.
Q.10- Describe the current state of Israel?
Ans.-
1- Israel has emerged as a powerful nation in 21 st century in defence and intelligence matters.
2- Israel has reached new heights in global political arena due to defence skills, technological
innovation and industrialization.
3- A resilient Jewish-Zionist nation, guided by the principle of continuity against adversity.
4- Israel plays a distinct role in contemporary global politics.
Q.11- Explain the main rules and principles of SAARC Charter?
Ans. –
A- Respect for the principles of mutual sovereignty, equality, territorial integrity, political
independence, internal affairs of other countries and mutual benefit by South Asian Countries.
B- Cooperation of South Asian Countries to further promote cooperation between each other
countries.
C- The cooperation of South Asian Countries should not be against the cooperation between each
other.
LONG TYPE ANSWERS - 6 MARKS

Q.-1 – What makes the European Union a highly influential regional organisation?
Ans. –
1- Establishment of Peace and Equality: War can never prove to be a step in the direction of country’s
development. Prosperity and peace can be established by maintaining equality.
2- Challenges to US Hegemony: US hegemony was established after the disintegration of Soviet Union.
EU was established and it was made strong so that they don’t have to bend in front of powers like
USA and China.
3- Economic Development: The EU is world’s largest economy with a GDP. It share world trade is three
times larger than that of the US.
4- Political and Diplomatic Powers: The EU also has strong political and diplomatic influence. This has
enabled the EU to influence some US policies, such as the current US position on Iran’s nuclear
programme.
5- Military Power: EU’s combined armed forces are the second largest in the world. Its total spending
on defence is second after the US. It is also the world’s second most important source of space and
communication technology.
Q.-2- Explain the pillars and objectives of the ASEAN Community?
Ans. –
I- ASEAN Security Community : This is based on the conviction that outstanding territorial
disputes should not escalate into armed confrontation. The ASEAN Regional Forum established
in 1994, is an organisation that carries out coordination of security and foreign policy.
II- ASEAN Economic Community : ASEAN still economic association. ASEAN region is a much
smaller economy compared to the US, EU and Japan. Its economy is growing much faster.
III- ASEAN Regional and Cultural Community : ASEAN is rapidly growing into a very important
regional organisation. Its vision 2020 has defined as outward looking role for in an international
community.
Q.3- Explain any four core objectives of ASEAN?
Ans. –
A- Promote regional peace and stability by following the principles.
B- Promote economic developments to gain social reform, cultural development and economic
development.
C- Increase mutual trust.
D- To be concerned about the people of South-East Asia and reform their improved standard of living.
E- To respect nation’s unity to keep ASEAN intact and capable.
F- To be bases of collective market and production for ASEAN countries.
Q.4- Analysed the factors responsible for the European Union to be a highly influential regional
organisation?
Ans.- In Political Field-
i- Britain and France hold permanent seats in the UN Security Council.
ii- It includes several Non-Permanent members of UNSC.
iii- EU has influenced some US policies.
Economic Field –
i- EU is the world’s largest economy.
ii- Its currency EURO can pose threat to US Dollar.
iii- Influence over its closest neighbours as well as in Asia and Africa.
Military Field –
i- EU’s military second largest in the world.
ii- Total spending on defence is second.
iii- Britain and France have nuclear arsenal.
Q.-5- Describe economic policies adopted by China for fast growth of development?
Ans. –
1- China did privatisation of agriculture which led to the remarkable rise in agriculture production.
2- China became a member of World Trade Organisation in 2001. Its economy was open to several
countries.
3- China attracted foreign investors towards itself.
4- Small banks were opened which improved farmer’s savings.
5- China gained success by its new economic policies.
6- China was highly benefitted in economic competition since its production was more at cheaper rate.
PASSAGE BASED, CARTOON BASED AND MAP BASED QUESTIONS – 4 MARKS

Q.-1- Read the passage given below and answer the questions that follow. 1+1+1+1=4
BRICS refers to Brazil, Russia, India, China and South Africa respectively. It was founded in 2006 in Russia.
BRIC turned into BRICS after inclusion of South Africa in its first meeting in the year 2009. The key
objectives of BRICS are primarily to cooperate and distribute mutual economic benefits among its members
besides non-interference in the internal policies of each nation and mutual equality.
I- When was BRICS founded?
(A) 2005
(B) 2001
(C) 2010
(D)2009
II- The Objectives of BRICS is?
(A) Non-intervention in the internal policies of each nation.
(B) Distribute mutual economic benefits among its members.
(C) Both A and B
(D) None of these
III- The country is not part of BRICS?
(A) Brazil
(B) Nepal
(C) India
(D) South Africa
IV- After joining of which country BRIC became BRICS?
(A) South Africa
(B) South Korea
(C) Singapore
(D) India
Shown on the world map with a pointer, Israel has emerged as one of the most powerful nations in the 21 st
century world in terms of science and technology, defence, intelligence besides economy. Situated in the
middle of the burning politics of West Asian countries, Israel has reached to the new heights of global
political standing by virtue of its indomitable defence prowess, technological innovations, industrialization
and agricultural development.
I- Israel is located in the World?
(A) West Asia
(B) East Asia
(C) Middle Asia
(D) Central Asia
II- In which other field Israel has emerged as powerful country?
(A) Science
(B) Technology
(C) Defence
(D)All of these
III- How is Israel viewed from the map?
(A) In the form of a dot
(B) In the form of a sea
(C) In the form of a desert
(D) In the form of a bay
IV- Israel has achieved Prominence in which field?
(A) Defence Skill
(B) Technical involves
(C) Industrialisation
(D)All of these
Q.3- Study the cartoon given below and answer the questions that follow? 1+1+2=4
I- Which part depicted in this cartoon is related to China?

II- Assess the power of China based on the cartoon?
III- China can be the world’s next superpower. Justify this statement by two arguments?
Ans-
I- The Grate Wall of China (Dragon)
II- China will become a Great Economic Power over USA. China is a Engine of East-Asian
Growth. China has a major role in power.
III- China has a important region for Foreign Direct Investment. China has large investor
reserves. It is capable of large investment in other nations. China develops the associated
role of looking outwards.

information used
(I)
(II)
(III)
(IV)
(I) An old member country of the European Union? Ireland

(II) A country which is a permanent member of UN Security Council? France
(III) Country which opposed the Treaty of Maastricht? Sweden
(IV) Country which opposed EURO, currency of European Union? Denmark
The new economic policies helped it to break stagnation. Privatisation of agriculture led to a remarkable
rise in agricultural production and rural incomes. High personal savings in the rural economy lead to an
exponential growth in rural industry. Industry and agriculture grew at a faster rate. The new trading laws
and the creation of Special Economic Zones led to a phenomenal rise in foreign trade. It has become the
most important destination for Foreign Direct Investment anywhere in the world. It has large foreign
exchange reserves that now allow it to make big investment in other countries.
I- Full form of SEZ?
(A) Secure Economic Zone
(B) Special English Zone
(C) Special Economic Zoom
(D) Special Economic Zone
II- New Economic Laws help a country recover from its roots?
(A) It has develop as the most attractive country for foreign direct Investment.
(B) In some days it got a major reserve of foreign currency.
(C) On its basis it is investing in other country.
(D) All of these
III- Which country has been discussed in the passage?
(A) Russia
(B)China
(C) India
(D) Israel
IV- What is correct in the terms of establishing Special Economic Zones?
(A) Its establishment increases foreign trade.
(B) The industrial laws of a country are not applicable in its special economic zones.
(C) In special economic zones industrial and economic barrier laws are not applied.
(D) All of these
CONTEMPORARY SOUTH ASIA

Gist of Contemporary South Asia
➢ SAARC- South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation (8 December,1985)
➢ Secretariat – Kathmandu in Nepal
➢ The expression ‘South Asia’ usually includes the following countries: Bangladesh, Bhutan, India,
Maldives, Nepal, Pakistan, Sri Lanka and Afghanistan.
➢ South Asia -Himalayas in the north and the vast Indian Ocean, the Arabian Sea and the Bay of Bengal
in the south, west and east respectively provide a natural insularity to the region, which is largely
responsible for the linguistic, social and cultural distinctiveness of the subcontinent.
➢ China is not considered to be a part of the region.
➢ South Asia stands for Diversity in every sense and yet constitutes one Geo-Political space.
➢ Many countries in South Asia do not have the same kind of political systems.
➢ Pakistan and Bangladesh have experienced both civilian and military rulers.
➢ Pakistan began successive democratic governments under Benazir Bhutto (1988) and Nawaz
Sharif respectively.
➢ Pakistan suffered a military coup in 13 October, 1999.
➢ Till 2006, Nepal was a constitutional monarchy with the king taking over executive powers.
➢ A successful popular uprising led to the restoration of democracy and reduced the powers of the
king to a nominal position in 2006.
➢ The experience of Bangladesh and Nepal, we can say that democracy is becoming an accepted norm
in the entire region of South Asia.
➢ Bhutan is still a monarchy but the king has initiated plans for its transition to multi-party
democracy.
➢ The Maldives, the other island nation, was a Sultanate till 1968 when it was transformed into a
republic with a presidential form of government.
➢ In June 2005, the parliament of the Maldives voted unanimously to introduce a multi-party
system.
➢ The Maldivian Democratic Party (MDP) dominates the political affairs of the island.
➢ Democracy strengthened in the Maldives after the 2005 elections.
➢ The people of all these countries share the aspiration for democracy.
➢ The attitudes of the people in the five big countries (India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Afghanistan, Nepal)
of South Asian Region showed widespread support for democracy in all these countries.
➢ Rich as well as poor and belonging to different religions, have the idea of democracy and support
the representative democracy.
➢ In earlier, It was believed that democracy could flourish and find support only in prosperous
countries of the world.
➢ The South Asian countries experience of democracy have expanded the global imagination of
democracy.
MILITATRY AND DEMOCRACY IN PAKISTAN

➢ In Pakistan, General Ayub Khan took over the administration of the country.
➢ General Ayub Khan got himself elected and to give up office when there was popular dissatisfaction
against his rule.
➢ This gave way to a military takeover once again under General Yahya Khan.
➢ During Yahya’s military rule, Pakistan faced the Bangladesh crisis, and after a war with India in
1971,
➢ East Pakistan broke away to emerge as an independent country called Bangladesh.
➢ An elected government under the leadership of Zulfikar Ali Bhutto came to power in Pakistan
from 1971 to 1977.
➢ The Bhutto government was removed by General Zia-Ul-Haq in 1977.
➢ General Zia faced a pro-democracy movement from 1982 onwards
➢ An elected democratic government was established once again in 1988 under the leadership of
Benazir Bhutto.
➢ Pakistan politics centred on the competition between the Pakistan People’s Party (PPP) and the
Muslim League (ML).
➢ The elective democracy lasted till 1999 when the army stopped in again. General Pervez Musharraf
removed Prime Minister Nawaz Sharif.
➢ In 2001, General Musharraf got himself elected as the President.
➢ Several factors have contributed to Pakistan’s failure in building a stable democracy : - The
social dominance of the military, clergy and landowning aristocracy has led to the frequent
overthrow of elected governments.
➢ Pakistan’s conflict with India has made the Pro-Military groups more powerful.
➢ Political parties and democracy in Pakistan are flawed, that Pakistan’s security would be
harmed by selfish-minded parties and chaotic democracy.
➢ Pakistan has a courageous and relatively Free Press and a strong human rights movement.
➢ The lack of genuine international support for democratic rule in Pakistan
➢ Pakistan has further encouraged the military to continue its dominance.
➢ United States and other Western countries have their fear of the threat of what they call ‘Global
Islamic Terrorism’.
➢ Pakistan’s nuclear arsenal might fall into the hands of these terrorist groups,
➢ The military regime in Pakistan has been seen as the protector of Western interests in West Asia
and South Asia.
DEMOCRACY IN BANGLADESH
➢ Bangladesh was a part of Pakistan from 1947 to 1971.It consisted of the partitioned areas of
Bengal and Assam from British India.
➢ The people of this region resented the domination of western Pakistan and the imposition of the
Urdu language.
➢ After the partition, People began protests against the unfair treatment meted out to the Bengali
culture and language
➢ People also demanded fair representation in administration and a fair share in political power.
➢ Sheikh Mujib-Ur-Rehman led the popular struggle against West Pakistan domination.
➢ Sheikh Mujib-Ur-Rehman demanded autonomy for the Eastern Region.
➢ The Awami League led by Sheikh Mujib won all the seats in East Pakistan and secured a majority
in the proposed constituent assembly for the whole of Pakistan in the 1970 elections.
➢ West Pakistan leaders refused to convene the assembly.
➢ Sheikh Mujib was arrested. Under the military rule of General Yahya Khan,
➢ Pakistan’s army tried to suppress the mass movement of the Bengali people.
➢ Thousands were killed by the Pakistan army. This led to a large scale migration and creating a
huge refugee problem for India.
➢ India supported the demand of the people of East Pakistan for their independence and helped them
financially and militarily.
➢ This resulted in a war between India and Pakistan in December 1971 that ended in the surrender
of the Pakistani forces in East Pakistan
➢ This was formation of Bangladesh as an independent country.
➢ Bangladesh drafted its constitution declaring faith in secularism, democracy and socialism.
➢ In 1975 Sheikh Mujib got the constitution amended to shift from the parliamentary to
Presidential form of government.
➢ The military ruler, Zia-Ur-Rahman, formed his own Bangladesh National Party and won elections
in 1979.
➢ Military takeover followed under the leadership of Gen H. M. Ershad.
➢ The people of Bangladesh soon rose in support of the demand for democracy.
➢ Mass public protests made Ershad step down in 1990. Elections were held in 1991.
➢ Since then representative democracy based on Multi-Party Elections has been working in
Bangladesh.
MONARCHY IN NEPAL
➢ Nepal was a Hindu kingdom in the past and then a constitutional monarchy.
➢ Political Parties and common people of Nepal have wanted a more open and responsive system
of government.
➢ The king accepted the demand for a new democratic constitution in 1990, democratic governments
had a short.
➢ The Maoists of Nepal believed in Armed Insurrection against the monarch and the ruling elite.
This led to a violent conflict between the Maoist guerrillas and the armed forces of the king
➢ There was a Triangular Conflict among the Monarchist Forces, Democrats and Maoists.
➢ The king abolished the parliament and dismissed the government in 2002
➢ In April 2006, there were massive, country wide, pro-democracy protests.
➢ The king was forced to restore the House of Representatives
➢ The non-violent movement was led by the Seven Party Alliance (SPA), Maoists and Social
Activists.
➢ The Maoist groups have agreed to suspend armed struggle.
➢ The Maoist want to include the Radical Programmes of social and economic restructuring in the
constitution.
➢ Nepal become a Democratic Republic after abolition of Monarchy in 2008.
➢ Nepal adopted New Constitution from 2015.
ETHNIC CONFLICT AND DEMOCRACY IN SRI LANKA

➢ Sri Lanka was known as Ceylon.
➢ Sri Lanka has retained its democracy since 1948. Sri Lanka faced a serious challenge, from the
military, monarchy and ethnic conflict. They demand for secession by one of the regions.
➢ Sri Lanka was dominated by forces that represented the interest of the majority Sinhala
community.
➢ Sinhala community were hostile to a large number of Tamils who had migrated from India to Sri
Lanka
➢ The Sinhala nationalists thought that Sri Lanka should not give ‘concessions’ to the Tamils because
Sri Lanka belongs to the Sinhala people only.
➢ The neglect of Tamil concerns led to militant Tamil Nationalism
➢ The militant organisation, the Liberation Tigers of Tamil Eelam (LTTE) has been fighting an armed
struggle with the army of Sri Lanka and demanding ‘Tamil Eelam’ or a separate country for the
Tamils of Sri Lanka from 1983.
➢ The Sri Lankan involves people of Indian origin in their problems.
➢ The government of India negotiate with the Sri Lankan government on the Tamil Question
➢ India signed an accord with Sri Lanka and sent troops to stabilise relations between the Sri Lankan
government and the Tamils in 1987,
➢ The presence of Indian troops was not liked by the Sri Lankans.
➢ Sri Lankan Government think that India is interfering in the internal affairs of Sri Lanka.
➢ In 1989, the Indian Peace Keeping Force (IPKF) pulled out of Sri Lanka without attaining its
objective.
➢ The Sri Lankan crisis continues to be violent.
➢ The Scandinavian countries such as Norway and Iceland have been trying to bring the warring
groups back to negotiations.
➢ Sri Lanka has registered considerable economic growth in spite of the ongoing conflict.
➢ Sri Lanka recorded high levels of human development.
➢ Sri Lanka was one of the first developing countries to successfully control the rate of growth of
population.
➢ Sri Lanka was the first country in the region to liberalise the economy.
INDIA-PAKISTAN CONFLICT
➢ India won a decisive war against Pakistan but the Kashmir issue remained unsettled in 1971.
➢ India’s conflict with Pakistan is strategic issues like the control of the Siachen glacier and
acquisition of arms.
➢ Acquire nuclear weapons and missiles to deliver arms against to each other.
➢ India conducted Nuclear Test at Pokaran May, 1974
➢ Pakistan conducted nuclear tests in the Chagai Hills in 1999.
➢ The Indian government has blamed the Pakistan government for using a strategy of low-key
violence by helping the Kashmiri militants with arms, training, money and protection to carry
out terrorist strikes against India.
➢ Indian government also believes that Pakistan had aided Pro- Khalistani Militants with arms. Its
spy agency Inter-Services Intelligence (ISI), is involved in various anti-India campaigns through
Bangladesh and Nepal.
➢ The government of Pakistan, blames the Indian government and its security agencies for fomenting
trouble in the provinces of Sindh and Balochistan.
➢ India and Pakistan have had problems over the sharing of river waters. India and Pakistan signed
the ‘Indus Waters Treaty’ with the help of the World Bank, In 1960.
➢ The two countries are not in agreement over the demarcation line in Sir Creek in the Rann of
Kutch.
INDIA AND IT’S NEIGHBOURS

INDIA + BANGLADESH
CONFLICTS
➢ India and Bangladesh have had differences on several issues including the sharing of the Ganga and
Brahmaputra river waters.
➢ Illegal Immigration to India,
➢ Support for anti-Indian, Islamic fundamentalist groups.
➢ Bangladesh’s refusal to allow Indian troops to move through its territory to North-Eastern India,
➢ Bangladesh did not allow to export Natural Gas through Myanmar.
➢ Encouraging rebellion in the Chittagong Hill Tracts,
COOPERATION
➢ Economic relations have improved considerably.
➢ Bangladesh is a part of India’s Look East policy, Disaster Management and Environmental
Issues.
INDIA + NEPAL
➢ Indian government has often expressed displeasure at the warm relationship between Nepal and
China.
➢ Nepal government’s inaction against anti- Indian elements.
➢ Indian security agencies see Maoist movement in Nepal as a growing security threat to India.
➢ Many leaders and citizens in Nepal think that the Indian government interferes in its internal affairs,
has designs on its river waters and hydro-electricity, and prevents Nepal, a landlocked country,
from getting easier access to the sea through Indian Territory.
➢ Indo-Nepal relations are fairly stable and peaceful.
INDIA + SRI LANKA

➢ India and Sri Lanka relations are not normalise on the issue ethnic conflict in the island nation.
➢ India prefers a policy of disengagement vis-à-vis Sri Lanka’s internal troubles.
➢ India signed a free trade agreement with Sri Lanka.
INDIA + BHUTAN
➢ India has a very special relationship with Bhutan and does not have any major conflict with the
Bhutan.
➢ India is involved in big Hydroelectric Projects in Bhutan
INDIA + MALDIVES
➢ India’s relations with Maldives are cordial.
➢ In November 1988, when some Tamil mercenaries from Sri Lanka attacked the Maldives, On the
request of Maldives Government the Indian air force and Navy reacted quickly and stop the invasion.
PEACE AND COOPERATION

➢ The South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation (SAARC) is a major regional initiative by the
South Asian states to evolve cooperation through multilateral means.
➢ SAARC members signed the South Asian Free Trade Agreement (SAFTA) which promised the
formation of a free trade zone for the whole of South Asia.
➢ SAFTA was signed in 2004 and came into effect on 1 January 2006. SAFTA aims at lowering trade
tariffs by 20 percent by 2007.
➢ SAFTA is influenced by outside powers.
➢ China and the United States remain key players in South Asian politics.
➢ The demands of development and globalisation have brought the two Asian giants closer and their
economic ties have multiplied rapidly since 1991.
MCQ BASED QUESTIONS: 1 MARK

Q.1- In which year Bangladesh came into existence?
(A) 1961
(B) 1971
(C) 1981
(D) 1991
Q.2- Which of the following statements is incorrect about Sri Lanka’s caste struggle?
(A) The politics of Sri Lanka has openly supported the Sinhalese.
(B) The interests of the Tamil were ignored.
(C) The Tamil Eelam Liberation Tigers supported the SAARC countries.
(D) There was no political equality in Sri Lanka.
Q.3- Which monarch has initiated plans for its transition to multi-party democracy?
(A) Maldives
(B) India
(C) Bhutan
(D) Bangladesh
Q.4- Who has demanded for ‘Tamil Eelam’ in Sri Lanka?
(A) Liberal Tigers of Tamil Eelan
(B) Liberation of Tamil Eelam
(C) Liberation Tigers of Tamil Eelam
(D) None of these
Q.5- In which year India- Pakistan war took place?
(A) 1962
(B) 1977
(C) 1975
(D) 1971
Q.6- Which of the following statements about South Asia is incorrect?
(A) India is a South Asian Country.
(B) China and USA play an important role in the politics of South Asia.
(C) Bangladesh and India have signed an agreement on river water sharing.
(D)There is only one type of political system in South Asia.
Q.7- What factors have contributed to Pakistan’s failure in building a stable democracy?
(A) Military
(B)Landowning aristocracy
(C) Clergy
(D) All of these
Q.8- Which type of government is working in Bangladesh?
(A) Presidency
(B) Representative democracy
(C) Parliamentary
(D) All of these
Q.9- In 1968 which country was transformed into a republic with a presidential form of
government?
(A) Sri Lanka
(B) Bangladesh
(C) Maldives
(D) Nepal
Q.10- The war between India and Pakistan in 1948, resulted in the division of which Indian state?
(A) Arunachal Pradesh
(B) Sikkim
(C) Punjab
(D) Kashmir
Q.11- In which of the following countries was the issue related to migration of Rohingya today?
(A) Bhutan
(B) Nepal
(C) China
(D) Myanmar
Q.12- Choose the right choice for the leader and country that helped reach the Tashkent
Agreement between India and Pakistan?
(A) Egypt – Abdel Nasser
(B) Indonesia - Sukarno
(C) India – J.L. Nehru
(D) USSR - Kosygin
Q.13- In South Asia, which countries have experienced both civilian and military rulers?
(A) Pakistan-Maldives
(B) Bangladesh - Nepal
(C) Bangladesh - Pakistan
(D) India - Pakistan
Q.14- When did India and Pakistan sign the ‘Indus Waters Treaty’?
(A) 1945
(B) 1950
(C) 1955
(D) 1960
Q.15- Constitutional Monarchy lasted in Nepal till which year?
(A) 2001
(B) 2005
(C) 2006
(D) 2010
VERY SHORT TYPE QUESTIONS: 2 Marks

Q.1- India-Pakistan conflicts are over on which strategic issues?
Ans.- India-Pakistan conflicts are over strategic issues like Kashmir, Siachin glacier and over acquisition of
arms.
Q.2- Where did India and Pakistan conduct Nuclear Tests?
Ans. – India conducted First nuclear test at Pokhran in 1974 and Second at Pokhran in 1998. Pakistan
conducted Nuclear Test at Chagai Hills in 1999.
Q.3- What are the main issues of India-Bangladesh conflicts?
Ans. – River water conflicts, Problems of Refugees.
Q.4- What do you mean by South Asia?
Ans. – South Asia includes the following countries- India, Nepal, Bhutan, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, Maldives,
Pakistan and Afghanistan. The Himalayas in North, Vast Indian Ocean in South, Arabian Sea in West, Bay of
Bengal in East respectively provide natural peculiarity to the region. Which is largely responsible for the
social, cultural and linguistic distinctiveness of the sub-continent.
Q.5- Roots of democracy in India are deep. Explain with the help of examples?
Ans. Due to this step taken to establish a kind of totalitarian at the time of national emergency from 25 June
1975 to 24 March 1977 could not succeed. Those who were responsible behind originating of emergency
situation in India were expelled from power and deep and unceasing allegiance was showcased by India in
democracy and democratic system.
Q.6-Who signed Shimla Agreement and when?
Ans. – Shimla Agreement was introduced between Indian Prime Minister India Gandhi and Pakistan’s
Prime Minister Zulfikar Ali Bhutto in 3 July 1972.
Q.7- Who signed the Tashkent Agreement and when?
Ans. – Shimla Agreement was introduced between Indian Prime Minister Lal Bahadur Shashtri and
Pakistan’s Prime Minister Gen. Ayub Khan in 10 January, 1966.
Q.-8- Who has fighting an armed struggle with the army of Sri Lanka?
Ans.- Liberation Tigers of Tamil Eelam (LTTE).
Q.9- Which type of ruling system is there in Nepal?
Ans.- Parliamentary democracy was under monarchical system in Nepal till 2006. There were several
restrictions on it. In 2006 there was such a massive, country wide protest that the king was forced to
restore the democracy.
Q.10- Mention any two positive initiatives taken by Bangladesh and India in the direction of mutual
cooperation?
Ans.- Identifying common threats and being more sensitive to each other’s needs. Cooperate regularly on
disaster management and environmental issues.
SHORT TYPE QUESTIONS: 4 Marks

Q.1- Suggest the ways to improve relations between India and Pakistan?
Ans-
1- Mutual relations between people should be promoted and business should be encouraged.
2- Negotiations should be held to resolve various issues of disputes.
3- Measures for confidence spearheads should be taken to reduce the dangers of war.
Q.2- Which projects are currently been running in Bhutan with the help of India?
Ans. –
A- Various projects are currently running in Bhutan with the help of India.
B- ‘Chukha Jal Bijli Pariyojna’ was completed in Oct. 1998.
C- Paden cement plant was gifted to Bhutan in 1980.
D- Cement is produced in since 1982.
E- Medical Projects, Water Projects, Grid Transmission Lines, Bridge and Roads in Thimpu and Mongar
are included in Project.
Q.3- Write any four reasons for ethnic conflicts in Sri Lanka?
Ans.
I- Demand of separate country for the Tamil of Sri Lanka.
II- Pressure of Majority of Sinhala Community on Sri Lankan politics.
III- Majority of Sinhala Community was hostile to a large number of Tamils, who had migrated from
India to Sri Lanka and settled there.
IV- Neglect of Tamil by Sinhala and believing that Sri Lanka belongs to the Sinhala people only.
Q.4- Explain the two areas of cooperation and disagreement between India and Bangladesh?
Ans. Areas of cooperation-
i- Economic relations of India and Bangladesh have considerably improved in the last ten years.
Bangladesh is a part of India’s Look East Policy.
ii- On Disaster Management and Environmental Issues, they have cooperated regularly.
Areas of Disagreements-
i- India-Bangladesh have differences over sharing of the Ganga and Brahmaputra River Water.
ii- India has been unhappy with Bangladesh’s denial of illegal immigration to India.
Q.5- Which countries are included in South Asia? How can peace and cooperation be boosted in this
region?
Ans. - South Asia includes the following countries- India, Nepal, Bhutan, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, Maldives,
Pakistan and Afghanistan.
Ways to increase peace and cooperation in the Region-
A- SAARC is a major regional initiative by the South Asian Countries to evolve cooperation through
multilateral means.
B- Peace and cooperation might evolve in South Asia if all the countries in the region allow free across
the borders.
Q.6- In reference to democracy, describe two similarities and differences each between Bangladesh
and Pakistan?
Ans. – Similarities:
I- Pakistan and Bangladesh have experienced democratic and military rule.
II- Both are been run by a military regime at times. Pakistan in 1999 and Bangladesh in 1982.
Dissimilarities:
I- Military dominance exists in Pakistan even after democracy.
II- Military rule and terrorism continues in democratic government of Pakistan.
III- It is not so in Bangladesh.
Q.7- ‘In spite of the ongoing conflict, Sri Lanka has registered considerable growth and recorded
high levels of development’? Explain?
Ans. –
A- Sri Lanka has registered considerable growth and recorded high levels of development.
B- Sri Lanka has presented a remarkable example in front of other developing countries by becoming
one of the leading country among other.
C- It is the first developing countries to successfully control the rate of growth of population.
D- It is the first country to liberalise the economy.
E- It has the highest Per Capita Gross Domestic Production.
Q.8- What was Shimla Agreement?
Ans.
1- Mutual conflict will be resolved by India and Pakistan.
2- Confidence building measures were undertaken to reduce the risk of wars.
3- Bothe countries respect each other’s Territorial Integrity, Sovereignty and will not interference in
each other’s internal affairs.
4- Neither of country would across the actual limit of Kashmir.
5- Bangladesh as an independent country will be considered by Pakistan.
Q.9-“Democracy is becoming the first choice of the people of South Asia”? Explain?
Ans.-
I- Democracy aspires in all countries of South Asia, despite mixed democratic experience.
II- Survey of SAARC countries shows that there is trade support for democracy everywhere.
III- The ordinary citizen views the idea of democracy in a positive manner and supports
representative democracy.
IV- People think that democracy is the best fit for their country.
Q.10- What was Nepal’s democratic revolution and what was its result?
Ans.
i- King of Nepal Virendra was assassinated. Gyanendra became king of Nepal.
ii- Virendra adopted the policy of suppression of democracy and Maoists.
iii- This led to a massive, country wide, pro-democracy protests in April 2002.
iv- King was forced to restore the House of Representatives that had been dissolved in April 2002.
v- Non-Violence Movement was led by Seven Party Alliance (SPA).
vi- The leader of SPA was Girija Prasad Koirala and was elected Prime Minister.
vii- After the formation of New Democratic Government, Rights and Powers of King an end.
viii- Nepal is now Democratic Country.
LONG TYPE QUESTIONS: 6 Marks

Q.1- Explain the factors that are responsible for the failure of building a stable democracy in
Pakistan?
Ans. –
1- Social dominance of the military, clergy and landowning aristocracy has led to frequent overthrow
of elected governments and establishment of military governments.
2- Pakistan’s conflict with India also made the pro military groups more powerful.
3- These groups have often said that political parties and democracy in Pakistan are flawed that
Pakistan’s security would be harmed by selfish minded parties and chaotic democracy and that
army’s stay in power is therefore, justified.
4- The lack of genuine international support for democratic rule in Pakistan has further encouraged
military to continue its dominance.
Q.2- Describe the common problems of South Asian Countries?
Ans.-
I- The common problems of SAARC countries are poverty and economic backwardness.
II- Some member countries of SAARC think that SAFTA is a way for India to invade the markets in
their politics.
III- SAARC countries have many internal conflict such as boundaries and distribution of river
water.
IV- These countries are unable to express similar views at International Level because they do not
trust each other.
V- All conflicts are not from India but from Bhutan, Bangladesh and Nepal over certain issues.
VI- The other countries of SAARC fear that India wants to be a regional dominance in the region.
Q.3- Even after sharing a same history, why roots of democracy could not be strengthen in
Pakistan as they are in India?
Ans. –
A- Social dominance of Military has led to the frequent overthrow of elected governments.
B- Pakistan’s conflict with India has made the pro-military group more powerful.
C- These groups have often said that political parties and democracy in Pakistan are flawed.
D- There has been a strong pro-democracy sentiments in the country.
E- Pakistan has lack of International support for democracy.
F- The United States and Western countries have encouraged the military’s authoritarian rule in past.
Q.-4- India’s neighbours often think that the Indian government tries to dominate and interfere in
the domestic affairs of the smaller countries of the region. Is this correct impression?
Ans. Various factors responsible for the this-
i- Size and powers of India, smaller countries are bound to be suspicious of India’s intentions.
ii- Interference of India in internal affairs of Pakistan and helping in transformation of East
Pakistan to Bangladesh.
iii- Needs of smaller countries are met by India to prevent of external powers in India.
iv- Smaller countries thinks that India wants to ‘invade and dominate’ in International market
with the help of SAFTA.
The thinking of smaller countries towards India is not correct-
i- India believes in truth, peace and principles of non-violence.
ii- India is always ready to help for all smaller countries.
iii- India has always provided shelter to refugees.
iv- India has given an open invitation to SAARC.
Q.5- Describe the series of events that led to the formation of Bangladesh?
Ans.
1- The people of East-Pakistan resented the domination of West-Pakistan and imposition of Urdu
Language.
2- They began protests against the unfair treatment to the Bengali Culture and Language.
3- Sheikh Mujib-Ur-Rehman struggle against West-Pakistan and demanded autonomy for East-
Region.
4- Pakistan army tried to suppress the Mass Movement of Bengali People.
5- India supported the demand of people of East-Pakistan for their Independence.
6- This resulted war between India and Pakistan in December 1971.
PASSAGE BASED, CARTOON BASES AND MAP BASED QUESTION: 4 MARKS

India has larger size and is powerful. Due to this, smaller nations are bound to be suspicious of India’s
intentions. The Indian government, on the other hand, often feels exploited by its neighbours. It does not
like the political instability in these countries, fearing it can help outside powers to gain influence in the
region. The smaller countries fear that India wants to be a regionally dominant power.
I- South Asia has much smaller countries than India?
(A) Maldives
(B) Nepal
(C) Bhutan
(D) All of these
II- What is the role of India in South Asia?
(A) India is ready to support small countries.
(B)India has invited SAARC countries to trade without paying a custom duty.
(C) India does not want political instability in these countries.
(D) All of these.
III- Why are smaller countries suspicious of India’s intentions?
(A) India is larger than other countries
(B) Smaller countries are suspicious of India’s intentions in reference of their independence and
sovereignty.
(C) Both A and B.
(D) None of these.
IV- Why do smaller countries feel that India wants to be a regionally dominant power of South Asia?
(A) India tries to prevent interference of outside power in South Asia.
(B) It tries its level best to fulfil the requirements of smaller countries.
(C) Smaller countries think that SAFTA is a way for Indian to invade the markets.
(D) All of these.
The mighty Himalayas in the North and the vast Indian Ocean, the Arabian Sea and the Bay of Bengal in the
South, West and East respectively provide a natural insularity to the region, which is largely responsible
for the linguistic, social and cultural distinctiveness of the sub-continent. Afghanistan and Myanmar are
often included in the discussions of the region as a whole. China is an important player but is not considered
to be a part of the region.
I- Which region is being stated in the passage?
(A) Lakshadweep
(B) Sri Lanka
(C) South Asia
(D) East Asia
II- Which countries are included in South Asia?
(A) Pakistan
(B) Bangladesh
(C) Maldives
(D) All of these
III- Which political system is usually in this area?
(A) Democratic System
(B) Military Rule
(C) Both A and B
(D) None of these
IV- Which country is not a part of South Asia?
(A)China
(B) India
(C) Bhutan
(D) Maldives
IV- Which country is this problem related to?
V- Whom is the lion representing in the picture? What do they believe?
VI- Who is the tiger representing to in the picture? What is their demand?
Ans.-
I- Sri Lanka
II- Lion is representing the Majority of Sinhala Community in Sri Lanka. Sinhala have
dominance on Policies of Sri Lanka. Sinhala should not allowed for any concessions for
Tamils.
III- Tiger is representing the Tamils (LTTE). This is the result of Sinhalese’s behaviour for
Tamils. Demand of Tamils was that separate independent nation for Tamils.

information used
(I)
(II)
(III)
(IV)
(V) Democracy was restored in this country in 2006? (Nepal)
(VI) The Parliament of this country unanimously approved the implementation of multi-party
system in June 2005? (Maldives)
(VII) This country is a part of India’s ‘Go East Policy’ going through Myanmar?(Bangladesh)
(VIII) There has been both military and civilian rule in this country?(Pakistan)
UNITED NATIONS AND ITS ORGANIZATIONS

“The United Nations was not created to take humanity to heaven, but to save it from hell” - Dag
Hammarskjold, (The UN's Second Secretary General).
The United Nations was founded at 24th October 1945. It consisted 51 countries at the time of
establishment. Now it is composed of 193-member countries.
Objectives of UNO:
1. Maintain peace and security in the world.
2. To stop war and international Disputes.
3. Protection of Human Rights.
4. Economic Development of the world.
5. Promote international Co-operation.
Organs of the United Nations Organization –

Name of Organ Number of Members Headquarter
Security Council 5 Permanent + 10 non- New York
permanent= 15 total members
General Assembly 193 New York
Trusteeship Council Suspended on 1 Nov. 1994 New York
International Court of Justice 15 Judges Hague
Secretariat Secretary Generals secretariat New York
Social and Economic Council 54 New York
The most powerful part of the united nation is the security council.
It has 15 members, USA, Russia, China, France and Britain.
5 members are permanent members and the rest of the members are non-permanent members.
Permanent members have veto power.
The secretary General of the United Nations is the representative of the United Nations.
The present secretary General of the United Nations is Antonio Guterres from Portugal.
S.N.z Secretary-General Country Term

1. Trygve Lie Norway 2 February 1946 – 10 November 1952
2. Dag Hammarskjöld Sweden 10 April 1953 – 18 September 1961
3. U Thant Burma (Myanmar) 3 November 1961-31 December 1971
4. Kurt Waldheim Austria 1 January 1972 – 31 December 1981
5. Javier Pérez de Cuellar Peru 1 January 1982 – 31 December 1991
6. Boutros Boutros-Ghali Egypt 1 January 1992 – 31 December 1996
7. Kofi Annan Ghana 1 January 1997 – 31 December 2006
8. Ban Ki-moon South Korea 1 January 2007 – 31 December 2016
9. António Guterres Portugal 1 January 2017 – present
• India has always been a consistent nation in giving contribution in United Nations.
• India has always given its balanced opinion on the matter of Security, Disarmament, South Korea
crisis, Suez Canal and the Iraq invasion of Kuwait.
• India has played an important role in human rights protection, against colonialism, racism.
• India also promoted and become a part of the educational, financial and cultural activities of
United Nations.
The points defending the Permanent Membership of India in United Nations-

• Largest population in the world.
• Stable democracy and obligations towards human rights.
• A rising economy.
• A continuous support to the United Nations in monetary budget.
• India's role in peace.
Measures to make the United Nations relevant in a Uni-polar world-
1. Establishment of Peace building Commission.
2. Establishment of Human Rights Council.
3. Agreed to achieve the Millennium development goals (MDGs).
4. Creation of Democratic Fund.
5. Elimination of the terrorism in all its forms and manifestations.
6. Wind up the Trusteeship Council.
Key Agencies of UNO:
1. UNESCO
The United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO) was
established on 4 November 1946.
Headquarter is in Paris, France.
UNESCO is a special body of the United Nations whose main objective is to promote education,
natural science, society and anthropology, culture and communication.
UNESCO promotes literacy, technical, educational training and independent media etc. all across
its member nations.
2. UNICEF
The United Nations International Children’s Emergency Fund (UNICEF) was established in
1946.
Main task to collect emergency funds for children and to help in their development work all
across the world.
UNICEF helps and encourages the works that promote children's health and better life in all parts
of the world.
Headquarter is in New York, United States.
UNICEF working successfully in almost 193 countries of the world.
3. ILO
The International Labour Organization (ILO), founded in October 1919.
Headquarter is in Geneva, Switzerland.
Promote efficient conditions of social justice and work for workers through international labour
standards at the global level.
There is an incentive for women and male worker to engage in productive work and to create
safety, parity and self-respectful conditions for them at the workplace.
4. WHO
WHO is known as World Health Organisation.
It was founded on 7th April 1948.
Headquarter is in Geneva, Switzerland.
1. Prevent all communicable disease.

2. Develop health facilities.
3. Check epidemics.
4. Monitor public health risks.
Security council and Need for its Expansion:
Security council is an important organ of UNO as per UN charter .
its primary responsibility is to maintain peace and security.
There are total 5 permanent and 10 non-permanent members in security council.
Five permanent members have veto power.
India has become UNSC non-permanent member for the eight time since January 2021.
Security Council was restructured only once in 1965.
Non-permanent members were increased from 6 to 10.
Need for reforms in Security Council:

In 1992, the UN General Assembly adopted a resolution. The resolution reflected three main complaints:
1. UNSC no longer represents contemporary political realities.
2. Its decisions reflect only western values and interests and are dominated by a few powers.
3. It lacks equitable representation.
In view of these growing demands for the restructuring of the UN, on 1st January 1997, the
UN Secretary General Kofi Annan initiated an inquiry into how the UN should be reformed.
Consequently few following criteria were suggested for a new member countries to be included in
UNSC -
1. A major economic power.
2. A major military power.
3. A substantial contributor to the UN budget.
4. A big nation in terms of its population.
5. A democratic nation.
6. Country which represents worlds diversity in terms of geography, economic systems and
Culture.
OTHER AGENCIES of United Nations
There are other institutions and non-Government Organisations that are completely dedicated
towards fulfilling the aims of the United Nations.
1. International Monetary Fund
This organization (IMF) promotes the financial balance of States on the international
platform.
It helps countries in getting financial and technological assistance.
IMF has 189 members countries.
2. World Bank (1944)
It provide Loans and Grants to member countries.
It enormous influence on the economic policies of developing countries.
It works for Human Development, Agriculture, Rural Development, Environmental
Protection and Governance.
3. World Trade Organisation (1995)
WTO frame rules for Global Trade.
It was set up in 1995, as the successor to the General Agreement on Trade and Tariff
(GATT).
It has 164 Members as on 29 July, 2016.
4. International Atomic Energy Agency
It was established in 1957.
Promotes the minimal and productive use of Atomic Energy.
To ensure that civilian reactors are not being use for military purposes.
5. Amnesty International
This is Non-Governmental Organisation.
Campaign for the Human Rights
It promote respect for all the Human Rights.
It prepare and publish report on Human Rights.
6. Human Rights Watch
• Involved in Research and advocacy on Human Rights
• It is the largest International Human Rights Organisation in the US.
• It draws global media’s attention to Human Rights abuses
• To stop the use of child soldiers.
Conclusion :-
Although there are certain problems in the United Nations but without this International platform, the
world will be worse. The United Nations, all the economic institutions and NGOs mentioned above have
increased mutual dependence, so that the responsibilities of the institutions are also increasing. There is
a need to find ways to support International Organizations.
MCQ (EACH 1 MARKEs)

Question 1. Which U.N. agency concerned with the safety and peaceful use of Answer: (B)
nuclear technology?
(A) The UN Committee on Disarmament
(B) International Atomic Energy Agency
(C) UN International Safeguard Committee
(D) None of the above
Question 2. How many states signed United Nations Charter in 1945? Answer: (D)
(A) 55
(B) 39
(C) 67
(D) 51
Question 3. Arrange the following in the chronological order: Answer: (B)
(i) IAEA
(ii) Yalta Conference
(iii) Atlantic Charter
(iv) Lebanon Crisis
(A) (ii), (iv), (i), (iii)
(B) (iii), (i), (ii), (iv)
(C) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv)
(D) (ii), (iii), (iv), (i)
Question 4. On the reforms of structures and processes, the biggest Answer: (A)
discussion has been on the functioning of the?
(A) Security Council.
(B) Health of the infants
(C) Child mortality rate
(D) Nuclear weapon possession
Question 5. The non-permanent members of the Security Council do not have Answer: (A)
the:
(A) Veto power
(B) Election power
(C) Administrative power
(D) None of these
Question 6. “The United Nations was not created to take humanity to the Answer: (D)
heaven, but to save it from the hell.” Who gave this statement?
(A) Pt. Jawahar Lal Nehru
(B) Kofi Annan
(C) Ban Ki-moon
(D) Dag Hammarskjold
Question 7. “Jaw-Jaw is better than war-war” who gave the statement? Answer: (B)
(A) Shashi Tharoor
(B) Churchill
(C) Ban Ki Moon
(D) Kofi A. Annan
Question 8. Who was the First Secretary General of UNO ? Answer: (B)
(A) Bill Clinton
(B) Trygve Lie
(C) George W Bush
Question 9. The Secretary-General – Ban Ki-Moon from South Korea was the Answer: (D)
………………. Secretary-General of the UN.
(A) Fifth
(B) Sixth
(C) Seventh
(D) Eighth
Question 10. The US, Japan, Germany, France, UK, Italy, Canada and Russia Answer: (A)
are the:
(A) G-8 members
(B) D-8 members
(C) Cold War countries
(D) Dominating members
Question 11. With the disappearance of the Soviet Union, the US stands as the Answer: (C)
only:
(A) Major power
(B) Master power
(C) Superpower
(D) Inner power
Question 12. Which one of the following is the permanent member of UN? Answer: (B)
(A) India
(B) China
(C) Sweden
(D) Ireland
Question 13. The WHO has played a leading role in ………………. . Answer: (A)
(A) public health achievement
(B) economic development
(C) children’s health
(D) resolving disputes among the nations
Question 14. Which institution became the successor of the League of Answer: (C)
Nations?
(A) WHO
(B) UNICEF
(C) UN
(D) SAARC
Question 15. Who is the single largest contributor (Regular Budget) to UN? Answer: (C)
(A) China
(B) India
(C) US
(D) Europe
1 Mark Questions
Question 1. What is the main objective of the United Nation?
Answer: The main objective of the United Nation is prevention of conflicts and facilitating cooperation
Along states.
Question 2. How many permanent members and non-permanent members does the UN Security Council
have?
Answer: The UN Security Council have five permanent members and ten non-permanent members.
Question 3. Mention any one function of the World Bank.

Answer: World Bank provides loans and grants to the member states, especially to the developing
countries.
Question 4. Mention the main function of the World Trade Organisation (WTO).
Answer: The World Trade Organisation (WTO) is an international organisation which sets the rules for
global trade.
Question 5. How many founder states signed the United Nations Charter in 1945?
Answer: There were 51 countries who signed the United Nations Charter in 1945.
Question 6. Write the full form of IMF. How many member states does it have?
Answer: The full form of IMF is International Monetary Fund. It has 189 member countries.
Question 7. What is the main function of Amnesty International?

Answer: Amnesty International is an international NGO which campaigns for the protection of human
rights all over the world.
Question 8. What is meant by International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA)?

Answer: International Atomic Energy Agency is an international organisation that seek to promote the
peaceful use of nuclear energy and to prevent its use for military purposes.
Question 9. How many judges are there in the International Court of justice and what is their tenure?
Answer: There are 15 judges in the International Court of justice and their tenure is nine years.
Question 10. What is World Health Organisation?
Answer: World Health Organisation (WHO) is a specialised agency of the United Nations. The objective of
WHO is to promote the highest possible level of health in all people.
2 Marks Questions
Question 1. How many member countries have got veto power in the UN Security Council and why?
Answer: All five permanent members of the UN have got veto power. The UN Charter gave the permanent
members a privileged position to bring about stability in the world after the Second World War.
Question 2. Suggest any two major changes to improve the functioning of the Security Council.
Answer: TWO major changes to improve the functioning of the Security Council are:
1. Number of permanent and non-permanent members to security council of UN is to be

increased.
2. Veto power of five permanent countries to be withdrawn instantly.
Question 3. Write any two functions of the General Assembly of the UN.
Answer: Two functions of the General Assembly of the UN are:
1. To discuss and make recommendation on any issue under the Ambit of the UN charter.
2. To maintain International peace and security.
Question 4. What is meant by International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA)?

Answer: International Atomic Energy Agency is an international organisation that seek to promote the
peaceful use of nuclear energy and to prevent its use for military purposes.
Question 5. What is meant by security council? Mention its composition.

Answer: Security Council is one of the principle organs of UNO. It consists of five permanent members
and ten non-permanent members. The permanent members have the ‘Right to Veto’ and the other
members are elected for a term of two years.
Question 6. . What is World Health Organisation? Give any one objective?

Answer: World Health Organisation (WHO) is a specialised agency of the United Nations.
The objective of WHO is to promote the highest possible level of health in all people.
Question 7. Highlight any two jurisdictions of the United Nations.

Answer: The two jurisdictions of United Nations are:
• Creation of a peace building commission.

• Agreement to achieve the Millennium Development Goals.
Question 8. Mention any two basic concerns about the reforms related to the processes and
restructuring of the UNO.
Answer: The two basic concerns about the reforms related to the processes and restructuring of the UNO
are :
1. To increase the number of permanent and non-permanent members of security council.

2. US and other Western countries want improvements in the UN’s budgetary procedures and
its administration.
Question 9. Give any two reasons why veto power of permanent members of Security Council cannot be
abolished.
Answer: Veto power of permanent members of Security Council cannot be abolished because:
• No permanent member would allow to do this.

• To maintain the interest of big powers in functioning of UN, veto power is significantly
important and without active participation of the permanent members, the UN itself will
become irrelevant.
Question 10. Give any two arguments in support of India’s permanent membership to the UN Security
Council.
Answer: Arguments in favour of India to be the member of UN Security Council are:
• India is the world’s second largest populated country which gives place to almost 1/5 of the
people of the world.
• India is the world’s largest democracy.
4 Marks Questions
Question 1. What is the full form of WTO? When it was set up? How does it function?
Answer: The full form of WTO is World Trade. Organisation which sets the rules for global trade. It is an
international organisation. WTO replaced GATT (General Agreement on Trade and Tariffs) in 1995.
It includes 164 members.

Major economic powers such as EU, US and Japan have managed to use the WTO to work in favour of
them.
The developing countries complaint about its non-transparent procedures.
It being influenced by big powers.
Question 2. Why some countries do opposed India’s inclusion as a permanent member of the UN
Security Council? Explain.
Answer: India desires to be a permanent member of the UN Security Council but many countries opposed
India’s inclusion as a permanent member.
Some nations are worried about India’s Nuclear Weapons capabilities.
Some Nations use views that Indo-Pak relations will make India ineffective as a Permanent Member.
Some Nations argue that if India is included, then other emerging powers will have to be accommodated
such as : Brazil, Germany, Japan, South Africa.
Question 3. What is Human Rights Watch? Describe its main contribution to the field of Human Rights.
Answer: The Human Rights Watch is an international NGO involved in research and advocacy on human
rights.
Main contribution in the field of human right is stated in the points below:
1. It is the largest International Human Rights Organisation in the USA.

2. It draws the global media’s attention to human rights abuses.
3. It helped in building international coalitions like the campaigns to ban landmines, to stop the
use of child soldiers and to establish the international criminal court.
Question 4. Critically evaluate the difficulties involved in implementing the suggested

reforms to reconstruct the UN.
Answer: Many difficulties are involved in implementing the suggested reforms to reconstruct
the UN as below:
1. Many viewed that Security Council no longer represented contemporary political realities.
2. Some criteria were proposed for new permanent members and non-permanent members,
such as a major economic power, military power, a nation that respect democracy and
human rights, etc.
3. Each of these criteria have some validity, but due to lack of clarity on certain points, the
criteria were considered to be problematic.
4. Change in the nature of membership was another proposed reform.
5. Some countries suggested that ‘veto’ power of the permanent members of the Security
Council should be abolished.
6. Permanent members do not agree to such a reform. It is another major difficulty in reform.
7. Another difficulty was that how representation should be given to Asia, Africa, Latin
America and Caribbean. But selection of the basis of representation i.e. geography,
economic development, culture or civilisation creates a problem.
Question 5. Suggest any four reforms required to make the United Nations more relevant in the changing
scenario?
Answer: The following steps were proposed to make the UN more relevant in the changing scenario:
1. Peace building commission will be created.

2. UN as an international community will accept its responsibility in case off failure of National
Government to save their citizens from atrocities.
3. Creation of Human Rights Council (operation since 19th June, 2006)
4. Agreements regarding achievement of millennium development goals (MDGs).
5. To condemn terrorism in all its forms and manifestations.
6. Creation of Democracy fund.
7. An Agreement regarding dissolving the trusteeship council.
Question 6. Describe any four proposed criteria for the new permanent and non-permanent members of
the security council in order to improve its functioning.
Answer: To be a new member following criteria should be fulfilled:
• It should be a major economic power.

• It should contribute substantially to the UN budget.
• Population of the nation should be high.
• Nation should respect human rights and democracy.
• The inclusion of that country should make the security council look more vivid in terms of
geography, economic systems and culture.
• It should be a major military power.
Question 7. What steps should be taken to strengthen the UNO?

Answer: In order to strengthen the UNO following steps can be taken:
➢ Reform of the organisation’s structure and processes.

➢ To increase the permanent and non-permanent member in the UN Security
Council so that it can represent contemporary world politics effective and
better way.
➢ To bring improvement in the UN’s budgetary procedure and its administration.
2. Review of the issues that fall within the jurisdiction of the organisation.
It will facilitate the following:
➢ Greater role of UN in maintaining world peace and security.
➢ Limiting the role of UN to development and humanitarian work.
Question 8. Explain any four reasons as to why India should be given a permanent membership in the
UN Security Council.
Answer: The four reasons suggesting that India should be given a permanent membership in the UN
Security Council are :
1. India is the second most populous country which constitutes 1/5 of the population of the
world.
2. India is also the world’s largest democracy.
3. India actively participated in UN’s programmes and played a important role in cooperation,
keeping and managing place.
4. The regular financial aid to UN and evolution of its economy support India’s desire to be the
permanent member.
Question 9. How are international organisation helpful to the nations?
Answer: International organisation can be helpful to nations following ways:
1. They facilitate platform where different countries can cooperate for better living condition
for all of us.
2. They help in managing the matter of war and peace.
3. They provide mechanisms, rules and human resources to the member states to deal with
issues and problems of global concern.
4. They develop a sense of responsibility for problems such as terrorism, climate change,
global warming etc.
5. They produce important information and conduct research which can be helpful for
international society to have better understanding of state of affairs.
6 Marks Questions
Question 1. Trace the evolution of the United Nations since its establishment in 1945. How does it
function with the help of its structures and agencies?
Answer: The United Nations was established in 1945 after the end of Second World War as a successor to
the League of Nations.
The United Nations Charter was signed by 51 states for setting up of UN.
Objectives of UN
1- The basic aim was to achieve what League of Nations was not able to achieve during the
two World Wars.
2- Prevention of conflicts and facilitating cooperation among nations.
3- To stop conflicts among states resulting into war and if it takes the shape of war, to limit the
effects of war.
4- To reduce the reasons for conflict by bringing the countries together for improving social
and economic development all over the world.
UN Structures and Agencies
UN includes many different structures for dealing with different issues. The issue relating to war and
peace and differences between member states are dealt by discussion in General Assembly as well as in
the Security Council. The other issues social and economic are dealt by a number of agencies which
include:
• WHO World Health Organisation.

• UNDP United Nations Development Programme.
• UNHRC United Nations Human Rights Commission.
• UNHCR United Nations High Commission for Refugees.
• UNICEF United Nations International Children’s Emergency Fund.

• UNESCO United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organisation.
Question 2. Describe the two basic reforms of the UN on which everyone agrees that they are necessary
after the cold war.
Answer:
Reform and improvement are fundamental to any organisation. There have been demands for changes in
the UN from different countries.
The nature of reforms that are desired are of two types:
1. Reform of the organisation’s structure and processes.

2. Review of the issues that fall within the jurisdiction of the organisation.
The structural reform’s major area was the functioning of the Security Council.
Different countries demanding to increase the permanent and non-permanent members of UN Security
Council so they can represent the realities of present world politics.
Whereas the proposed increment should be from Asia, Africa and South America.
The another area of reform is budgetary procedures and its administration.
When the areas of jurisdiction are taken, some countries and experts want that the UN should have more
role in peace and security missions.
Others wish to restrict UN’s role in development and humanitarian work like health, education
environment, population control, human rights, gender and social justice.
Question 3. Describe any six criteria for the new membership of Security Council as suggested after
1997.
Answer:
A resolution was adopted by the UN Secretary General in 1997. The resolution was about following three
main complaints:
1. The security council is not adequately representing the present political realities.
2. Decisions by security council are reflective of Western values and interests and dominance
by a few powers.
3. The representation is not on an equitable basis
To be a new member following criteria should be fulfilled:
• It should be a major economic power.

• It should contribute substantially to the UN budget.
• Population of the nation should be high.
• Nation should respect human rights and democracy.
• The inclusion of that country should make the security council look more vivid in terms of
geography, economic systems and culture.
• It should be a major military power.
Question 4. Describe the composition of the UN Security Council. What is the major difference in the
privileges given to its permanent and non-permanent members?
Answer:
The Security Council is an important organ of the United Nations Organisation (UNO).
It consists of five permanent members (China, USA, Britain , Russia and France) and ten non-permanent
members who are elected for a period of two years.
The selection of the permanent members were on the basis of their being powerful immediately after the
Second World War and they being the victors in the war.
Privileges to Its Permanent and Non-Permanent Members

The UN Charter gave the permanent members a privileged position to bring about stability in the world.
After the Second World War the main privileges of the Five Permanent Members are Permanency and
the Veto power.
The non-permanent members are elected only for two years at a time and cannot be re-elected
immediately after completing two years.
They are elected in a manner so that they represent all continents of the world.
The non-permanent members do not have the veto power.
When decisions are taken by Security Council, proceeds by voting.
All members have one vote.
Permanent members can vote in a negative manner so that even if all other permanent and non-
permanent members vote for a particular decision, any permanent member’s negative vote can stall the
decision. This negative vote is the veto.
Question 5. How far did the UN perform its role successfully in maintaining peace in the world? Explain.
Answer: The UN performs its role successfully in maintaining peace in the world. This can be justified by
the below mentioned points:
1. US leaders, in spite of their frequent criticism of the UN, do see the organisation as serving a
purpose in bringing together over 193 nations in dealing with conflict and social and
economic development.
2. The UN provides an arena in which it is possible to modify US attitudes and policies.
3. The rest of the world is rarely united against USA and it is virtually impossible to ‘balance’
US power.
4. The UN does provide a space within which argument against specific US attitudes and
policies are heard and compromises and concessions can be shaped.
5. The UN is an imperfect body, but without it the world would be worse off.
6. Given the growing connections and links between societies and issues-what we often call
interdependence-it is hard to imagine how more than seven billion people would live
together without an organisation such as the UN.
7. Technology promises to increase planetary interdependence, and therefore the importance
of the UN will only increase.
8. Peoples and governments also find ways of supporting and using the UN and other
international organisations
in ways that are consistent with their own interests and the interests of the international
community more broadly.
Map, passage, cartoon -Based Question (EACH 4 MARKS):
Question 1.
Study the given map of the world and answer the following question in your answer book.
(i) Identify and Name the countries marked A, B, C and D respectively.
(ii) UN Secretary Generals with the alleles of the countries they belonged to:
(a) Dag Hammarskjold
(b) Kurt Waldheim
(c) Boutros Boutros-Ghali
(d) Kofi A. Arman
Answer:
(i)
A – Sweden
B – Ghana
C – Austria
D – Egypt
(ii)
(a) Dag Hammarskjold – Sweden
(b) Kurt Waldheim – Austria
(c) Boutros Boutros-Ghali – Egypt
(d) Kofi A. Annan – Ghana
Question 2.
Study the following passage carefully and answer the questions those are following
The lack of genuine international support for democratic rule in Pakistan has further encouraged the
military to continue its dominance. The United States and other Western countries have encouraged the
military’s authoritarian rule in the past, for their own reasons. Given their fear of the threat of what they
call ‘global Islamic terrorism’ and the apprehension that Pakistan’s nuclear arsenal might fall into the
hands of these terrorist groups, the military regime in Pakistan has been seen as the protector of Western
interests in West Asia and South Asia.
(i) What is meant by ‘Global Islamic Terrorism’?
(ii) Why did Pakistan lack genuine international support for a democratic rule?
(iii) Why was the military regime in Pakistan considered as the protector of Western interests in West
Asia and South Asia?
Answer:
(i) Global Islamic Terrorism refers to political violence committed by Islamic fundamentalist to terrorise
civilians world widely deliberately to get accepted their demands.
(ii) Pakistan lacks genuine international support for the democratic rule because the USA and other
Western countries have fear of the threat of global Islamic terrorism and the nuclear weapon may fall
into the hands of terrorist groups under civilian rule.
(iii) The military regime in Pakistan is regarded as the protector of Western interests in West Asia and
South Asia because they strictly deal with Islamic fundamentalist and terrorist groups and act as a
strategic partner in West Asia and South Asia.
Question 3.
No region exists in a vacuum. It is influenced by outside powers and events no matter how much it may
try to insulate itself from non-regional powers. China and the United States remain key players in South
Asian politics. Sino-Indian relations have improved significantly in the last ten years, but China’s strategic
partnership with Pakistan remains a major irritant. The demands of development and globalisation have
brought the two Asian giants closer and their economic ties have multiplied rapidly since 1991. Delhi
2012 Study the paragraph given above carefully and answer the following questions
(i) Which two countries have been referred to as ‘Outside power’?
(ii) Which are the two Asian giants and why have they been called so?
(iii) China’s strategic partnership with Pakistan is a major irritant for which country and why?
Answer:
(i) The two countries referred to outside powers are China and the USA.
(ii) India and China are the two Asian giants. They have been called so because they have emerged as
strong economic and military power rapidly.
(iii) The strategic partnership is a major irritant for India because it is causing problems in the
normalisation of diplomatic relations between the two countries.
Question 4.
In the given outline map of South Asia, five countries have been marked as (A), (B), (C), (D) and (E).
Identify them on the basis of the information given below and write their correct names in your answer
book with their respective serial number of the information used and the alphabet concerned as per the
following format. (All India 2016)
Information used
(i) The country has experienced civilian as well as a military rule both.
(ii) Democracy was restored in this country in 2006.
(iii) This country is still a monarchy.
(iv) The Parliament of this country voted unanimously to introduce a multiparty system in June 2005.
(v) This country is a part of India’s ‘Look East Policy via Myanmar’.
Answer:
Alphabet
Sr. No. Information used Name of the Country
Concerned
The country has experienced civilian as

(i) B Pakistan
well as military rule both
Democracy was restored in the country in

(ii) C Nepal
2006.
(iii) This country is still a monarchy. A Bhutan
The parliament of this country voted

(iv) unanimously to introduce multiparty E Maldives
system in June 2005.
This country is a part of India’s Look East

(v) D Bangladesh
Policy via Myanmar.
SECURITY IN CONTEMPORARY WORLD

Gist of Security in Contemporary World
➢ Security implies freedom from threats.
➢ Human existence are full of threats.
➢ Every time a person steps out of house, there is some threat to their existence and way of life.
➢ Our world would be saturated with security issues.
➢ Those who study security, say that those things threaten ‘core values’ should be regarded as being
of interest in discussions of security.
➢ Every time another country does something or fails to do something, this may damage the core
values of one’s country
➢ Every time a person is robbed in the streets, the security of ordinary people as they live their daily
lives is harmed.
➢ The various notions of security under two groups: traditional and non-traditional conceptions of
security.
Traditional Notion of Security: External

➢ When we read about security we are talking about traditional, national conceptions of security.
➢ In the traditional conception of security, the greatest danger to a country is from military threats.
➢ The source of this danger is another country which by threatening military action endangers the
Core Values of Sovereignty, Independence and Territorial Integrity.
➢ Military action endangers the lives of ordinary citizens.
➢ Ordinary men and women are made targets of war, to break their support of the war.
➢ Traditional security policy has a Three Components - Deterrence, balance of power, Alliance
Building.
In responding to the threat of war, a government has three basic choices (Deterrence):
1- To surrender.
2- To defend itself when war actually and to turn back or defeat the attacking forces altogether.
3- Governments may choose to surrender when actually confronted by war, but they will not advertise
this as the policy of the country.
➢ Security Policy is concerned with preventing war, which is called - deterrence, and with limiting or
ending war, which is called - defence.
➢ Countries see that some nations are bigger and stronger.
➢ A neighbouring country may not say it is preparing for attack.
➢ There may be no obvious reason for attack.
➢ Governments are very sensitive to the balance of power between their country and other
countries.
➢ They do work hard to maintain a favourable balance of power with other countries
➢ A good part of maintaining a balance of power is to build up one’s military power, economic and
technological power.
➢ A third component of traditional security policy is Alliance Building.
➢ An alliance is a coalition of states that coordinate their actions to deter or defend against military
attack.
➢ Most alliances are formalised in written treaties and are based on a fairly clear identification of who
constitutes the threat.
➢ Countries form alliances to increase their effective power relative to another country or alliance.
➢ Alliances are based on national interests and can change when national interests change. For
example, the US backed the Islamic militants in Afghanistan against the Soviet Union in the 1980s,
but later attacked them when Al Qaeda—a group of Islamic militants led by Osama Bin Laden—
launched terrorist strikes against America on 11 September 2001.
➢ In traditional view of security, most threats to a country’s security come from outside its borders
because the international system is brutal arena in which there is no central authority capable of
controlling behaviour.
➢ The threat of violence is regulated by an acknowledged central authority of the government in a
country.
➢ There is no acknowledged central authority that stands above everyone else in world politics.
➢ The UN is a creature of its members has authority only to the extent that the membership allows it
to have authority and obeys it.
➢ Every country has to be responsible for its own security.
Traditional Notion of Security: Internal

➢ Traditional security must concern itself with internal security.
➢ It is not given so much importance after the Second World War.
➢ Internal security was more or less assured.
➢ It is important to pay attention to context and situation.
➢ After 1945, the US and the Soviet Union appeared to be united and could expect peace within their
borders.
➢ The powerful Western European countries faced no serious threats from groups or communities
living within those borders.
➢ These countries focused primarily on threats from outside their borders.
➢ The two alliances (USA, USSR) feared a military attack from each other.
➢ Some European powers continued to worry about violence in their colonies, from colonised people
who wanted independence. We have remember the French fighting in Vietnam in the 1950 or the
British fighting in Kenya in the 1950 and 1960.
➢ Some of the newly independent Countries European powers had to worry about the Cold War
becoming a hot war.
➢ The Cold War between the two superpowers was responsible for approximately one-third of all
wars in the Post-Second World War period.
➢ The security challenges facing the newly-independent countries of Asia and Africa were different
from the challenges in Europe in two ways. -1- The new countries faced the prospect of military
conflict with neighbouring countries. 2- They had to worry about internal military conflict.
➢ The new states worried about threats from separatist movements which wanted to form
independent countries.
Traditional Security and Cooperation

➢ In traditional security, there is a recognition that cooperation in limiting violence is possible.
➢ These limits relate both to the ends and the means of war.
➢ It is accepted view that countries should only go to war for the right reasons, primarily self-defence
or to protect the people from genocide.
➢ War must also be limited in terms of the means that are used.
➢ Force must in any case be used only after all the alternatives have failed.
➢ Traditional views of security do not rule out other forms of cooperation as well. The most important
of these are disarmament, arms control and confidence building.
➢ Disarmament requires all states to give up certain kinds of weapons. For example, the 1972
Biological Weapons Convention (BWC) and the 1992 Chemical Weapons Convention (CWC) banned
the production and possession of these weapons.
➢ More than 155 Countries acceded to the BWC and 181 Contrives acceded to the CWC.
➢ The US and Soviet Union did not want to give up the third type of weapons of mass destruction,
namely, nuclear weapons, so they pursued arms control.
➢ The Anti-ballistic Missile (ABM) Treaty in 1972 tried to stop the United States and Soviet Union
from using ballistic missiles as a defensive shield to launch a nuclear attack.
➢ The US and Soviet Union signed a number of other arms control treaties including the Strategic
Arms Limitations Treaty (SALT) I and II and the Strategic Arms Reduction Treaty (START) I and II.
➢ The Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty (NPT) of 1968 was an arms control Treaty. Those countries
that had tested and manufactured nuclear weapons before 1967 were allowed to keep their
weapons and those had not done so were to give up the right to acquire them.
➢ Traditional security also accepts confidence building as a means of avoiding violence.
➢ Confidence building is a process in which countries share ideas and information with their rivals.
Non-Traditional Notion
➢ Non-traditional views of security have been called ‘Human Security’ or ‘Global Security’.
➢ Human security is about the protection of people more than the protection of states.
➢ Protecting citizens from foreign attack may be a necessary condition for the security of individuals.
➢ More people have been killed by their own governments than by foreign armies.
➢ Proponents of the ‘narrow’ concept of human security focus on violent threats to individuals.
➢ UN Secretary-General Kofi Annan puts it, “the protection of communities and individuals from
internal violence”.
➢ Proponents of the ‘broad’ concept of human security argue that the threat agenda should include
hunger, disease and natural disasters because these kill far more people than war, genocide and
combined.
➢ The human security agenda also encompasses economic security and ‘threats to human dignity’.
➢ The broadest formulation stresses what has been called ‘Freedom from Want’ and ‘Freedom from
Fear’, respectively.
The idea of global security emerged in the 1990 in response to the global nature of threats such as global
warming, international terrorism and health epidemics.
➢ No country can resolve these problems alone.

➢ One country may have to disproportionately bear the brunt of a global problem such as
environmental degradation.
➢ For example- due to global warming, a sea level rise of 1.5–2.0 meters would flood 20 percent of
Bangladesh, inundate most of the Maldives, and threaten nearly half the population of Thailand.
New Sources of Threats

➢ The non-traditional conceptions both human security and global security focus on the changing
nature of threats to security.
Terrorism
➢ Terrorism refers to political violence that targets civilians deliberately and indiscriminately.
➢ International terrorism involves the citizens or territory of more than one country.
➢ Civilian targets are usually chosen to terrorise the public and to use the unhappiness of the public
as a weapon against national governments.
➢ The terrorism involve hijacking planes or planting bombs in trains, cafes, markets and other
crowded places.
➢ 11 September 2001 when terrorists attacked the World Trade Centre in USA, other governments
and public have paid more attention to terrorism.
➢ The terror attacks have occurred in the Middle East, Europe, Latin America and South Asia.
Human Rights
➢ Human rights have come to be classified into three types. 1- The first type is political rights such
as freedom of speech and assembly. 2- The second type is economic and social rights. 3- The third
type is the rights of colonised people or ethnic and indigenous minorities.
➢ Iraq’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, the genocide in Rwanda, and the Indonesian military’s
killing of people in East Timor have led to a debate on whether or not the UN should intervene to
stop human rights abuses.
Global Poverty
➢ Global poverty is another source of insecurity.
➢ Half the world’s population growth occurs in just six countries—India, China, Pakistan, Nigeria,
Bangladesh and Indonesia.
➢ Among the world’s poorest countries, population is expected to triple in the next 50 years.
➢ High per capita income and low population growth make rich states or rich social groups get
richer, whereas low incomes and high population growth reinforce each other to make poor
states and poor groups get poorer.
➢ This disparity contributes to the gap between the Northern and Southern countries of the world.
➢ The world’s armed conflicts now take place in sub-Saharan Africa, which is also the poorest region
of the world.
Migrations
➢ Poverty in the South has led to large-scale migration to seek a better life, better economic
opportunities in the North.
➢ International law and norms make a distinction between migrants (those who voluntarily leave
their home countries) and refugees (those who flee from war, natural disaster or political
persecution).
➢ States are generally supposed to accept refugees but they do not have to accept migrants.
➢ While refugees leave their country of origin, people who have fled their homes but remain within
national borders are called ‘internally displaced people’.
➢ Kashmiri Pandits that fled the violence in the Kashmir Valley in the early 1990 are an example
of an internally displaced community.
➢ Individuals, families and whole communities have been forced to migrate because of fear of
violence or destruction of livelihoods, identities and living environments.
Health Epidemic
➢ Health epidemics such as HIV-AIDS, bird flu, severe acute respiratory syndrome (SARS) and
COVID-19 have rapidly spread across countries through migration, business, tourism and
military operations.
➢ One country’s success or failure in limiting the spread of these diseases affects infections in other
countries.
➢ Estimated 4 Crore people were infected with HIV-AIDS worldwide, two-thirds of them in Africa and
half of the rest in South Asia.
➢ But these treatments were too expensive to help poor regions like Africa where it has proved to be
a major factor in driving the region backward into deeper poverty.
➢ Other new and poorly understood diseases such as Ebola virus, Hantavirus, and hepatitis C have
emerged, while old diseases like tuberculosis, malaria, dengue fever and cholera have mutated
into drug resistant forms that are difficult to treat.
➢ Since the late 1990, Britain has lost billions of dollars of income during an outbreak of the mad-
cow disease, and bird flu shut down supplies of poultry exports from several Asian countries.
➢ Such epidemics demonstrate the growing interdependence of states making their borders less
meaningful than in the past and emphasise the need for international cooperation.
➢ Expansion of the concept of security does not mean that we can include any kind of disease or
distress in the ambit of security.
➢ Maldives may feel threatened by global warming because a big part of its territory may be
submerged with the rising sea level,
➢ South Africa HIV-AIDS poses a serious threat as one in six adults has the disease (one in three for
Botswana, the worst case).
➢ In 1994, the Tutsi tribe in Rwanda faced a threat to its existence as nearly five lakh of its people
were killed by the rival Hutu tribe in a matter of weeks.
➢ This shows that non-traditional conceptions of security, like traditional conceptions of security,
vary according to local contexts.
Cooperative Security
➢ Military force may have a role to play in combating terrorism or in enforcing human rights (there is
a limit to what force can achieve) but it is difficult to see what force would do to help alleviate
poverty, manage migration, refugee movements and control epidemics.
➢ Far more effective is to devise strategies that involve international cooperation. Cooperation may
be bilateral (between any two countries), regional, continental or global.
➢ Cooperative security may also involve a variety of other players, both International and National.
➢ International organisations (the UN, the World Health Organisation, the World Bank, the IMF etc.),
Non-Governmental Organisations (NGOs) - (Amnesty International, the Red Cross, private
foundations and charities, churches and religious organisations, trade unions, associations, social
and development organisations), businesses and corporations and great personalities (Mother
Teresa, Nelson Mandela).
India’s Security Strategy

➢ India has faced traditional (military) and non-traditional threats to its security that have emerged
from within as well as outside its borders.
➢ Strengthening Military Capabilities:

➢ The first component was strengthening its military capabilities.
➢ India has been involved in conflicts with its neighbours — Pakistan in 1947–48, 1965, 1971 and
1999; and China in 1962.
➢ India’s decision to conduct nuclear tests in 1998 was justified by the Indian government in terms of
safeguarding national security.
➢ India first tested a nuclear device in 1974.
➢ strengthen international norms :

➢ The second component of India’s security strategy has been to strengthen international norms and
international institutions to protect its security interests.
➢ India’s first Prime Minister, Jawaharlal Nehru, supported the cause of Asian solidarity,
decolonisation, disarmament.
➢ India also took initiatives to bring about a universal and non-discriminatory non-proliferation
regime in which all countries would have the same rights and obligations with respect to weapons
of mass destruction (nuclear, biological, chemical).
➢ India joined 160 countries that have signed and ratified the 1997 Kyoto Protocol, which provides a
roadmap for reducing the emissions of greenhouse gases to check global warming.
➢ Security Strategy :
➢ The third component of Indian security strategy is geared towards meeting security challenges
within the country.
➢ India has tried to preserve national unity by adopting a democratic political system, which allows
different communities and groups of people to freely articulate their grievances and share political
power.
MCQ TYPE QUESTION- 1 MARK

Q.1- Which of the following is are statement incorrect?
(A) Security means freedom from threats
(B) Maintaining balance of power
(C) Security relates only external
(D) None of these
Q.2- Which is the import dimension of the national security?
(A) Military action
(B) Balance of Power
(C) Security Policy
(D) All of these
Q.3- ‘Deterrence’ refers to……….?
(A) Limiting war
(B) End of war
(C) Preventing war
(D) Surrender
Q.4- How many concepts of security are there?
(A) Protective and unsecure
(B)Traditional and Non-Traditional
(C) International and External
(D) None of these
Q.5- In the traditional concept of security, which threat is considered the most dangerous for a
country?
(A)Terrorism
(B) Global Poverty
(C) Military action
(D) Human Rights
Q.6- What were the security challenges faced by the newly independent countries of Asia and
Africa?
(I) The prospect of military conflict with neighbouring countries.
(II) Worried about internal military conflict.
(A) (I) is correct
(B) (II) is correct
(C) Both (I) (II) are correct
(D) Both (I) (II) are incorrect
Q.7- Arrange the chronological order?
(I) The strategic arms limitations treaty (SALT-II)
(II) The strategic arms Reduction Treaty (START)
(III) Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty (NPT)
(IV) Chemical Weapons Convention (CWC)
(A) (III) (I) (II) (IV)
(B) (IV) (III) (II) (I)
(C) (I) (II) (III) (IV)
(D) (II) (I) (IV) (II)
Q.8- Consider the following statements?
(1) The Cold War between the two superpowers was responsible for approximately 1/3 of all wars in
the Post Second World War period.
(2) Most of these wars were fought in the first world countries.
The correct statement is/are:
(A) Only 1
(B) Only 2
(C) Both 1 and 2
(D) None of these
Q.9- Which are the most important cooperation about disarmament?
(A) Biological Weapons Convention (BWC)
(B) Chemical Weapons Convention (CWC)
(C) Anti-Ballistic Missile Treaty (ABM)
(D) All of these
Q.10- Which of the following statements is/are incorrect?
(A) The protection of people and states are Human Security.
(B) Narrow concept of Human Security focus on violent threats to individuals.
(C) Broad concept include hunger, disease and natural disaster.
(D) Arms race include in security.
Q.11- The question below there are two statements marked as Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Read
Assertion (A) : In the traditional conception of security, the greatest danger to a country is from military
threats.
Reason (R) : Military actions endanger the core values of a country such as sovereignty, independence and
territorial integrity.
(A) A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
(B) A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(C) A is true but R is false.
(D) A is false but R is true
Assertion (A) : Terrorism refers to political violence.

Reason (R) : International terrorism involves the citizens and more than one country.
(D) A is false but R is true
Q.13- The New Sources of Threats are?

(A) Terrorism
(B) Human Rights
(C) Global Security
(D) All of these
Assertion (A) : Global security response to the global nature of threats.
Reason (R) : No country can resolve these problems alone.
(D) A is false but R is true.
Q.15- I- High per capita income and low population growth make rich and richer.
II- Low incomes and high population growth poor and poorer.
Choose the correct statement.
(A) I, II are correct
(B) Only I is correct
(C) Only II is correct
(D) Neither I nor II
Very Short Answers – 2 Marks

Q.-1- What are India’s security strategies?
Ans.- Strengthen military capabilities strengthen international norms and institutions to protect its
security interests.
Q.2- What is Kyoto Protocol? When it was signed?
Ans. – Kyoto protocol provides a roadmap for greenhouse gasses to check global warming. It signed and
ratified in 1997.
Q.3- How many types are human rights classified?
Ans.- Human right classified into three types- 1- Political Rights, 2- Economic and Social Rights, 3- The
rights of colonised people or ethnic and indigenous minorities.
Q.4- What is meant by traditional notion of external security?
Ans.- Traditional notion of external security is that the greatest danger to a country is from military threats.
Q.5- What component of security policy?
Ans.- The security policy is concerned with preventing wars which is called deterrence. Limiting or ending
war, which is called defence.
Q.6- What do you understand by alliance building?
Ans.- An alliance is a coalition of states that coordinate their actions to deter or defend against military
attack. Alliance are based on national interests and can change when national interests change.
Q.7- How are the threats faced by the people in the Third World?
Ans. – The Third World countries face the threats not only form outside their borders but also from within.
They faced separatist movement.
Q.8- By which laws Arms were regulated?
Ans.- The Anti-Ballistic Missile (ABM) Treaty in 1972. The strategic Arms Reduction Treaty. Strategic Arms
Limitations Treaty- II, Nuclear-Non Proliferation Treaty.
Q.9- Explain the Non-Traditional Notions?
Ans.- Non-Traditional Notions of security go beyond military threats. It include a wide range of threats and
dangers affecting the conditions of human existence.
Q.10- Which are the New Source of Threats?
Ans. – 1- Terrorism , 2- Human Rights, 3- Global Poverty, 4- Health Epidemics (HIV-AIDS, Bird Flu, SARS,
COVID-19).
SHORT TYPE QUESTIONS ANSWERS – 4 MARKS

Q.1- Why terrorism is a Global Problem? Explain?
Ans.
1- There is not a single country in the world that does not suffer from terrorism.
2- Civilian targets are usually chosen to terrorise the public.
3- To use the unhappiness of the public as a weapon against national governments.
4- Terrorism involve hijacking planes or planting bombs in trains, markets and other crowded places.
Q.2- What are the elements of security?
Ans.
1- Military: The military power protect the war and to face external power.
2- Alliance: Many nations increase the military power and coordinate their actions to deter or defend
against military attack.
3- Deterrence: Security policy is concerned with preventing war, which is called deterrence.
4- Balance of Power: Governments are very sensitive to the balance of power between their country
and other countries. They do hard work to maintain a favourable balance of power.
Q.3- Describe the importance of cooperation in the field of Traditional Security?
Ans.
1- Arms control regulates the acquisition of weapons.
2- Anti-Ballistic Missile Treaty (1972) tried to stop the USA and USSR from using ballistic missiles as
a defensive.
3- Disarmament requires all states to give up certain kinds of weapons.
4- Confidence building is accepted as a means of avoiding violence.
Q.4- What are the reasons behind increase in terrorism at international level?
Ans.
1- Globalisation of economy is responsible.
2- Information and technology have way for terrorism.
3- Competition of modernise weapons.
4- Advance transport systems.
Q.5- Explain the policy of directive principles of state policies mentioned in Indian constitution to
promote and international peace and security?
Ans. –
1- Respect of international laws and treaties.
2- Respectful relations between the countries.
3- Make efforts to mediate international controversies and settlements
4- To increase international peace and security.
Q.6- What is security? Explain the component of Indian Security Strategy?
Ans. Security implies freedom from threats.
1- Security challenges within the country.
2- Develop its economy.
3- To bring the citizens of country out of poverty and economic inequalities.
4- Strengthening military capabilities.
Q.7- Explain the sources of security threats?
Ans.
1- Terrorism: It refers to political violence that targets civilians deliberately and indiscriminately.
International terrorism of more than one country. International terrorism involves the citizen’s
more than one country.
2- Human Rights: Human rights have come to be classified into Tree Types. First- Political Rights such
as Freedom of Speech and assembly. Second – Economic and social Rights.
3- Global Poverty: World’s poorest countries, population is expected to triple in the next 50 years.
High per capita income and low population growth make rich states or rich social groups get richer.
Whereas low incomes and high population growth reinforce each other to make poor states and
poor groups get power.
4- Migration: Poverty in the South has also led to large scale migration to seek a better life, especially
better economic opportunities. International law and norms make a distinction between migrants
and refugees.
5- Health Epidemic: Such as HIV-AIDS, Bird Flu, Severe Acute Respiratory Syndrome (SARS), COVID-
19 have rapidly spread across countries through migration, business, tourism and military
operations.
Q.8- Explain the balance of power as a component of traditional security of policy?
Ans. In traditional conception of security, the greatest danger to a country is from military threats. This
source of this danger is another country which by threatening military action endangers the core values of
sovereignty, independence and territorial integrity.
1- Balance of power: Governments are very sensitive to the balance of power between their country
and other countries. They do hard work to maintain a favourable balance of power.
2- Avoidance of war: The government may make the choice of surrender when in war. But this may
not be promoted as a country’s defence policy.
Q.9- What do you mean by traditional notion of internal and external security?
Ans.
1- Internal Security: Traditional security must also concern itself with internal security. The reason it
is not given so much importance is that after the Second World War it seemed that for the most
powerful countries on earth. Internal security was more or less assured.
2- External Security: In the traditional view of security most threats to a country’s security come from
outside its borders. That is because the international system is a rather brutal arena in which there
is no central authority capable of controlling behaviour.
Q.10- Explain the Non-Traditional conception of security?
Ans.
1- Human Security: Human security is about the protection of people more than the protection of
states. Human security and state security should be and often are the same thing. But secure stats
do not automatically means secure peoples. Protecting citizens from foreign attack may be a
necessary condition for the security of individuals but it is certainly not a sufficient one. UN
Secretary General Kofi Annan puts it, “the protection of communities and individuals from
internal violence”.
2- Global Security: The idea of global security emerged in the 1990 in response to the global nature of
threats such as global warming, international terrorism and health epidemics such as AIDS, Bird Flu
Global Warming, and environmental degradation. One country cannot resolve these problems
alone.
LONG TYPE QUESTIONS ANSWERS - 6 MARKS

Q.1- ‘India has faced traditional and Non-traditional treats’. Explain how India is emerging from
these threats?
Ans. India’s security emerged from within as well as outside its borders. India adopts four types of
strategies to overcome these threats-
1- Military Capabilities: India has been involved in conflicts with its neighbours Pakistan and China.
Since it is surrounded by nuclear armed countries. India’s decision to conduct nuclear tests in 1998
was justified by the Indian government in term safeguarding national security.
2- Protect Security Interest: India has been to strengthen International norms and International
institutions to protect its security interests. India took initiatives to bring about a universal and non-
discriminatory Non-proliferation regime.
3- Security Challenges with the country several militant groups from areas time to time sought to
break away from India. India has tried to preserve national unity by adopting a democracy.
4- Developed Economy: India develop its economy in a way that the mass of citizens are lifted out of
poverty and misery and huge economic inequalities are not allowed to exist.
Q.2- How are threats faced by the people in the Third World different from those faced by the people
living in the first world? Support your answer with example?
Ans. The threats that individuals in the third world faced compared to those in the first world were vastly
different.
1- Threats to third world countries come not just form outside their boundaries, primarily from
their neighbours but also from within. They fought for boundaries and territories as well as control
of people and populations or all of these things at once.
2- Separatist movements seeking to build an independent country pose a threat to new third world
republics. External and Internal threats converged at time.
3- The cold war between the two super powers was responsible for approximately 1/3 of all wars in
the post-second world war period, these wars were fought in the third world.
4- European colonial powers feared violence in the colonies they might be attacked by their former
colonial rulers in Europe. The French fighting in Vietnam in the 1950s or the British fighting in
Kenya in the 1950 to 1960.
Q.3- ‘Not just the state but also individuals or communities or indeed all of humankind’. Explain
why the Non-Traditional concept of security is called protection of humanity or protection of the
world?
Ans. Non-traditional views of security have been called ‘Human Security’ or ‘Global Security’.
1- Human security is about the protection of people more that the protection of state.
2- Human security and state security should be and often are the same thing.
3- Human security agree that its primary goal is the protection of individuals.
4- Human security include two concept- (A) Narrow- It is focus on violent threats to individuals. (B)
Broad- It is include hunger, disease and natural disaster.
5- Broadest formulation of human security encompasses economic security and threats to human
dignity, ‘Freedom from Want’ and ‘Freedom from Fear’ respectively.
6- Threats as Global Warming, international terrorism and health epidemics like AIDS and Bird Flu,
No Country can resolve these problems alone. These threats are global security, so International
cooperation is vital.
Q.4- Explain the New Sources of threats which was facing by world in present scenario?
Ans. The new sources of threats facing by world in present scenario are-
1- Terrorism: It refers to political violence that targets civilians deliberately and indiscriminately.
International terrorism of more than one country. Civilian targets are usually chosen to terrorism
the public and to use the unhappiness of the public as a weapon against national government.
2- Human Rights: Human rights have come to be classified into Tree Types. First- Political Rights such
as Freedom of Speech and assembly. Second – Economic and social Rights. Third – Right of colonised
people or ethnic and indigenous minorities.
3- Global Poverty: Global poverty is another sources of insecurity. World population will grow. Half
of the world’s population growth occurs in just six countries – India, China, Pakistan, Nigeria,
Bangladesh and Indonesia. World’s poorest countries, population is expected to triple in the next
50 years. High per capita income and low population growth make rich states or rich social groups
get richer. Whereas low incomes and high population growth reinforce each other to make poor
states and poor groups get power.
4- Migration: Poverty in the South has also led to large scale migration to seek a better life, especially
better economic opportunities. In the North, this has created international political frictions.
International law and norms make distinction between migrants and refugees.
5- Health Epidemics: Such as HIV-AIDS, Bird Flu, Severe Acute Respiratory Syndrome (SARS), COVID-
19 have rapidly spread across countries through migration, business, tourism and military
operations. One country’s success or failure in limiting the spread of these disease affects infections
in other countries.
Q.5- What are the core values of a country? Explain the Traditional Notions of security?
Ans. – Core values of a country is a set of fundamental beliefs, Ideals or practices that inform to conduct
internal and external security.
1- In the traditional conception of security, the greatest danger to a country is from military threats.
2- The source of this danger is another country which by threatening military action endangers the
core values of sovereignty, independence and territorial integrity.
3- A government has three basic choices: to surrender; to prevent the other side from attacking by
promising to raise the costs of war to an unacceptable level; and to defend itself when war actually
breaks out so as to deny the attacking country its objectives and to turn back or defeat the attacking
forces altogether.
4- Traditional security policy has a third component called balance of power. When countries look
around them, they see that some countries are bigger and stronger. This is a clue to who might be a
threat in the future. For instance, a neighbouring country may not say it is preparing for attack.
5- A fourth and related component of traditional security policy is alliance building. An alliance is a
coalition of states that coordinate their actions to deter or defend against military attack.
Cooperation may be bilateral (i.e. between any two countries), regional, continental, or global. It would all
depend on the nature of the threat and the willingness and ability of countries to respond. Cooperative
security may also involve a variety of other players, both international and national—international
organisations (the UN, the World Health Organisation, the World Bank, the IMF etc.), non-governmental
organisations (Amnesty International, the Red Cross, private foundations and charities, churches and
religious organisations, trade unions, associations, social and development organisations), businesses and
corporations, and great personalities (e.g. Mother Teresa, Nelson Mandela).
V- Bilateral means……………….?
(E) Involving two groups of people.
(F) Involving two countries
(G)A and B
(H) None of these
VI- At what level can there be cooperation?
(E) Bilateral
(F) Regional
(G) Continental or global
(H) All of these
VII- Which are no the international organizations involved in cooperative security?
(E) UN
(F) WHO
(G)Red cross
(H) WTO
VIII- Which is/are the Non-governmental organisation involved in cooperative security?
(E) Amnesty International, Trade Union
(F) UN, WHO, WTO
(G) Red Cross, IMF
(H) Trade Union, UN
The Anti-ballistic Missile (ABM) Treaty in 1972 tried to stop the United States and Soviet Union from using
ballistic missiles as a defensive shield to launch a nuclear attack. While it did allow both countries. The US
and Soviet Union signed a number of other arms control treaties including the Strategic Arms Limitations
Treaty II or SALT II and the Strategic Arms Reduction Treaty (START). The Nuclear Non-Proliferation
Treaty (NPT) of 1968 was an arms control treaty in the sense that it regulated the acquisition of nuclear
weapons: those countries that had tested and manufactured nuclear weapons before 1967 were allowed
to keep their weapons; and those that had not done so were to give up the right to acquire them.
I- Which countries were singed the ABM?
(A) USA, Britain
(B) USA, USSR
(C) China, USA
(D) USSR, China
II- Name of full form of SALT?
(A) Strategic Arms Limitation Treaty.
(B) Strategic Alliance Limitations Treaty.
(C) Strategic Attack Limitation Treaty
(D) None of these
III- Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty was signed?
(A) 1973
(B) 1978
(C) 1968
(D) 2001
IV- Under whom to regulates the acquisition of weapons?
(A) Arms Control
(B) Force Control
(C) UNO
(D) SAARC
An India’s first Prime Minister, Jawaharlal Nehru, supported the cause of Asian solidarity, decolonisation,
disarmament, and the UN as a forum in which international conflicts could be settled. India also took
initiatives to bring about a universal and non-discriminatory non-proliferation regime in which all
countries would have the same rights and obligations with respect to weapons of mass destruction
(nuclear, biological, chemical). It argued for an equitable New International Economic Order (NIEO). Most
importantly, it used non-alignment to help carve out an area of peace outside the bloc politics of the two
superpowers. India joined 160 countries that have signed and ratified the 1997 Kyoto Protocol, which
provides a roadmap for reducing the emissions of greenhouse gases to check global warming.
I- Jawahar Lal Nerhu was supported the ………….?
(A) Asian Solidarity
(B) Decolonisation
(C) Disarmament
(D) All of these
II- Which International organisation settled the conflicts between countries?
(A) WTO
(B) Amnesty International Organisation.
(C) UNO
(D) Red cross
III- Name the full form of NIEO?
(A) Nuclear International Economic Order
(B) NET International Economic Order
(C) New International Economic Order
(D) New York International Economic Order
IV- When India signed and ratified the Kyoto Protocol?
(A) 1997
(B)1998
(C)1990
(D) 2000

information used
(I)
(II)
(III)
(IV)
(I) In 1980, Al-Qaeda led by Osama Bin Laden terrorist attacked. (USA)
(II) An example of an internationally displaced community. (Kashmir, India)
(III) In 2003, 2/3 people were infected with HIV-AIDS. (South Africa)
(IV) 1990 An outbreak of the Mad-Cow disease. (Britain)
Q.1- What is depicted in this picture.

(I) Nature of the threat.
(II) Balance only in Natural Disaster.
(III) Balance only in Terrorism.
(IV) Conflict between two countries.
Q.2- How should the world address issue shown here?
(I) It include any kind of disease in the Ambit of Security.
(II) Include distress in the Ambit of Security.
(III) Including all accepted standard.
(IV) None of these
Q.3- Which of the following is/ are involved in natural disasters?
(I) Cyber attack
(II) Mad-Cow disease
(III) Military operations
(IV)Terrorism
Q.4- Which country is most at risk from global warming?
(I) Cambodia
(II) Canada
(III) Maldives
(IV) USA
ENVIRONMENT AND NATURAL RESOURCES
Gist of Environment and Natural Resources
In this chapter we shall look at the major environmental issues such as:
➢ Important environmental movement against the backdrop of the rising profile of
environmentalism.
Common property resources.
➢ India’s stand in more recent environmental debates.
➢ Geopolitics of resources competition.
➢ Voice, Concern and right of indigenous people.
Environmental Concerns in world Politics.
Lack of
Cultivable
Ozone layer area
Deplation
Global
warming
Reason for
environmental
Threat of concern in
human contemporary
existence politics
Reduction
in the
amount of
Limited potable
Resources water
Increasing
pollution
➢ Throughout the world Decline in area of cultivable land, Agriculture land is losing fertility.
➢ Quantity of water has also been decreased from water bodies.
➢ Grassland has been decreased.
➢ The population of the world is increasing day by day
➢ Natural forest are very helpful to stabilize the climate, moderate water supplies and
balancing ecosystem.
➢ But Deforestation, Loss of Natural forests,
➢ Loss of biodiversity continues due to destruction of Natural Habitat of different spices.
➢ People are being displaced.
➢ Coastal pollution and coastal water are polluted largely due to land-based activities.
➢ Steady decline in the total amount of Ozone in the Earths Stratosphere Depletion (Ozone hole) poses
a real danger to ecosystems and human health.
➢ According to the human development report 2016 of United Nations Development Programme 663
million people in developing countries have no access to safe water and 2.4 billion have no access
to sanitation. It’s major concern for world politics.
Environmental Programmes
➢ No single country of the world can resolve these problems so these issues are included into
world politics.
➢ The club of Rome, a global think tank, published a book in 1972 entitled ‘Limits to growth’
point out the depletion of the earth’s resources.
➢ United Nations Environment program (UNEP) began international conferences and
promoting detailed studies to get a more coordinate and effective response to environmental
problems.
The Earth Summit – 1992
➢ United Nations conference on environment and development held at Rio-De-Janerio, Brazil
in June 1992
➢ This is known as Earth summit.
➢ The summit was attended by 170 states, thousands of NGO’s and many multinational
corporations.
➢ The Rio summit produced conventions dealing with climate change, biodiversity forestry.
➢ Agenda 21 was passed in Rio summit it recommended a list of development practices.
➢ Development should take place without harming the environment it is called sustainable
development
North South
Located in Northern hemisphere of the Located in Southern hemisphere of the
world world
Rich and Developed Countries Poor and developing Countries
The main concern of southern countries
Northern states were concern with ozone is relationship between economic
depletion and global warming development and environment
management.
Referred to as the global North and First Referred to as the global South and Third
world world
.
The Protection of Global Commons
➢ Commons are those resources which are not owned by anyone but rather shared by a community.
➢ Similarly, there are some areas or regions of the world which are located outside thesovereign
jurisdiction of any one state, and therefore require common governance by the international
community. These are known as global commons.
➢ It includes the earth’s atmosphere, Antarctica, the ocean floor and outer space.
➢ Some agreements have been signed to protect and conserve global commons.
➢ Antarctic Treaty 1959
➢ Montreal protocol 1987
➢ Antarctic Environment Protocol 1991
Common but Different Responsibilities

➢ This argument was accepted in the Rio Declaration in 1992 and is called the principle of
common but differentiated responsibilities.
North South
The developed countries of the north want to The developing countries of the south feel
discuss the environment environmental that much of the ecological degradation in
issue as it stands now and want everyone to the world is the product of industrial
be equally responsible for ecological development undertaken by developed
conservation. countries. If they have caused more
degradation must also take more
responsibility for undoing the damage now.
The developing countries are in the process
of industrialization and they must not be
subjected to the same restrictions.
➢ Thus, special needs of the developing countries must be taken

into account of development.
United Nations framework convention on climate change: (UNFCCC -1992)
➢ It is a United Nations protocol for climate change.
➢ It provides that countries shout act to protect the climate change “on the basis of equality and
in according to their common but differentiated responsibilities and respective capabilities.
Kyoto Protocol
➢ The Kyoto protocol is an international agreement setting target to cut their greenhouse gas
emission.
➢ Certain gases like Carbon dioxide, Methane, Hydro-fluoro carbons etc. are considered at least partly
responsible for global warming.
➢ The Kyoto protocol was agreed to in 1997 at Kyoto in Japan based on principles set out in UNFCCC.
Common Property Resources

➢ Common property resources represent common property for the group. the underlying norms
here is that members of the group have right and duties with respect to the nature.
India’s stand on environment issues
➢ India has always supported efforts for the prevention degradation and always been a supporter of
environment conservation and protection.
➢ India signed and ratified the Kyoto protocol in August 2002. India, china and other developing
countries were exempt from the requirement of Kyoto protocol because their contribution to the
emission of greenhouse gases during the industrialization period was not significant at the G-8
meeting in June 2005 India point out that the per capita emission.
➢ Emission rate of the developing countries is very low compare to the developed countries. India
also believes that developed countries are more responsible for environment degradation since
they released much greenhouse gases during period of industrialization so it is great responsibility
to developed countries t reduce emission rate to greenhouse gases
➢ India supporter principle of Historical responsibility as enshrined in UNFCCC.
➢ Indian government is participating in global effort through a number of programs for example
India’s National auto fuel policy mandated cleaner fuel for vehicle promoting use of CNG in metro
cities.
➢ India encourage the use of renewable energy as – Wind energy, solar energy etc. and also
encourages the use of alternative of petrol and diesel as bio-diesel.
➢ The central government has mandated that vehicle makers must manufacture, sell and register
only BS-VI (BS6) vehicles from April 1, 2020.
Environmental Movements
➢ When people are not satisfied to the political system, they show their agitation through movements.
➢ Environment movements are the most vibrant, diverse and powerful social movements access the
world today.
➢ These movements raise new idea and visions towards environmental issues.
➢ The forest movement of the south in Mexico, Chile, Brazil, Malaysia, Indonesia, continental Africa
and India are faced with enormous pressures.
Need of environmental movements.

1. Deforestation is being continued at an alarming rate in many countries of the world.
2. Exploitation of minerals is being continued. They are using chemicals for the exploitation of
mineral and harming the environment.
3. Mega –dam is being built in many countries of the world. Due to mega dam projects a large
number of people are displaced from their home. It is also harmful for biodiversity.
Examples: Narmada Bachao movement (Andolan) is one of the best known of these movements.
Resource Geopolitics
➢ Resource geopolitics is all about who gets what, when, and how. Resource have provided some of
the key means and motives of global European power expansion.
➢ During the cold war the industrialized countries of north adopted a number of methods to ensure a
steady flow of resources.
➢ They deploy military forces near exploitations sites.
➢ They established friendly government in the resources producing countries.
➢ The global economy relied on oil for much of the 20 th century.
➢ The history of petroleum is also the history of war and struggle.
Examples:
➢ US’s attack on Iraq
➢ Iraq’s attack on Kuwait
➢ The gulf region account for about 30 percent of global oil production but it has about 64% of the
earth resources.
➢ There are several disputes over water sharing in the world.
➢ Dispute between Israel, Syria, and Jordan over water of river Jordan and yarmulke.
➢ Dispute between India and Pakistan over Indus water
The Indigenous people and their Rights

➢ The question of indigenous people brings the issues of environment, resources and politics together.
➢ The UN defines indigenous the descendants of people who inhabited the present territory of a
country at the time when persons of a country different culture or ethnic origin arrived there from
other parts of the world and overcame them.
➢ Issue related to the rights of the indigenous communities have neglected in domestic and
international politics for very long.
➢ The world Council of Indigenous People was formed in 1975.
➢ Every year 9th August celebrate world indigenous day.
MCQ Type Questions

1.The Earth Summit was held at?
(a) London
(b) New York
(c) New Delhi
(d) Rio-de-Janeiro
2.World Environment Day is celebrated each year on?
(a) 5 March
(b) 5 June
(c) 5 January
(d) 7 June
3.The United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change was held in?
(a) 2004
(b) 1997
(c) 2001
(d) 1992
4.India signed and ratified the 1997 Kyoto Protocol in?
(a) August 2002
(b) July 2006
(c) August 2000
(d) August 2005
5.The World Council of Indigenous Peoples was formed in?
(a) 1950
(b) 1975
(e) 1990
(d) 2007
6.Which among the following best explains the reason for growing concerns about the environment?
(A) The developed countries are concerned about protecting nature.
(B) Protection of the environment is vital for indigenous people and natural habitats.
(C) The environmental degradation caused by human activities has become pervasive and has
reached a dangerous level.
(D) None of the above.
7. Which among the following are true about the Global Commons?
(A) The earth’s atmosphere, Antarctica ocean floor and outer space are considered as part of the
global commons.
(B) The global commons arc outside the sovereign jurisdiction.
(C) The question of managing the global commons reflected the North-South divide.
(D) The countries of the North are more concerned about the protection of the global common than the
countries of the South.
8. Kyoto is a city in _____?
(A). China
(B). None of these
(C) Japan
(D) South Korea
9. What was the title of Brundtland Report of 1987?
(A)Our common and precious future
(B)Our Common Future
(C) Our Precious Future
(D) Our Future
10. Which of the following is NOT a treaty for the global commons?
(A)Tokyo Protocol
(B)Antarctic Environmental protocol
(C)Antarctic Treaty
(D)Montreal Protocol
11. Which of the following is a global common?
(A)Hotel
(B)Oil Refinery
(C)Gas Line
(D)Ocean Floor
12. What was the name of the list of development practices issued at the Rio Summit?
(A)Agenda 21
(B)Agenda 20
(C)Agenda Rio
(D)Agenda 22
13. Which out of the following can be termed as the concept of 'sustainable development'?
(A)combining economic growth with social growth
(B)combining economic growth with ecological responsibility
(C)combining economic growth with political growth
(D)All of these
14. As per the Kyoto protocol, the major countries had to reduce the concentration of greenhouse gases by
________
(A)2012
(B)2008
(C)2018
(D)2010
15.How many nations attended United Nations Conference on Environment and Development, 1992?
a.170
b.190
c.180
d.160
VERY SHORT TYPE QUESTIONS 2 MARKS
Q.1. Why should the ‘environmental concerns’ be part of contemporary global politics?
Ans. The environmental concerns should be part of contemporary global politics because no single
government can address the environmental concerns in isolation.
Q.2. Which world summit conference was held at Rio in 1992?
Ans. Earth summit was held at Rio in 1992.
Q.3. Why were India and China exempted from the Kyoto Protocol?
Ans. India, China and other developing countries were exempted from the requirements of Kyoto Protocol
because their per capita emission was comparatively lower than it was in developed countries.
Q.4. What were the recommendations of the Rio Summit Known as?
Ans. The recommendations of the Rio Summit were known as ‘Agenda 21’.
Q.5. What is sustainable development?
Ans.- This is an approach of economic development without harming of environment.
Q.6.- Why history of petroleum is also history of war and struggle?
Ans.- World economy is based on petroleum and immense wealth is associated with oil. It creates political
struggles and war to control over them.
Q.7. What were the causes of worry of South?
Ans. South were anxious to address the relationship between economic development and environment
management.
Q.8. What are the reasons to increase the pollution in Antarctica?
Ans.- Coastal pollution is increasing in the world. Open sea is relatively clean. Coastal water is becoming
increasingly polluted largely.
Q.9. Define Indigenous population?
Ans . Indigenous population are tribal or native people whose interests and rights are imperialised by the
foreign people who migrated from time to time in territories.
Q.10. Between which countries is the dispute over the Yarmuk River?
Ans. Israel, Syria and Jordan.
SHORT TYPE QUESTIONS 4 MARKS
Q.1- What are ‘Global Commons’? Why cooperation is not easy?
Ans.
1- It is difficult to achieve consensus on common environmental agenda.
2- Outer space as global common shows the management of these areas influenced by North-East
inequalities.
3- The crucial issue here is technology and development.
4- Benefit of activities in space are far.
Q.2- Describe the favour of India on Environment Related Issues?
Ans.
1- The government of India is already participating in global efforts.
2- Review of agreements at the Earth Summit in Rio-De-Jenerio was undertaken by India.
3- International negotiation position relies heavily on principles of responsibilities.
4- India signed on Kyoto Protocol in 2002.
Q.3- What are the important outcome of the Rio-Summit?
Ans.
1- Consensus on Sustainable Development.
2- List of development practices called ‘Agenda-21’.
3- Dealing with Climate Change, Biodiversity and Forestry.
Q.4. Describe facts on which environmental concerns are based in the World Politics?
Ans.-
1- Forest will help stabilise the climate, water supply.
2- Human Development Report 2006 of United Nations Development Programme have no access to
sanitation.
3- Grassland have been overgrazed.
4- Cultivable land has lessened.
Q.5. What is meant by Geo-Politics?
Ans. Geopolitics is related to the geographical political affairs which deals with allocation and distribution
of natural resources among the nation states of world. It is all about who gets what, when, where and how.
Q.6. Why do indigenous people need special protection to protect their rights?
Ans. Issues related to the rights of indigenous people have been neglected as people of varied cultures from
various parts of the world overcome them. Also these people have threat to their survival due to loss of
land which is main source of their livelihood. This is the reason they require special protection to protect
their rights.
Q.7. What is meant by the concept of ‘common but differentiated responsibility’?
Ans. Common but differentiated responsibility refers that all nations share common responsibility for
environmental degradation but developed nations have greater responsibility than developing nations
because of their different contribution to environmental degradation.
Q.8. What is meant by ‘common property’?
Ans. Common property represents common property for the group. The underlying norm here is that
members of the group have both rights and duties with respect to the nature, levels of use and maintenance
of a given resource.
Q.9. Describe any four issues relating to environmental degradation?
Ans. Following are the issues relating to environmental degradation:
• The land is not expanding further, grasslands and fisheries have been over-exploited. There is hardly
any food production on the polluted and depleted water bodies.
• Natural forests which help stabilize the climate, moderate water supplies and harbor a majority of
the planet’s biodiversity on land are being cut down and people are being displaced.
• A steady decline in the total amount of ozone in the Earth’s stratosphere poses a real danger to human
health.
• Coastal waters are becoming increasingly polluted largely due to land-based activities, it will increase
deterioration in the quality of marine environment.
Q.10. Why have issues related to global environment protection become the priority concern of
states since the 1990s?
Ans.
1- The issues related to global environmental protection have become the priority concern of states since
the 1990s for the following reasons.
2- The cultivable area is not expanding anymore and substantial portion of existing agricultural land is
losing fertility.
3- About 1.2 billion people in developing countries have no access to safe drinking water and 2.6 billion
have no access to sanitation. This has resulted in the death of more than three million children every year.
4- Natural forest is being cut down and people are being displaced. There is a loss of biodiversity due to
the destruction of habitat in areas that are rich in species
5-The ozone poses a real danger to ecosystems and human health. Coastal pollution too is increasing
globally
LONG TYPE QUESTIONS 6 MARKS

Q.1. What are ‘global commons’? Why is it said that international cooperation over the global
commons is not easy?
Ans. For global commons, In the world, some areas are situated beyond a sovereign jurisdiction of any
one state. Hence they need united control by the international community. They are called global
commons.
Two examples are :
• Earth’s atmosphere
• Ocean floor
The international cooperation over the ‘global commons’ is not easy because:
1. It is not easy to do cooperation over the ‘global commons: There have been many significant agreements
such as the Antarctic Treaty (1959), the Montreal Protocol (1987) and the Antarctic-Environmental
Protocol (1991). It is very difficult to achieve consensus on common environmental agendas on the basis
of vague scientific evidence and time frames.
2. In the same way, the history of the outer space as a ‘global commons’ clearly shows that the management
of these regions is completely influenced by North-South inequalities.
Q.2. Describe any three steps taken by the Indian Government to check the environmental
degradation?
Ans. Initiatives undertaken by the Indian Government in global efforts through a number of programmes
to check environmental degradation are :
1. India’s National Auto Fuel Policy mandates cleaner fuels for vehicles. The Energy Conservation Act,
passed in 2001, outlines initiatives to reform energy efficiency.
2. The Electricity Act of 2003, supports the use of renewable energy. Presently,
India is importing natural gas and encouraging the adoption of clean coal technologies. It shows
India’s sincere efforts in this direction.
3. The Indian Government is also sincere to start a ‘National Mission on Biodiesel’. Nearly, 11 million
hectares of land is being used to produce biodiesel.
4. India has also one of the largest renewable energy programmes in the world.
Q.3. Explain the role of environmental movements to meet the challenge of environmental
degradation?
Ans. The role of environmental movements to meet the change of environmental degradation is very
important. It is justified from the points below :
1. Some of the most significant responses to environmental challenges have come not from government
but rather from groups of environmentally conscious volunteers around the world.
2. These environmental movements are amongst the most vibrant, diverse and powerful social
movements all over the world. These movements creates new ideas and long-term visions. There
are some examples to show that diversity is a significant feature of contemporary environmental
movements.
3. The Forest Movements of the South, in Mexico, Chile, Brazil, Malaysia, Indonesia, Continental Africa
and India are facing lots of pressure. The process of forest clearing in the Third World Countries is
on at an alarming rate, despite 30 years of environmental activism.
4. In the Philippines, a big network of groups and organisations campaigned against the Western Mining
Corporation. Vehement opposition to the company in its own country, Australia is based on anti-
nuclear sentiments and support for the basic rights of Australian indigenous peoples.
5. Another group of movements are involved in struggles against mega-dams In every country where
mega dams are being built, we find the environmental movements opposing the projects. Basically,
anti-dam movements are pro-river movements for more sustainable and equitable management of
river systems and valleys. “The Narmada Bachao Andolan” is one of the best known of these
movements.
Q.4. Explain India’s stand on environmental issues?
Ans. he following points highlight India’s stand on environmental issues:
1. India signed and approved the Kyoto Protocol of 1997 in August 2002.
2. India announced in the G-8 meeting that the developing countries emissions are merely a small
fraction of that of the developed nations. On the basis of principle of common but differentiated
responsibilities, India is of the opinion that the developed countries should take the responsibility to
cure this problem as they have accumulated emission over a broad period of time.
3. A review of the implementation of the agreements at the Earth Summit in Rio was undertaken by
India in 1997.
4. India suggested that SAARC countries should adopt a common position on major global environment
issues, so that they have an upper hand.
5. Some of the steps taken by Indian Government for emission control are India’ National Auto-fuel
Policy, the Energy Conservation Act, 2001 and Electricity Act of 2003 which encourages the use of
renewable energy.
6. The initiatives of importing natural gas and adoption of clean coal technologies show that India has
been making real efforts.
7. Indian Government is keen to launch National Mission on Biodiesel using about 11 million hectares
of land to produce biodiesel by 2011-2012.
Q.5. What is the significance of Kyoto Protocol? Is India a signatory to this protocol?
Ans. India is a signatory to Kyoto Protocol. The significance of Kyoto Protocol is stated in the points below:
• Kyoto Protocol frames an action plan so as to reduce emission of greenhouse gases proportionately
for global North and global South countries of the world.
• It had cleared the confusion regarding responsibilities of all countries belonging to global North and
global South.
• United Nation Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) has set out the principles and
allocated different targets for preserving global common.
• It decided that global North will provide global South with financial and technological resources so
as to meet existing commitments.
• India, China and other developing countries are exempted from the responsibility regarding
reduction in greenhouse gas emissions.
Q.6. Who are indigenous people? Describe any four problems of the indigenous people?
Ans. Definition of indigenous people There are many definitions given for the indigenous people. But
United Nations provides exact definition of indigenous people.
“Population comprising the descendants of people who inhabited the present territory of a country at the
time when persons of a different culture or ethnic origin arrived there from other parts of the world and
overcame them.”
In the background of world politics, there are some mutual interests of almost 30 crores indigenous people
expanded throughout the globe. Among the 30 crores people, 20 lakhs indigenous people belong to
Cordillera region of Philippines, 10 lakh Mapuche people of Chile, 6 lakh indigenous people belong to
Chittagong Hill in Bangladesh, around 35 lakhs are North American natives, 50000 Kuna living in East of
Panama Canal whereas 10 lakh small people live in Soviet North. Just like other social movements these
people talk about their struggles, their problems and their rights.
Threats problems of the indigenous people are:

1. The indigenous people in the global politics desire for the entry of indigenous people to the global
community as equals. Regions of Central and South America, Africa, India and South Asia are the regions
where most of the indigenous peoples are found and they are known as tribals in these regions. The
present-day island states belonging to Oceania region which includes Australia, New Zealand, were
occupied by the Polynesian, Melanesian and Micronesian people for thousands of years.
2. They have requested the governments to retain the existence of indigenous people as enduring
communities with an identity of their own. These people use the expression ‘since times immemorial’ to
refer to the occupancy of the lands from which they originated.
3. Issues related to the rights of indigenous people have been neglected as people of varied cultures from
various parts of the world overcome them. Also, these people have threat to their survival due to loss of
land which is main source of their livelihood.
4. Despite institutional measures, they have not got much benefits of development. In fact, they have paid
huge cost for development because they are forced to be displaced from their mother land owing to
developmental projects.
PASSAGE BASED, CARTOON BASED AND MAP BASED QUESTIONS – 4 MARKS

The Indian government is already participating in global efforts through a number of programmes.
For example, India’s National Auto-fuel Policy mandates cleaner fuels for vehicles. The Energy
Conservation Act, passed in 2001, outlines initiatives to improve energy efficiency. Similarly, the
Electricity Act of 2003 encourages the use of renewable energy. Recent trends in importing natural
gas and encouraging the adoption of clean coal technologies show that India has been making real
efforts. The government is also keen to launch a National Mission on Biodiesel, using about 11
million hectares of land to produce biodiesel by 2011-2012. And India has one of the largest
renewable energy programmes in the world.
Q.1- What Indian government is participating?
(A) Global Efforts
(B) Personal Efforts
(C) Regional
(D) None of these
Q.2- What is mentioned in National Auto-Fuel Policy?
(A) Designed fuel
(B) Cleaner fuel of vehicle
(C) Polluted fuel
(D) None of these
Q.3- When energy conservation act was passed?
(A) 2000
(B) 2001
(C) 2002
(D) 2003
Q.4- When electricity act was passed?
(A) 2001
(B) 2003
(C) 2005
(D) 2007
The Antarctic continental region extends over 14 million square kilometers and comprises 26 percent of
the world’s wilderness area, representing 90 percent of all terrestrial ice and 70 per cent of planetary fresh
water. The Antarctic also extends to a further 36 million square kilometers of ocean. It has a limited
terrestrial life and a highly productive marine ecosystem, comprising a few plant ( microscopic algae, fungi
and lichen) marine mammals, fish and hordes of birds adapted to harsh conditions, as well as the krill,
which is central to marine food chain and upon which other animals are dependent, the Antarctic plays and
important role in maintaining climate equilibrium, and deep ice cores provide an important source of
information about greenhouse concentrations and atmospheric temperatures of hundreds and thousands
of years ago. Who owns this coldest, farthest and windiest continent on globe? There are two claims about
it. Some countries like the UK, Argentina, Chile, Norway, France, Australia, France, Australia and New
Zealand have made legal claims to sovereign right over Antarctic territory. Most other states have taken
the opposite view that the Antarctic is a part of the global commons and not subject to the exclusive
jurisdiction of any state.
I . How many kilometers extends Antarctic continental region.

(A) 14 million
(B) 36 million
(C) 10 million
II. What is Krill ?
(A) Ocean
(B) b) animals
(C) c) marine food chain
(D) d) none of the above
III. Why Antarctic region is Important?
(A) For resources
(B) For large population
(C) For maintain eco-system
IV. Who own the Antarctica Continental?
(A) UK
(B) Argentina
(C) New Zealand
The global economy relied on oil for much of the 20th century as a portable and indispensable fuel.
The immense wealth associated with oil generates political struggles to control it and the history
of petroleum is also the history of war and struggle. Nowhere is this more obviously the case than
in West Asia and Central Asia, West Asia, specifically the Gulf region, accounts for about 30 per cent
of global oil production. But it has about 64 per cent of the planet’s known reserves, and is therefore
the only region able to satisfy any substantial rise in oil demand. Saudi Arabia has a quarter of the
world’s total reserves and is the single largest producer. Iraq’s known reserves are second only to
Saudi Arabia’s. Since substantial portions of Iraqi territory are yet to be fully explored, there is a
fair chance that actual receives might be far that actual receives might be far larger. The United
States, Europe, Japan, and increasingly India and China, which consume this petroleum, are located
at a considerable distance from the region.
Q.1- Which region has potential for oil production?
(A) Desert Region
(B) Cold Region
(C) Gulf Region
(D) All of these
Q.2- Which area is supposed to have fully explored?
(A) India territory
(B) Bangali territory
(C) Singapore territory
(D) Iraqi territory
Q.3- History of war and struggle is called?
(A) Gas
(B) Petroleum
(C) Water
(D) None of these
Q.4- Which country is single largest producer of petroleum?
(A) Saudi Arabia
(B) Sri Lanka
(C) Myanmar
(D) Bangladesh
information used
(I)
(II)
(III)
(IV)
(A) A country is related to Narmada Movement. India
(B) A nation where Kyoto Protocol was agreed in 1997. Japan
(C) Where UNFCCC was held in 1992. Brazil
(D) A Nation which was exempted from the requirement of the Kyoto Protocol. China
Q.5- Study the cartoon given below and answer the questions that follow? 1+1+1+1 =4
Q.1- What this picture draws the attention of the world?
(A) Lighting Impression

(B) Light
(C) Industrial Pollution
(D) Greenery
Q.2- What is shown in this picture?

(A) Glass
(B) Lighter
(C) Bottle
(D) None of these
Q.3- What do you think about fingers are designed like Chimney?
(A) Pollution
(B) Exploitation
(C) Development
(D) None of these
Q.4- What Lighter is representing?
(A) Recourses
(B) Depleting of Natural Resources
(C) Water Resources
(D) All of these
GLOBALISATION
➢ Globalisation means opening up the economy to integrate with the world economy.
➢ Through globalization it becomes easy to sell goods and services world over and also get the same
from anywhere in the world.
➢ Globalization is the word used to describe the growing interdependence of the world's economies,
cultures and populations.
THE CONCEPT OF GLOBALISATION

➢ Through three examples we will understand the concept of Globalisation.
➢ In the first example- Janardhan was participating in the globalization of services by doing job in a
call centre.
➢ Ramdhari's birthday purchases tell us something about the movement of commodities from one
part of the world to another.
➢ Ramdhari on his daughter’s insistence had bought her a Barbie doll, which was originally
manufactured in the US but was being sold in India.
➢ Sarika is faced with a conflict of values partly originating from a new opportunity that earlier was
not available to the women in her family but today is part of a reality that has gained wider
acceptability.
➢ If we look for examples of the use of the terms 'globalisation' in the in real life we will realise that it
is used in various contexts. Some farmers committed suicide because their crops failed.
➢ Many retails shopkeepers fear that they would lose their livelihoods because of major international
companies.
➢ A film producer in Mumbai was accused of lifting the story of his film from another film made in
Hollywood.
➢ A militant group issued a statement threatening college girls who wear western clothes.
➢ These examples show us that globalisation need not always be positive, it can have negative
consequences for the people.
➢ There are many who believe that globalisation has more negative consequences than positive.
➢ Globalization as a concept fundamentally deals with FLOWS.
Flows could be of various kinds-

➢ Ideas moving from one part of the world to another.
➢ Capital shunted between two or more places, commodities being traded across borders, and people
moving in search of better livelihoods in different parts of the world.
➢ The world-wide inter-connectedness that is created as a consequence of these constant flows.
➢ Globalization is a multi-dimensional concept.
CAUSES OF GLOBALISATION
➢ Globalization is about the flows of ideas, capital, Goods and Services and people.
➢ Globalization is not caused by any single factor technology remains a critical element.
➢ Globalisation is the result of historical factors, technological innovations, and opening of
multinational companies.
➢ Flows has been made possible largely by technological advances.
➢ The movement of capital and commodities will likely be quicker and wider than the movement of
peoples across different parts of the world.
➢ Through globalization events taking place in one part of the world could have an impact on another
part of the world. Improved communications are the major causes of globalisation.
➢ When major economic events take place, there impact is felt outside their local, national or regional
environment at the global level.
POLITICAL CONSEQUENCES
Positive Political Impect
➢ Globalization does not always reduce state capacity.
➢ State capacity has received a boost as a consequence of globalisation, with enhanced technologies.
➢ All over the world, the old welfare state that perform certain core functions such as maintenance of
law and order and the security of it citizens.
Negative Political Impect

➢ Globalization results in an erosion of state capacity.
➢ The entry and the increased role of Multi National Companies (MNCs) is all over the world leads to
reduction in the capacity of government to take decision on their own.
➢ In place of the welfare state it is the market that becomes the prime determinant of economic and
social priorities.
ECONOMIC CONSEQUENCES
➢ Economic globalization involves greater economic flows among different countries of the world.
➢ It draws attention towards the role of IMF and WTO for the whole world.
➢ It has created an intense division of opinion all over the world.
➢ Suupporters of economic globalization argue that it generates greater economic growth and well-
being for larger sections of the population.
CULTURAL CONSEQUENCES
Negative Cultural effect
➢ Threat to cultures in the world.
➢ Dominant of western culture.
➢ Less powerful society.
➢ Emerge and enlarge modified culture.
➢ cultural HOMOGENISATION
➢ HETEROGENISATION.
INDIA AND GLOBALISATION

➢ Globalization has occurred in earlier periods in history in different parts of the world.
➢ Flows related to the movement of capital, commodities, ideas and people go back several centuries
in Indian history.
➢ India became an exporter of primary goods, raw materials and a consumer goods.
➢ In 1991, for achieving high economic growth India started a programme of economic reforms.
RESISTANCE TO GLOBALISATION
➢ Critics of globalization make a variety of arguments.
➢ A particular phase of global capitalism that makes the rich- richer and the poor -poorer.
➢ Critics of globalization fear the weakening of the state.
➢ Economically they want a return to self- reliance and protectionism.
➢ Culturally, they are worried that traditional culture will be harmed and people will lose their age-
old values and ways.
➢ Anti-globalization movements too participate in global networks.
➢ In 1999, at the World Trade organisation (WTO), ministrial meeting were against unfair trading
practices by the economically powerful States.
➢ It was argued that the interests of the developing world were not given sufficient importance.
➢ The world social forum is another global platform, which brings together a wide coalition of peoples.
➢ The First Word Social Forum meeting was organized in Porto Algere, Brazil in 2001.
➢ Fourth WSF meeting was held in Mumbai in India, 2004.
INDIA RESISTANCE TO GLOBALISATION

➢ Resistance to globalization in India has come from different quarters.
➢ Protest the economic liberalization through Indian Social Forum.
➢ Trade Union of Industrial representing farmers protest against the entry of Multinationals.
➢ The patenting of certain plants like NEEM by USA and European firms.
1 marks
1. Which of the following is not a benefit of globalisation?
(a) It generates unemployment in the society.
(b) It provides the exchange of ideas, capital, commodities and people from one place to another.
(c) It provides job opportunities for the youth.
(d) It interconnects the world.
2. Globalisation is a multidimensional concept having manifestations like

(a) Political
(b) Cultural
(c) Economic
(d) all of these
3. ………….... Signifies the relaxation of government rules and regulations relating to activities in
services and industrial sectors.
(a) Globalisation
(b) liberalisation
(c) Privatization
(d) None of these
4. Which of these statements about globalisation is incorrect?
(a) Globalization is increased the state activities in the economic sphere only.
(b) Economic globalisation has created an intense division of opinion all over the world.
(c) Globalisation has led to the flow of ideas across National boundaries.
(d) Greater trade among countries allows each economic do what it does best.
5. Globalisation leads to each culture becoming........

(a) More different
(b) More transparent
(c) More distinctive
(d) More different and distinct
6. India adopted the new economic policy in…….

(a) 1992
(b) 1993
(c) 1981
(d) 1991
7. Which one of the following organisations is believed to have played a greater role in globalisation?
(a) WTO
(b) UNICEF
(c) WHO
(d) UNESCO
8. Select the correct option what is the full form of WSF?

(a) World security Federation
(b) World social forum
(c) World society for forum
(d) World social Federation
9. AAsserssion : Globalisation need not always be positive, it can have negative consequences for the
people.
Reason : Globalisation is a multidimentional concept. It has political, economic and cultural
manifestation.
(a) A and R are true, R is the correct explanation of the A
(b) A and R are true, R is not correct explanation of the A
(c) A is True but R is false
(d) A is false but R is true
10. Which of the following is the demerit of Globalisation?

(a) Common Market.
(b) It fails to generat sufficient employment.
(c) Large Technological Advance
(d) Improve communication
11. Choose the correct option that has significantly contributed to the process of ‘globalisation'.
(a) Fear of war
(b) Security threats
(c) Advancement of technology
(d) Achievements of the united nations
12. Globalization is a………………. Concept

(a) Multidimensional concept
(b) Singal concept
(c) Double concept
(d) None of the above
13. Globalisation deals with the flow of…….
(a) Ideas
(b) Capital
(c) Commodities
(d) All of these
14. Asserssion : What is often called economic globalization usually involvs greater economic flows
among different countries of the world.
Reason : Economic Globalisation involves many actors other than the International institutions.
(a) A and R are true, R is the correct explanation of the A
(b) A and R are true, R is not correct explanation of the A
(c) A is True but R is false
(d) A is false but R is true.
PART - B
CHALLENGES OF NATION BUILDING
INTRODUCTION
➢ After independence, India faced many challenges.
➢ National unity and territorial integrity of India was one of the big challenges.
➢ After Independence India was facing large scale violence and displacement.
➢ The integration of the princely states into the Indian union needed urgent resolution.
NATION AND NATION BUILDING

➢ On 14 - 15 August 1947 India got independence.
➢ Jawaharlal Nehru became the first PM of India.
➢ The famous “Tryst with destiny" speech given by Jawaharlal Nehru.
➢ India had two goals-
To run India through democratic government.
Government run for good of all.
CHALLENGES FOR THE NEW NATION

➢ The year 1947 was a year of precedent violence and displacement.
THREE CHALLENGES
➢ The first challenge was to shape nation.
➢ The second challenge was to establish democracy and develop democratic practices according to
the constitution.
➢ The third challenge was to ensure the economic development and wellbeing of the entire society.
PARTITION: DISPLACEMENT AND REHABILITATION

➢ On 14 -15 August 1947, ‘Two Nation Theory’ came into existence that is India and Pakistan.
➢ The result of partition was Two Nation Theory which was given by Mohammad Ali Zinnah.
➢ 'Two nation theory' proposed by the Muslim league, India consisted two community, Hindus and
Muslims not one.
➢ Congress opposed Two Nation Theory.
PROCESS OF PARTITION.
➢ Partition of India was the result of creation of India and Pakistan.
➢ Pakistan will comprise East Pakistan and West Pakistan.
➢ There was no single belt of Muslim majority areas in British India.
➢ One belt was in the east and the other in west and both these parts could not be joined.
➢ All Muslim majority area did not want to be a part of Pakistan.
➢ Abdul Gaffar Khan was known as Frontier Gandhi opposed the two-nation theory.
➢ The major problem of India was the issue of' Minorities on both sides of the border.
➢ Lakhs of Hindu and Sikhs on both sides of the border became the easy targets of attacks.
➢ The minorities on both sides of the border were left with no option except to leave their homes.
CHALLENGE OF REFUGEE RESETTLEMENT

➢ The year 1947 was the witness of most abrupt, unplanned and tragic transfer of population from
both side of the border.
➢ There were killings and atrocities.
➢ Women were abducted in forced into convert to the religion of the abductor and forced into
marriage.
CONSEQUENCES OF PARTITION
➢ Many women were killed by their own family members to preserve the" family honour".
➢ The employees of the Government and the railways were also divided.
➢ Approximately 80 lakh people were forced to migrate across the new border.
➢ Amritsar, Lahore and Kolkata became divided into communal zones.
➢ Minorities on both sides of the border left their home and secured temporary shelter in 'refugee
camps’.
➢ Writers, poets and film- makers in India and Pakistan have expressed the ruthlessness of the
killings, displacement and the violence in their novels, short- stories, poems and films.
MAHATMA GANDHI
➢ Mahatma Gandhi was sad by the communal violence and because of Ahinsa and Satyagraha that he
had lived and worked for, had failed.
➢ In many states, the communal tensions grew and Mahatma Gandhi resorted to fast to bring peace.
INTEGRATION OF PRINCELY STATES

➢ BRITISH INDIAN PROVINCES - directly under control of the British government.
➢ PRINCELY STATES - States ruled by princess.
➢ Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel and VP Menon played major role in integration of princely states.
➢ Few of the states declared their desire to remain free -
➢ MANIPUR
➢ BHOPAL
➢ TRAVANCORE
➢ HYDERABAD
➢ KASHMIR
➢ British government said to princely states that if they wanted to merge either in India or in
Pakistan or to remain free they would legally free to do so.
➢ First of all, the ruler of Travancore announced for the independence.
➢ Nizam of Hyderabad made a similar announcement on the next day.
ROLE OF SARDAR VALLABHBHAI PATEL AND INTEGRATION OF STATES

➢ Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel was the first deputy prime minister and home minister of India.
➢ Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel, emerged as a major leader.
➢ The problem of integration of Princely States was a big challenge.
➢ Sardar Patel completed the difficult work of Uniting all princely states of India.
➢ He was known as an ' Iron Man 'of India.
➢ In British India there were 565 Princely States.
➢ He did not want to compromise with the territorial integrity of India.
➢ Sardar Patel played a major role in integration of Princely States.
➢ Hyderabad, Junagarh and Kashmir integration were very much challenging.
➢ Raja Hari Singh was a ruler of Kashmir.
➢ By Sincere efforts of Patel, Hyderabad and Junagadh was merged with India.
➢ The ruler of the most states signed a document called the ‘Instrument of Accession’.
HYDERABAD
➢ Hyderabad, the largest of The Princely States was surrounded by Indian Territory.
➢ Its ruler carried the title, “Nizam” and he was one of the world's richest men.
➢ He signed the Stand Still agreement with India in November 1947.
➢ People of Hyderabad state against the Nizam's rule gathered force.
➢ In the Telangana region people was against the oppressive rule of Nizam.
➢ Para Military Force of Nizam is known as RAZAKARS.
➢ To handle the situation in Hyderabad, the government had to order the army.
➢ In September 1948, Indian army moved in to control the Nizam's forces and Nizam surrendered.
➢ This led to Hyderabad accession to India.
MANIPUR
➢ The Maharaja of Manipur was, Bodh Chandra Singh he signed the ‘Instrument of Accession’ with
the Indian government.
➢ The Maharaja held elections in Manipur in June 1948.
➢ Manipur was the first part of India to hold an election based on "Universal Adult Franchise".
➢ The Government of India succeeded into signing a merger agreement in September 1949.
RE-ORGANISATION OF STATE
➢ Nagpur Session of Congress was held in 1920.
➢ Protest began in Telugu speaking areas of Madras Province.
➢ The Madras province which was included present day, Tamilnadu, Andhra Pradesh, Kerala and
Karnataka.
➢ Potti Sriramulu, a Congress leader went on an indefinite fast and led the movement which is
knonwn as ‘Vishal Andhra Movement’. This caused great violence in Andhra region.
➢ During this movement many people were injured or lost their lives in police firing.
➢ In December 1952 the Prime Minister (Pt. Jawahar Lal Nehru) announced for the separate Andhra
state.
➢ Re-organisation commission was formed in 1953 to look into the redrawing of the boundaries
of States.
➢ The state Reorganization act was passed in 1956, which led to the creation of 14 States and 6
Union Territories.
CREATION OF NEW STATES

➢ Andhra Pradesh was the first state which was created on the basis of Language in 1953.
➢ There was Bilangual Bombay State consisting of Guajarati and Marathi Speaking People.
Maharashtra and Gujarat were created in 1960 from Bombay.
➢ In Punjab there were two linguistic groups – Hindi Speaking and Punjabi speaking. Haryana and
Himachal Pradesh were created from Punjab in 1966.
➢ Major reorganization of states took place in the North-East 1972 ------------- Meghalaya, Manipur,
Tripura
1963 ------------- Nagaland
1987 ------------ Arunachal Pradesh, Mizoram
➢ Three States Chhattisgarh, Uttarakhand and Jharkhand were created in 2000.
➢ Telangana state was created in 2 June 2014.
CONCLUSION
➢ The linguistic States is the principle of diversity.
➢ Democracy was related with plurality of ideas and ways of life.
➢ Much of the politics in the latter period was to take place within this framework.
1 Marks
1. The ‘Two-Nation theory was based upon:
a. Expansion of India
b. Bifurcation of the states
c. Partition of India
d. All of these
2. The [undisputed] leader of north western province was known as –
a. Father of Pakistan
b. Frontier Gandhi’
c. Patriot of Pakistan
d. Staunch Muslim
3. Which of these statements about the princely states is incorrect?
a. The British crown over princely states would laps.
b. There were 565 princely states.
c. The Indian government was ready to give autonomy to some regions.
d. The ruler of Junagadh had decided on independence.
4. How were the boundaries of the states decide?
a. On the basis of area
b. On the basis of locality
c. On the basis of linguistic principles
d. On the basis of population
5. The Indian government approach was __________
i. The people of the princely states become part of the Indian union.
ii. The government was flexible in given autonomy to some states.
a. i is correct
b. ii is correct
c. i, ii both are correct
d. i, ii both are incorrect
6. which of these statements about the reorganization of states is correct?
i. The central leadership decided to postpone the basis of language matter
ii. The boundaries had to be drawn in only cultural plurality.
a. i, ii both are correct
b. Only i is correct
c. Only ii is correct
d. None of the above
7. Arrange the following is chronological order
i. Nagaland ii. Mizoram iii. Manipur iv. Jharkhand
a. ii, i, iv, iii
b. i, iii, ii, iv
c. iv, iii, ii, i
d. Iii, i, ii, iv
8. Arrange the following in chronological order
i. Nagpur session ii. Nehru’s speech iii. Reorganization of north-east iv. Election held
in Manipur
a. i, ii, iii, iv
b. i, ii, iv,iii
c. ii, i, iv,iii
d. iv, ii, i, iii
9. Name the original state from which Uttarakhand was carved out
a. Bihar
b. Madhya Pradesh
c. Uttar Pradesh
d. Rajasthan
10. “tryst with Destiny” was a speech delivered by –
a. Sardar Vallabh bhai Patel
b. M.h. ali zinah
c. Pt. Nehru
d. Mahatma Gandhi
11. Mountbatten plan was known as –
a. British partition plan
b. India’s partition plan
c. Pakistan partition plan
d. Constitution making plan
12. The first and the immediate challenge was _________
a. To shape a nation
b. Establish democracy
c. Ensure the development
d. Make many political parties
13. Assertion; - The nizam of Hyderabad never negotiated with sardar Patel
Reason: - The nizam wanted an independent status for Hyderabad.
14. Assertion – the principle of religious majorities for the partition it was decided.
Reason – the process of partition was smooth and none of the violence took place.
15. Assertion – khan Abdul ghaffir khan were not convinced by the two-nation theory
Reason – he wanted a single united India as a home or both Hindu and Muslims.
2 marks question
1. What is meant by two nation’ theory?
Ans – the two-nation theory was based on the hypothesis that India should be divided into two
Pakistan and Hindustan, the Muslim nation to occupy Pakistan and the Hindu nation occupy
Hindustan.
2. Mention the main recommendation of the state reorganization commission of 1953.
Ans – the main recommendation that demands for separate states would endanger the unity of the
country.
3. Why Muslim league was formed?
Ans – the Muslim league was formed to protect the interests of the Muslims in colonial India.
4. There was no way these two parts could be joined’ what is meant to be this sentence.
Ans – this sentence means, there were two areas of concentration, one in the west and one in the
east.
5. Which goals there were everyone agreed.
Ans – there were two goals that everyone agreed:
i. Running the country through a democratic government
ii. The good of all particularly the poor and the socially disadvantaged groups.
6. What challenges dis India faced after independence/
Ans – independent India faced three kinds of challenges:
Two shape a nation, establish democracy and to ensure the development and well being of the
entire society.
7. What difficulties did India face in the process of partition?
Ans – the problem was that no single belt of Muslims majority areas in British India.
All Muslims majority areas no to be want Pakistan.
8. Who was the razakars?
Ans – a para-military force of the nizam known as razakars.
9. What was the stand of Indian government on partition?
Ans – Indian government veiled in communal harmony and equality of religion for all it found in
the constitution of India where declared a secular nation and the fundamental right of ‘right to
relations was given to all citizens of India.
10. Why is sardar Patel called an iron man?
Ans – sardar Patel played a pivotal role in negotiating firmly but politely with the rulers of princely
states and bringing the majority of them into the Indian union.
4 marks
Passage based question
1. The first duty prime minister and home minister of India, sardar Patel emerged as a major leader of the
freedom movement after the Kheda satyagraha (1918) and the bardoli satyagraha (1928). At the time
of independence, the problem of integration of princely states was s big challenge for the national unity
and integrity of India. He was not in favour of any compromise with the territorial integrity of India. By
his political experience, diplomatic prowess and foresightedness, out of India 565 princely states many
had already given their consent to merge with India even before achieving the independence.
i. Who was the first deputy prime minister of India?
a. Pt. Jawahar lal Nehru
b. Sardar Patel
c. C Rajagopalachari
d. Mah. Ali zinah
ii. Which of the following satyagrah was related to sardar Vallabh bhai patel?
a. Kheda satyagrah
b. Bardoli satyagraha
c. Both a and b
iii. At that time of independence, what is the number of princely states in India?
a. 250
b. 500
c. 550
d. 565
iv. Which of the following personality is also known as iron man of India
a. Dr. Rajendra prasad
b. Pt. Jawaharlal Nehru
c. Sardar patel
d. Subhash Chandra boss
2. The partition was not merely a division of properties. Liabilities and assets or a political division of
the country and the administrative apparatus. What also got divided were the financial assets. And
things like tables, chairs, thwarters, paper clips books and also musical instruments of the notice
band. It was a violent separation of communities who had hitherto live together as neighbours.
Partition forced about 80 lakh people migrate across the new border.
i. What was the number of the people who had to forcefully migrate across new borders?
a. 83 lakhs
b. 81 lakhs
c. 80.5 lakh
d. 80 lakhs
ii. Who did not believe in ‘two nation theory’
a. People of Pakistan
b. Muslim league
c. The leaders of Indian national struggle
iii. What was the percentage of Muslim population in India in 1951?
a. 13 percent
b. 12 percent
c. 20 percent
d. 14 percent
iv. The partition was based on
a. Religious
b. Linguistic
c. Only a
d. Only b
3. The linguistic states underlined the acceptance of the principle of diversity. When we say that
india adopted democracy, it does not simply mean that india embraced a democratic
constitution. Nor does it merely mean that india adopted the format of elections the coise was
larger than that. It was a choice in favour of recognizing and accepting the existence of
differences which could at times be oppositional. Democracy in other words was associated
with plurality of ideas and ways of life.
i. Which of the following are the forms of diversity in the cultural life of people of india?
a. Linguistic diversity
b. Caste diversity
c. Race diversity
d. Bodh a and b
ii. Which of the following examples show that democracy in india is associated with
plurality of ideas and acceptance of differences?
a. Religious tolerance and language adoption
b. Political instability
c. Separatist movements
d. Protests and mass movements
iii. India adopted
a. Democracy
b. Monarchy
c. Nobility
d. Dictatorship
iv. Which of the following facts is incorrect about Indian democracy?
a. General legal framework and constitutional government
b. Free and fair elections
c. Rule of law
d. All of these
4. Observe the picture given below carefully and answer the following questions –
i. What does this picture depict?
a. A train full of refugees
b. Transfer of population
c. Enjoy the journey
d. Both a and b
ii. What were the consequences of the partition?
a. Communal riots
b. Massacres
c. Division of communities
d. All of these
iii. Which year is being denoted in the picture?
a. 1948
b. 1947
c. 1957
d. 1945
iv. Which cities were divided into communal zones?
a. Lahore, Amritsar, Kolkata
b. Rajasthan, Madhya Pradesh
c. Jharkhand, Chhattisgarh
1. Describe briefly any four problems faced in the process of partition of India?
Ans – there was no single belt of Muslim majority areas in British India
Not all Muslim majority areas wanted to be in Pakistan
Two Muslim majority provinces Punjab and Bengal had very large areas where the non-Muslims
were in majority. They were divided on the basis of religious majority their partition caused the
deepest trauma of Pakistan.
The problem of ‘minorities’ on both side
2. Describe how the princely states of Hyderabad acceded to India?

Ans – Hyderabad was the largest princely states surrounded entirely by Indian territory.
Its ruler carried the title, nizam, he wanted an independent status for Hyderabad.
Nizam entered into standstill agreement with India in Nov. 1947 for a year.
In the meantime, a movement of the people against the nizam’s rule. The peasantry in the
Telangana region in particular was the victim.
The nizam sent a paramilitary force called the razakars against the people. Razakars were
atrocities and communal nature.
In September 1948, the central government moved an army to control the situation and nizam’s
force.
These operations were known as ‘operation polo’
The nizam surrendered and the Hyderabad accession to India.
3. Describe how the princely states of Manipur acceded to India?

Ans – after the independence, the maharaja of Manipur, Bodha Chandra Singh, signed the
instrument of accession with the Indian government on the assurance that the internal autonomy
of Manipur would be maintained.
The pressure of public opinion. The maharaja held election in Manipur in June 1948.
The legislative assembly of Manipur did not want to merge with India but the state congress
wanted the merge.
The government of India pressured the Manipur maharaja and succeeded do so.
Maharaj signing agreement in Sept. 1949 without consulting legislative assembly.
4. Explain the role played by sardar Patel in the unification of princely state India.
Ans – sardar Patel played a historic role in negotiating with the rulers but diplomatically and
bringing most of them into the Indian union
He got document of accession signed from the princely states.
He used force and persuasion with the stats of Hyderabad, Junagarh, Manipur and Kashmir for
their merger.
5. What problems were involved in the integration of princely states during nation building?
Ans –
i. British announced to lapse of British paramountcy over princely states with the end of their rule
over India.
ii. British government took the view that all these states were free to join either India or Pakistan
or remain independent.
iii. Ruler of Travancore declared that states an independent
iv. the nizam of Hyderabad and the nawab of Bhopal were similar announcement.
There was a very real possibility that India would get further divided into a number of small
countries.
6 marks
1. “The accommodation of regional demands and the formation of linguistic states were also seen as
more democratic” justify the statement.
Ans – the state reorganization commission was set up in 1953.
The commission accepted that the boundaries of the states should reflect the boundaries of
different languages. On the basis of report the state reorganisation act was passed in 1956.
This led to the creation of 14 seats and 6 union territories.
In the early phase it was left that linguistic states may faster separatism and create pressures on
the newly founded nation.
But India made a favour linguistic states and hoped that if we accept the regional and linguistic
claims of all regions the threat of division and separatism would be reduced.
The accommodation of regional demands and formation of linguistic states were seen democratic.
Linguistic states and the movements for the formation of states changes the nature of democratic
politics and leadership
2. India was born in very difficult circumstances. In this situation independent India stated on its
journey to achieve several objectives. Explain it.
Ans – in 1947 freedom came with the partition, unprecedented violence and trauma of
displacement in this situation India faced multiple challenges they were –
i. To shape a nation:
India was land of continental size and diversity. Its people spoke different languages,
culture and religions.
It was the imme3diate challenge to shape a nation that, united an accommodative of the
diversity.
ii. Establish democracy: \
India adopted representative democracy based on the parliamentary form of government.
A democratic constitution is necessary but not sufficient for establishing a democracy. The
challenge was to develop; democratic practices in accordance with the constitution.
iii. Development and wellbeing of society:
The challenge was to bring development and wellbeing of the whole society. Our
constitution has granted equality and protection to socially deprived sections directive
principles of state policy is also provided for the development of society. Although the real
challenge is to develop effective policies for economic development and eradication of
poverty.
3. How did the reorganization of states take place in India after its independence? Explain.
Ans – after partition the challenge was to draw the internal boundaries of the Indian states.
The boundaries had to be drawn in away so that the linguistic and cultural plurality of the country
could be affected without affecting g the nitty of the nation.
In the Nagpur session of the congress in 1920 the states would be reorganized on the basis of
language such a decision was taken carving out sates on the basis of language might lead to
disruption and disintegrational and would draw attention away from other social and economic
challenges that the country faced.
The central leadership decided to postpone matters this decision challenged by the local leaders
and people and later this challenge turned into a great movement.
These struggles forced the central government into appointing a state reorganization commission
in 1953 to look redrawing of the boundaries of states.
The commission accepted that the boundaries of the state should reflect the boundaries of
different language.
This led to the creation of 14 states and 6 union territories.
Gujrat was formed out by Bombay, Haryana and Himachal Pradesh was formed by Punjab and
another sate w3as formed after 1956.
4. Discuss Nehru’s approach towards nation building.

Ans – Jawahar Lal Nehru took a firm stance against the possible division of India into smaller
principalities.
He established the state reorganization committee in 1953 to fulfil regional aspirations of the
people which would lower the chances to separate from the nation.
This way Nehru strengthened the unity his government was flexible to give autonomy to some
region for accommodating diversity.
Dur to peaceful negotiation almost all states were bought into the Indian union through signing a a
document called instrument of accession under his approach. Accession of princely states of
Junagarh, Hyderabad, Kashmir and Manipur proved to be more difficult than the rest.
It was mainly due to Jawahar lal Nehru’s efforts that India emerged as a secular state in the mid-
twentieth century.
Much before independence he played a heroic role in the development of a secular basis for Indian
polity. This helped in building the narrative of unity in diversity thus, Nehru carried the tradition
of the national movement and care of the growth and development of newly born nation. India
5. Explain any six consequences of the partition of India in 1947.

Ans – consequences of partition of India in 1947 –
i. The year 1947 was the year of one of the largest, most abrupt, unplanned and tragic
transfer of population that human hi8stroy has known.
ii. There were killing and atrocities on both sides of the border in the name of religion. People
of one community ruthlessly killed and maimed people of the other community.
iii. Thousands of women were abducted on both sides of the border. They were made to
convert to the religion of the abductor and were forced in to marriage.
iv. People were forced to abandon their homes and move across the border. Some princely
states resisted merger with union of India.
v. All the writers and poets in various fields expressed their grief and anger.
vi. Minorites on both sides of border fled from their homes secured temporary shelter in
refugee camp.
Map 4 marks
In the political outline of India given below four state have been marked as A, B, C, D. identify these states
on the basis of the information given below and write their correct names in your answer book.
Along with their respective serial number of the information used the concerned alphabets given in the
map.
i. The state associated with the iron men of India
ii. State to which the nizam belonged.
iii. The state which article 370 was withdrawn.
iv. The state who was the first part of India to hold and election based on universal adult
franchise.
Sr. no. of the information Alphabet concerned Name of the state
used
I
Ii
Iii
iv
PLANNED DEVELOPMENT
INTRODUCTION
➢ At the time of independence, leaders had two models of modern development First-Liberal-
Capitalist and Socialist model.
➢ India adopted Mixed Economic Model (Socialist as well as Capitalist) of development.
IDEAS OF DEVELOPMENT
➢ Prominent development models of the period were the liberal capitalist system and the socialist
system.
➢ A large section of the people and leaders of Indian society were supporters of the socialist model.
➢ India adopted a mixed economy.
➢ Development means the process of living standard and attaining an economic level of industrial
production.
➢ After independence, the Indian government took up the task of removing poverty, social and
economic redistribution and development of agriculture.
➢ Planning is a systematic regulation of purpose to achieve the national goals.
➢ A certain section of big industrialists got together in 1944 and drafted a joint proposal for setting
up a planned economy. This was called the Bombay plan.
➢ The planning commission of India was set up in 15 March 1950.
➢ Planning commission established as an extra constitutional body with the Prime minister as its
chairman.
PLANNING
➢ For development of a Nation planning was designed.
➢ After Independence there was a need of planning for rebuilding economy and for this involvement
of Government was also needed.
➢ Planning was needed for the proper distribution of resources
MAJOR AIMS OF INDIA’S ECONOMIC PLANNING

➢ ECONOMIC GROWTH
➢ INCREASE THE LEVEL OF NATIONAL INCOME
➢ IMPROVE THE AREAS LIKE AGRICULTURE AND INDUSTRY ETC.
➢ POVERTY ELLEVIATION
➢ IMPROVED JOB OPPORTUNITIES
➢ PROTECT ENVIRONMENT
THE EARLY INITIATIVES

➢ The planning commission of India adopted 5-year plans from the Model of USSR.
➢ The Budget of the central and all state governments was divided into two parts - planned and Non-
Planed.
➢ Planed – That is spent on five-year basis as per the priorities fixed by the plan.
➢ Non-Plan – That is spent on routine items on yearly basis.
FIVE YEAR PLANS IN INDIA
PLAN YEAR
First (1951-56)
Second (1956-61)
Third (1961-66)
THREE ANNUAL PLANS (1966-69)
Fourth (1969-74)
Fifth (1974-78)
PLAN HOLIDAY (1978-80)
Sixth (1980-85)
Seventh (1985-90)
PLAN HOLIDAY ((1990-92)
Eighth (1992-97)
Ninth (1997-2002)
Tenth (2002-2007)
Eleventh (2007- 2012)
Twelve (2012-2017)
The first five- year plan

Agriculture sector
➢ The first five- year plan, 1951- 56 adopted to take the country’s economy out of poverty.
➢ Mr K.N. Raj played important role in India's planned redevelopment. He drafted the first five a plan.
➢ The focus of First Five Year Plan was on Agriculture.
➢ Jawaharlal Nehru, the first prime minister of India, presented the first five-year plan in the
parliament of India.
➢ The First Five Year plan mainly focused on Agriculture Sector including Investment in Dams and
Irrigation.
The second five-year plan

➢ Rapid-Industrialization
➢ The second five-year plan, 1956-61, was drafted by a team of economists and planners under the
leadership of P.C. Mahala Nobis.
➢ It emphasized on heavy industrialization in the urban as well as rural areas.
THE KEY CONTROVERSIES
➢ There are two controversial issues that was a result of strategies of development:
1. Agriculture versus industry
2. Public versus private sector.
Agriculture versus industry.

➢ Alternative Blue Print was given by J.C. Kuma Rappa.
➢ Objective of Alternative Blue Print was emphasis on Rural Industrialization.
➢ Chaudhary Charan Singh form a party Bhartiya Lok Dal.
➢ Chaudhary Charan Singh articulated keeping Agriculture at the centre of planning for India.
Supporters of agricultural sector argued that

1. Negligence towards agriculture sector may affect the livelihood and lives of many people.
2. Stable agriculture sector is essential to ensure food security.
Supporters of industry
➢ Industrialization is essential for rapid economic development of the country.
➢ Proper industrial development is helpful to remove rural poverty.
➢ Industrialization generate more employment opportunities in urban and rural areas.
➢ industrialisation helps India to earn more foreign exchange.
➢ Industrial production was essential for eradication of poverty in rural and urban areas.
PUBLIC VERSUS PRIVATE SECTOR

➢ Indian economy is described as mixed economy.
➢ Public sector organised by the government and the private sector controlled by business men.
Supporters of private sector complaints
➢ Supporters of private sector complained that not enough space for private sector in India.
➢ The powerful public sector creates hurdles by installing License system (Difficulty to get licenses
and permits by corrupt government officials) and approval by Government for investment in
Private Sector.
➢ Inefficiency and corruption were the main demerits of public sector.
➢ State is inactive in public education and healthcare.
MAJOR OUTCOMES
➢ Land reforms did not implement effectively in most parts of the country.
➢ Major steps were not taken properly in direction of achieving equal development.
➢ Political Power remaining in the hand of land-owning classes.
FOUNDATIONS
➢ During this period, the foundation of India’s future economic growth was laid down.
➢ During this time some of the largest development Projects in India’s history were undertaken, like
Bhakra Nangal Dam, Hirakund Dam for irrigation and power generation.
➢ Heavy industries in the public sector like a steel plants, oil refineries, manufacturing units, defence
production etc. started in this period.
LAND REFORMS
➢ Abolition of the colonial system of Zamindari.
➢ Reduce the capacity of landlords to dominate in politics.
➢ Consolidation of land started (bringing small piece of land together in a one place) so that the farm
size become large for agriculture.
FOOD CRISIS
➢ The agriculture situations went from bad to worse in the 1960s.
➢ Already in 1940 and 1950s, the rate of growth of food grain production was barely staying above
the rate of population growth.
➢ Severe droughts occurred in several parts of the country.
➢ The two component of land reforms which make these reforms lack successful – A- How much
agriculture land one person could own. (B-) The tenants who works on someone else’s land were
given greater legal security against eviction. Result – But these provisions were rarely
implemented.
THE GREEN REVOLUTION (Major focus was on wheat and Rice)

For ensuring food security
➢ High yielding variety of seeds were used for more production.
➢ It was decided by the government to put more resources into those areas which already had
irrigation and those farmers who were already well off.
➢ The government offered HYV seeds, Fertilizers, pesticides and better irrigation and highly
subsidized prices.
➢ The government also gave a guarantee to buy the product of farmers at a given price.
Negative
➢ The rich peasant and the landholders were the major benefices of the Green Revolution.
➢ Moderate agriculture growth in Wheat production and raised the availability of the food in the
country but increased polarization between classes and the regions.
➢ Some regions like Punjab Haryana and Western UP become agriculturally prosperous but other
remained backward.
➢ In many parts there was stark contrast between the poor peasantry and landlord.
Positive:
➢ The green revolution resulted in the rise of the middle peasant sections.
➢ The landlords produced conditions favourable for left-wing organization the poor peasants.
THE WHITE REVOLUTION
➢ The White Revolution was started by Varghese Kurian (Milkman of India) in Anand (Gujarat).
➢ Amul products lies a successful history of cooperative dairy farming in India.
➢ Operation Flood was started in 1970 is known as White Revolution.
LETTER DEVELOPMENT
➢ The development in India took a significant turn from the end of the 1960.
➢ Indira Gandhi decided to strengthen the role of state in controlling and directing the economy she
imposed many new restrictions on private industries from 1967 onwards.
➢ 14 private banks were nationalized. The government announced many Pro- poor programmes.
NITI AAYOG (NATIONAL INSTITUTION FOR TRANSFORMING INDIA)

➢ The Government of India replaced the planning commission with a new institution name the NITI
AAYOG.
➢ This came into existence on 1st January 2015.
➢ On 15th August 2014, Prime Minister Narendra Modi talk about the abolition of the planning
commission.
➢ NITI Aayog was constituted in place of planning commission on first January, 2015.
Objective of NITI AAYOG

➢ Providing the necessary and technical advice to the union government regarding policy making at
the central and the state levels.
➢ To foster cooperative federalism.
➢ To develop mechanisms to formulate credible plans at the village level.
➢ To design strategic and long -term policy and program.
➢ The Prime Minister of India is the Ex-Officio of NITI AAYOG and he appoints the Vice-Chairperson
of Niti Aayog.
➢ The first Vice-Chairperson of NITI Aayog was Arvind Panigarola.
➢ At present Shri Suman Bery is vice chairperson of NITI AAYOG.
➢ Niti Aayog acts as a Think-Tank of the Union Government.
➢ The Niti Aayog acts by adopting a ' Bottom- up Approach’,
➢ In the spirit of co-operative federalism as it ensures equal participation of all states in the country.
NATIONAL DEVELOPMENT COUNCIL

➢ The National development council is Apex body for decision making and deliberations on
development matters in India, presided over by the Prime Minister.
➢ It was set -up on 6 August,1952 to strengthen and mobilize the effort and resources of the nation in
support of the five-year plans made by the Planning Commission.
➢ It promotes common economic policies in all vital spheres and ensures balanced and rapid
development of all parts of the country.
➢ The council comprises of the Prime Minister, the Union Cabinet Ministers, chief ministers of all
states and their substitutes, representatives of the Union Territories and members of Niti Aayog.
MCQ
Q.1. Which of these statements about the Bombay Plan is incorrect?
(a) It was a blueprint for India’s economic future.
(b) It supported state ownership of industry.
(c) It was made by some leading industrialists.
(d) It supported strongly the idea of planning.
Q.2. Which of the following ideas did not form part of the early phase of India’s development policy?
(a) Planning
(b) Liberalisation
(c) Cooperative Farming
(d) Self-sufficiency
Q.3. The Idea of Planning in India was drawn from:
(a) The Bombay Plan
(b) Experiences of the Soviet bloc countries
(c) Gandhian Vision of Society
(d) Demand by Peasant Organisation
(I) b and d only
(II) d and e only
(III) a and b only
(IV) all the above
Q.4. Match the following.
(a) Charan Singh i) Industrialisation
(b) P.C. Mahala Nobis ii) Zoning
(c) Bihar Famine iii) Farmers
(d) Varghese Kurian iv) Milk Cooperatives
Ans. a) Charan Singh iii) Farmers
b) P.C. Mahala Nobis i) Industrialisation
c) Bihar Famine ii) Zoning
d) Varghese Kurian iv) Milk Cooperatives
Q.5. In India, planning was conceived as the main instrument of:
(a) Political development
(b) Cultural development
(c) Social development
(d) Socio-economic development
Q.6. The Planning Commission in India was set up in:
(a) 1953
(b) 1957
(c) 1960
(d) 1950
Q.7. The Chairman of the National Development Council is:
(a) President of India
(b) Finance Minister of India
(c) Prime Minister of India
(d) Chief Minister of U.P.
Q.8. Which are the two models of development?
(a) Capitalist and Gandhism
(b) Capitalist and Socialist
(c) Capitalist and Marxist
Q.9. Socialist model of development was related to
(a). Europe
(b) Pakistan
(c) USSR
(d). USA
Q.10. When was NITI Aayog established?

(a). January 2017
(b). January 2015
(c)January 2018
(d) January 2016
Q.11. In which year the First Five Year Plan was started?
a.1950
b.1952
c.1951
d.1953
Q.12. What is the name of the document that the government of India prepares that has a plan for all its
income and expenditure?
a. Statistical abstract
b. Census Report
c. Union Addresses
d. Budget
Q.13. Which sector received more attention in the first five-year plan?
(a) Agricultural
(b) Industry
(c) Milk
Q.14. Which sector received more attention in the Second five-year plan?
(a) Agricultural
(b) Industry
(c) Milk
Q.15.Green Revolution is related to.
(a) Milk Production
(b) Food Production
(c) Grass Production
VERY SHORT ANSWER
Q.16. What is meant by planned development?
Ans. Planned development means to develop a design or plan for development.
Q.17. From where the idea of planning in India was drawn.
Ans. In India, the idea of planning was drawn from the experiences of the Soviet bloc countries.
Q.18. What is the Five-year plan (FYP)?
Ans. FYP is a document that has plan for all its income and expenditure for the next five years.
Q.19. Mention the main objectives of the Second Five Year Plan.
Ans. The main objectives of the Second Five Year Plan were to enhance the growth of Industrial
development.
Q.20. What is meant of “White Revolution”
Ans. White Revolution related to increased milk production in country. The father of the White
Revolution was Varghese Kurian.
Q.21. What is the Decentralised Planning.?
Ans. Decentralized planning is a type of economic system in which decision-making is distributed
amongst various economic agents or localized within production agents.
SHORT QUESTION ANSWER

Q.22. What is the difference between Left and Right wing?
Left wing Right wing
Left wing refers government policies favour Right wing believes free competition and
to poor and downtrodden section of the market economy
society.
Government should interfere in the Government should not unnecessarily
economy intervene in the economy
Left party, Congress Bhartiya Janata party
Q.23. What was the major thrust of the First Five-year Plan? In which ways did the second plan differ
from the first one?
Ans. The First Five-year plan aimed at getting the country out of the cycle of poverty. Its thrust was on
agrarian sector including investment in dams because the agricultural sector was hit hardest by partition
and needed immediate attention.
The Second five-year plan differed from the first plan in the following ways:
The Second Five Year plan stressed on heavy industries in place of agriculture.
If the first five-year plan had preached patience, the second plan wanted to bring about quick
structural transformation by making changes simultaneously in all possible direction.
Q.24. Differentiate between the capitalist and socialist models of development.

Ans.
Capitalist Model Socialist Model
The capitalist model of development in The socialist model of development in which
which development was left entirely to the private property was abolished and all the
private sector in place of social welfare. The production was controlled by the state. It
Capitalist affords economic freedom, aims at the public sector, planning to
consumer choice, and economic growth establish an egalitarian society. The Socialist
model provides greater social welfare and
decreases business fluctuations.
Q.25. What were the key controversies regarding development in India?

Ans. The key controversies regarding development in India were, that the eve of Independence, India had
before it, two models of modern development: the liberal-capitalist model as in Europe and the US and
the socialist model as in the USSR. These two ideologies fuelled the ‘cold war’ between the two
superpowers. The nationalist leaders were clear that the economic concerns of the Government of free
India would have to be different from the narrowly defined commercial functions of the Colonial
Government. It was clear that the task of poverty alleviation and socio-economic redistribution was being
seen primarily as the responsibility of the Government. These differences could not be solved. Elements
from both these models were taken and mixed together in India.
Q.26. What are the objectives of planning?
Ans. The objectives of planning are:
(a) Economy Growth.
(b) Attaining economic self-reliance and self-generating through planned strategies.
(c) To activate distributive justice among various sectors of economy.
(d) Achieving full employment.
PASSAGE, MAP AND CARTOON BASED QUESTION

Q.27. On a political outline map of
India locate and label the following
and symbolise them as indicated.
1. The state prone to food crisis
during independence days.
2. The state adopted
Decentralisation.
3. The state where people protested
against POSCO plants.
4. The state where White Revolution
took place.
Ans. 1. Bihar
2. Kerala
3. Orissa
4. Gujarat
Q.28. Study the picture given below and answer the questions that follow:
Questions
1. What message does the cartoon convey?
2. Name the person who is making efforts to balance both the sectors.
3. How were both these sectors balanced?
Answer:
1. Cartoon is trying to make balance between the private and public sector to maintain the growth of an
economy adopted by India.
2. Pt. Jawahar Lai Nehru, the then Prime Minister of India.
3. Pt. Nehru made a balance between both the sectors by adopting the model of mixed economy to co-
exist the private and public sector.
Q.29. Read the passage given below carefully and answer the questions:
Decentralized Planning: It is not necessary that all planning always has to be centralised; nor is it
that planning is only about big industries and large projects. The ‘Kerala model’ is the name given
to the path of planning and development charted by the State of Kerala. There has been a focus
model on education, health, land reform, effective food distribution, and poverty alleviation.
Despite low per capita incomes,
and a relatively weak industrial base, Kerala achieved nearly total literacy, long life expectancy,
low infant and female mortality, low birth. rates and high access to medical care. Between 1987
and 1991, the government launched the New Democratic Initiative which involved campaigns for
development (including total literacy especially in science and environment) designed to involve
people directly in development activities through voluntary citizens’ organisations. The State has
also taken initiative to involve people in making plans at the Panchayat, block and district level.
Questions.
1. What is meant by Decentralisation?
Ans. Decentralisation shares the powers even among the states and its subordinate units to run the
administration in efficient manner i.e. at the Panchayats, blocs and district level.
2. Which state is the best example for this?

Ans Kerala which is known as ‘Kerala Model’ also
3. Which methods were used by state of Kerala for decentralisation?
Ans. 1. Campaigning for development especially in Science and environment.

2. To involve people in making plans at Panchayat, blocs and district level.
ESSAY TYPE QUESTIONS
Q.30. What was Green Revolution? Mention it’s any two positive and two negative consequences.
Answer: Green Revolution was introduced to bring about revolutionary changes in agriculture
especially in food gains like wheat and rice to increase food production through high yielding varieties of
seeds, fertilisers and scientific irrigation.
Positive Consequences:
(i). In many parts, the stark contrast between the poor peasantry and the landlords produced conditions
favourable for left wing organisations to organise the poor peasants.
(ii).It resulted in the rise of what is called the ‘Middle Peasant Sections’
who were farmers with medium size holdings who benefitted from the changes and soon emerged
politically influential in many parts of country.
Negative Consequences:
(i) This created a stark contrast between the poor peasantry and the landlords.
(ii) It delivered only a moderate agricultural growth i.e. a rise in rice and wheat production by raising
availability of food grains in country. On the other hand, it increased polarisation between the classes and
regions like Northern States i. e. Punjab, Haryana, West-U.P. became agriculturally rich but others
remained backward.
Q.31. Explain the main arguments in the debate that ensued between industrialisation and
agricultural development at the time of second five-year plan.
Answer: At the time of second five-year plan, some controversial issues rose in reference of relevancy of
agriculture over industry:
1. Second five-year plan emphasised on industry in place of agriculture or rural India.
2. J.C. Kumarappa, a Gandhian Economist proposed an alternative blueprint to emphasise on rural
industrialisation.
3. Bhartiya Lok Dal leader, Chaudhary Charan Singh also commented that the planning was leading to
creation of prosperity in Urban and industrial sections at the cost of rural welfare.
Others debated that without an increase in industrial sector poverty could not be alleviated:
1. India planning did not have agrarian strategy to boost the production of food grains.
2. It also proposed programme of community development and spent large sums on irrigation projects
and failure was not that of policy but of its non-implementation because of the politics of land-owning
classes.
3. Besides they also argued that even if the government had spent more money on agriculture, it would
not have solved the massive problems of rural poverty.
Q.32. Describe any three outcomes of early initiatives for planned development in India.
Ans. After independence, India adopted economic planning for the development of the people of India. In
fact, there was a consensus on the planned development.
For planned development, Planning Commission was set up in March 1950 by a simple resolution of the
Government of India. The Planning Commission opted for Five Year Plans. The First Five Year Plan was
started in 1951 with the main emphasis on agriculture including investment in Dam and irrigations. The
Second Five Year Plan (1956-1961) stressed mainly heavy industries. Rapid industrialization was the
main aim of the Second Five Year Plan. Following are the outcomes of planning in India:
1. Through planning the foundations of India is future economic growth were laid.
2. Some of the heavy industries were Started.
3. Planning enhances the economic growth of the country.
4. Land Reforms lake place through planning.
5. Through planning the growth of manufacturing was increasing.
6. India becomes self-sufficient in food.
INDIA’S FOREIGN POLICY

International context
➢ Many new countries were emerging as a result of the collapse of colonialism.

➢ New countries were trying to come to terms with the twin challenges of – Welfare and Democracy.
➢ Free India’s Foreign policy reflected all these concerns in the period immediately after
Independence.
➢ The British Government left behind the legacy of many International disputes – Partition Created,
Poverty Alleviation.
➢ India decided to conduct its Foreign Relations with an aim to respect the sovereignty of all other
nations and to achieve Security through the maintenance of Peace.
The Constitutional Principles

Art. 51 of the Indiana Constitution lays down some Directive Principles of State Policy on promotion of
International Peace and Security.
➢ Promote International Peace and Security
➢ Maintained just and honourable relations between nations.
➢ Foster respect for International Law and treaty obligations in the dealing of organized people with
one another.
➢ Encourage settlement of International disputes by arbitration.
The Police of non- alignment

➢ The Foreign Policy of the nation reflects the interplay of domestic and external factors.
➢ The noble ideals that inspired India’s struggled for freedom influenced the making of foreign policy.
➢ The period of the cold war was witness of political, economic and military confrontation at the
global level between the two blocs US and USSR.
Nehru’s role
➢ The first Prime-Minister played a role in setting the national agenda.
➢ He exercised in the formulation and implementation of India’s foreign policy from 1946 to 1964.
➢ The three major objective of the Nehru foreign policy were –
1- To preserve the hard-earned sovereignty,
2- Protect territorial integrity
3- Promote rapid economic development.
➢ Nehru wished to achieve these objectives through the strategy of Non- Alignment.
➢ There were parties and groups in the country believed that India should be friendlier with the US
because US claimed to be Pro-democracy. Among those who thought on these lines were leaders
like Dr. B.R. Ambedkar.
Distance from two camps

➢ The foreign policy of independent India pursued the dream of a peaceful World
1- By advocating the policy of non-alignment.
2- By reducing cold war tensions.
3- By contributing human resources.
4- By UN peace-keeping operations.
5- India did not join two power blocs (USA, USSR) during the cold war era.
6- India keeps away from the military alliance led by US and USSR.
7- India advocated non-alignment as the ideal foreign policy approach.
8- India was trying to convince the other developing countries about the policy of non-alignment.
Afro-Asian Unity
➢ 1Sensing India size and position and power potential, Nehru dreamed of playing a bigger role for
India in world affairs, especially in Asian affairs.
➢ During Nehru’s time India contacted new lovely independent countries of Asia and Africa
➢ Throughout the 1940 and 1950 Nehru had been an ardent advocate of Asian unity.
➢ India convened the Asian relation conference in March 1947.
➢ The Afro-Asian conference held in the Bandung (Indonesia) in 1955 known as the Bandung
conference,
➢ The first summit of the NAM was held in Belgrade in September 1961.
➢ Nehru was a co-founder of the NAM.
India-China Relations
➢ In 1949 India was the first country to recognize the Communist Government.
➢ Nehru felt that China coming out the shadow of Western domination and helped the New
Government in International Community.
➢ The Joint enunciation of Panchseel (Five Principles) of Peaceful Co-existence by Nehru and Zhou En-
Lai on 29 April, 1954 was a step in the direction of stronger relationship between India and China.
Tibet Issue
1- Tibet is a small country located between India and China.
2- The Plateau of the Central Asian Region called Tibet.
3- Tibet is the major caused and tensions between India and China.
4- Tibet was independent country but China had claimed administrative control over Tibet.
5- Large sections of the Tibetan population opposed China took over the control of Tibet in 1950.
6- India tried to peruse China to recognize Tibet’s claims for independence.
7- The Tibetan Spiritual Leader Dalai Lama accompanied the Chines Premier Zhou En-Lai during
the official visit of China in India in1956.
8- China ensured to India that Tibet will be given greater autonomy than enjoyed by any other
region of China.
9- In 1958-armed uprising in Tibet against China’s occupation.
10- In 1959 the Dalai Lama crossed the Indian Border and sought asylum which was granted by
India.
11- The Chines government strongly protested against asylum of Dalai Lama.
12- A large number of Tibetan has sought refuge in India.
13- Dharamshala in Himachal Pradesh is the largest refuge settlement of Tibetan in India.
14- Dalai Lama has also made Dharamshala (HP) his home.
15- In the 1950s and 1960s many political leaders and parties in India including the Socialist Party
and the Jana Sangh supported the causes of Tibet’s independence.
16- China has created the Tibet autonomous region which is an integral part of China.
17- Tibetan opposes the Chinese claim that Tibet is a part of Chinese territory.
18- Tibetan opposes the policy of bringing Chine settlers in the Tibet.
The Chinese invasion, 1962

➢ China annexed Tibet in 1950 and removed a historical buffer between India and China.
➢ The government of India did not oppose this openly.
➢ China alleged that the government of India was allowing anti-China activities to take place from
within India.
➢ Boundary dispute had surfaced between India and China.
➢ India claimed that the boundary was a matter settled in colonial time but China said that any colonial
decision did not apply.
➢ The main dispute was about the Western and the Eastern end of the long border.
➢ China claimed two area within the Indian Territory.
➢ Aksai-Chin area in the Ladakh region of Jammu and Kashmir
➢ Much of the state of Arunachal Pradesh was then called NEFA (North Eastern Frontier Agency).
➢ 1957-59, the Chinese occupied the Aksai Chin area and build a strategic road there despite a very
long correspondence and discussion among top leaders.
➢ China launched a shift and massive invasion in October 1962 on both the disputed regions.
➢ The first attack lasted one week and Chinese forces captured some key areas in Arunachala Pradesh.
➢ The second wave of attack comes next month. While the Indian forces could block the chines
advances on the western front in Ladakh.
➢ China declared a unilateral ceasefire and its troops withdrew to where they were before the
invasion began.
➢ The china war dented India’s image at home and abroad.
➢ India had to approach the Americans and the British for military assistance to tide over the crisis.
➢ The Soviet Union remained neutral during the conflict.
➢ It induced a sense of national humiliation and at the same time strengthened a spirit of nationalism.
➢ Some of the top army commanders either resigned or were retired.
➢ Nehru’s close associate and the then Défense Minister, V. Krishna Menon. Had to leave the cabinet.
➢ First time, a no-confidence motion against his government was moved and debated in the Lok
Sabha.
Sino-Indian relation since 1962

➢ The Sino –Indian conflict affected the opposition as well.
➢ This and the growing rift between china and Soviet Union created irreconcilable differences within
the CPI.
➢ The pro-USSR faction remained within CPI and moved towards closer ties with the congress.
➢ The party split in 1964 and its leaders of the latter function formed the communist party of India
(Marxist) (CPI-M).
➢ In the walk of the china war, many leaders of what became CPI (M) were arrested for being pro-
China.
➢ China war alerted the Indian leadership to the volatile situation in the north east region.
➢ Apart from being isolated and extremely underdeveloped.
➢ This reason also presented India with the challenge of national integration and political unity.
➢ The process of its reorganization begins soon after the china war.
➢ Nagaland was granted statehood: Manipur and Tripura, though union territories, were given the
right to elect their own legislative assemblies.
Wars and peace with Pakistan

➢ The conflict started just after the partition over the dispute of Kashmir.
➢ The issue was then referred to the UN.
➢ The Kashmir conflict did not prevent cooperation between the governments of India and Pakistan.
Both the governments worked together to restore the women abducted during Partition to their
original families.
➢ The India-Pakistan Indus Waters Treaty was signed by Nehru and General Ayub Khan in 1960.
Despite all ups and downs in the Indo-Pak relations this treaty has worked well.
➢ In April 1965 Pakistan launched armed attacks in the Rann of Kutch area of Gujarat.
➢ This was followed by a bigger offensive in Jammu and Kashmir in August-September.
➢ The Prime Minister Shastri ordered Indian troops to launch a counter offensive on the Punjab
border.
➢ In a fierce battle, the Indian army reached close to Lahore.
➢ The hostilities came to an end with the UN intervention.
➢ Indian Prime Minister Lal Bahadur Shastri and Pakistan's General Ayub Khan signed the Tashkent
Agreement, brokered by the Soviet Union, in January 1996.
Bangladesh War, 1971

➢ Beginning in 1970, Pakistan faced its biggest internal crisis.
➢ The country first general election produced a split verdict - Zulfikar Ali Bhutto's party emerged a
winner in West Pakistan, when the Awami League led by Sheikh Mujib0ur-Rahman swept through
East Pakistan.
➢ The Pakistani rulers were not willing to accept the democratic verdict.
➢ The Pakistani army arrested Sheikh Mujib-Ur-Rehman and unleashed a reign of terror on the people
of Each Pakistan.
➢ In response to this, the people started a struggle to liberate 'Bangladesh' from Pakistan.
➢ Throughout 1971, India had to bear the burden of about 80 lakh refugees who fled East Pakistan
and took shelter in the neighbouring areas in India.
➢ Pakistan accused India of a conspiracy to break it up.
➢ Support for Pakistan came from the US and China.
➢ Henry Kissinger, the adviser to the US President Richard Nixon, made a secret visit to China,
Pakistan in July 1971.
➢ In order to counter the US-Pakistan-China axis, India signed a 20-year Treaty of Peace and
Friendship with the Soviet Union in August 1971.
➢ This treaty assured India of Soviet support if the country faced any attack.
➢ A full-scale war between India and Pakistan broke out in December 1971.
➢ Pakistani aircrafts attacked Punjab and Rajasthan.
➢ India retaliated with an attack involving the air force, navy and the army on both the Western and
the Eastern front.
➢ Within ten days the Indian army had surrounded Dhaka from three sides and the Pakistani army of
about 90,000 had a surrender.
➢ With Bangladesh as a free country, India declared a unilateral ceasefire.
➢ Later, the signing of the Shimla Agreement between India Gandhi and Zulfikar Ali Bhutto on 3 July
1972 formalized the return of peace between the two nations.
Effects of 1962, 1965 and 1971 War

➢ A decisive victory in the war led to national jubilation.
➢ After the 1971 war assembly elections in most States took place, bringing large majorities for the
Congress party.
➢ The resources were diverted to the defence sector especially after 1962,
➢ The Department of Défense Production was established in November 1962
➢ The Department of Défense Supplies was established in November 1965.
➢ The Third Five Year Plan (1961-66) was affected and it was followed by three Annual Plans.
➢ The Fourth Five Year Plan could be initiated only in 1969.
➢ India's defence expenditure increased enormously after the wars.
India Israel Relations

➢ India and Israel always have friendly relations with each other.
➢ Israel gained independence from the British Colonial rule in 1948.
➢ On September 17, 1950, India recognized Israel as a nation.
➢ India and Israel are strategic and trading partner of India.
➢ The political relation between India and Israel are very warm and forward- looking.
➢
➢ Diplomatic relations formally developed between India and Israel after the opening of Israel
Embassy in India in 1992.
➢ Israel helped India by giving sophisticated weapons.
➢ Both countries have agreement to exchange information on terrorism.
➢ Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi's first visit to Israel has promised a number of agreements
between both countries on defence, space, technology, agriculture, water and security.
➢ India has successfully completed 25 years of good political relations with Israel. After Russia and
the United States, Israel is India's largest exporter.
India’s Relationship with Russia: -

➢ India’s Relationship with Russia an important aspect of India’s foreign policy.
➢ India-Russia relations are embedded in a history of trust and common interests and are matched by
popular perceptions.
➢ India and Russia s bilateral agreements have been signed between India and Russia as part of the
into Russian strategic Agreement of hare a vision of a multipolar world order
➢ Russia stand to benefit from the relationship because India is the second largest arms market for
Russia.
➢ The Indian military gets most of its hard ware from Russia.
➢ India is an oil important nation.
➢ India is seeking to increase its energy imports from Russia.
➢ Russia is important for India’s nuclear energy plant.
➢ Russia assisted India’s space industry by giving, for example the cryogenic rocket when India
needed in.
➢ Russia and India have collaborated on various scientific projects.
➢ Russia president Boris Yeltsin in and India signed nine agreement s in respect of scientific-
Equipment, Environment protection and research in to space Russia agreed to deliver to India the
most ultra –modern aircraft (Sukoi-30).
➢ Indo Russian strategic agreement for joint fighting international terrorism
➢ An agreement signed in 2006 enabled India to import space Technology from Russia.
➢ An agreement signed in 2008 construction of Russia designed Nuclear plants in kundankulam.
➢ An inter- government cooperation for long term gas supply
➢ Military and Technical Co-operation always remained an important pillar on strategic partnership
between the two countries.
➢ In April, 2019 Russia conferred its highest civil award on Indian prime minister for his “exceptional
servicer’ in promoting the strategic partnership between the two countries.
India’s Relationship with the US

➢ After the collapse of the USSR. India has liberalized its economy and integrated it with the global
economy.
➢ India- US bilateral relation increasing our strategic partnership, including security, energy and
technology.
➢ The US India’s largest trading partner in goods and services.
➢ In 2019-20 the bilateral trade between the USA and India stood at USD 88.75 billion.
➢ Cooperation with counter- terrorism with intelligence sharing, information exchange. Operational
cooperation and sharing of counter –Terrorism technology and equipment.
➢ The US absorbs about 65% of India total export in the software sector.
➢ 35% of the technical staff of boing is estimated to be of Indian origin.
➢ 300,000 Indians work in Silicon Valley.
➢ 15% of all high-tech start-ups are by Indian-American.
➢ The US did not accept India's foreign policy of Non-Alignment.
➢ The US viewed India's better relations with the Soviet Union with suspicion.
➢ There are lot of difference of opinion between India and the United States in the negotiations on the
World Trade Organization (WTO), visa policy and climate change.
➢ The United States is not happy about India's Non-signing of the NPT-Nuclear Non-Proliferation and
CTBT-Comprehensive Test Ban Treaty.
➢ The USA and India signed an agreement on Nuclear energy.
➢ India and USA consult each other on a number of subjects including strategic cooperation, science
and technology, health, education, energy and climate change.
➢ The US administration projected India as a key partner in the “Indo-Pacific Region”.
India's Nuclear Policy

➢ Nehru had always up this faith in science and technology for rapidly building a modern India.
➢ A significant component of his industrialization plans was the nuclear program initiated in the
late 1940 under the guidance of Homi Jehangir Bhabha.
➢ Nehru was not only deeply committed to the complete elimination of all nuclear weapons but
also opposed to the manufacture and possession by any state including India.
➢ He was opposed to nuclear weapons on moral, political and strategic ground scaling their
possession a “crime against humanity”.
➢ He integrated this opposition in to India's foreign policy giving it an activist edge.
➢ He was the first world leader to call for an end to all nuclear testing following US bomb test in
the Pacific in 1954.
➢ However, India’s civilian nuclear energy programme under the Department of Atomic Energy
(DAE) also had a dual use capacity major figures such as Homi J.Bhabha were nota ware of this
Bhabha himself was not as categorically opposed to a possible future bomb as was Nehru.
➢ India's nuclear policy has always been peace-oriented, whose clear impression is reflected in
the policy of No First Use. But in view of contemporary regional security challenges,
➢ The present government led by Prime Minister Narendra Modi has made it clear that the policy
of no first use can be reviewed and changed in consonance with India's regional and national
security.
➢ In addition, India is committed to ensuring its membership in the Nuclear Suppliers Group
(NSG) and opposing partisan and unjust nuclear treaties like CTBT and NPT.
MCQ TYPE QUESTIONS - 1 MARK
Q.1. Arrange the following in chronological order?

(i) Indo-Sino War.
(ii) Israel establishment of Embassy in India.
(iii) Dalai Lama Asylum in India.
(iv) India’s first nuclear test.
(A) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii)
(B) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii)
(C) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii)
(D) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv)
Q.2. What is true about India’s nuclear policy?

(A) Nuclear program is an essential element of the policy of industrialization.
(B) India is against nuclear weapons but for the fulfilment of peaceful purpose it always wants to make
nuclear energy.
(C) India conducted nuclear tests in May 1974.
(D) All of these
Q.3. Arrange the following in chronological order?
(i) Genesis of Bangladesh
(ii) Second Nuclear Test by India.
(iii) Control of Tibet by China.
(iv) Visit of Prime Minister of India to Myanmar.
(A) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv)
(B)(ii) (iii) (i) (iv)
(C) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv)
(D) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv)
Q.4. the question below, there are two statements marked as Assertion (A) and Reason(R). Read the
statements and choose the correct option.
Assertion: - The relations between India and Bangladesh in general have been friendly.
Reason: - India had helped in the creation of Bangladesh.
Q.5. When did India sign a 20 years ‘Treaty of Peace and Friendship’ with the Soviet Union?
(A) 1975 (B) 1980
(C ) 1972 (D) 1971
Q6. India foreign policy was based on?

(A) Realism (B) Idealism
(C ) Non-Alignment (D) Real Politics
Q7. Indo-Pak war of 1971 was fought over the issue of?
(A) Rann of Kutch (B) Bangladesh
(C ) Kashmir (D) Terrorism
Q8. Bangladesh emerged as an independent Nation in?

(A) January1972 (B) December1971
(C ) March 1972 (D) November1971
Q9. In which year Bandung Conference was held?

(A) 1954 (B) 1953
(C ) 1956 (D) 1955
Q10. What is the vision of India and Russia?

(A) Unipolar World (B) Bi-polar world
(c) Multipolar world (D) All of the above
Q11. What was the objective of Nehru’s Foreign policy?

Ans. (a) Protect hard earned sovereignty
(b) Preserve territorial integrity
(c) Rapid economy development
(d) All the above
Q12. Name the famous Nuclear Power Plant built in India and Russian Cooperation?
Ans. (a) Kundan Kulam Nuclear Power Plant
(b) Verna Kulam Pawer Plant
(c) Swarnam Kulam Pawer Plant
(d) Suvandan Kulam Pawer Plant
Q13. What did India opposed always?

Ans. (A) Imperialism (B) Neo-Colonialism
(C) Colonialism (D) All of these
Q14. Which was the country to recognize China’s first communist government?
Ans. (A) Nepal (B) USSR
(C) India (D) USA
Q15. What is the full form of NPT?

Ans. (a) Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty
(b) Nitroclear Non- Proliferation Treaty,
(c ) Nun Proliferation Treaty
(d) Nuclear Permanent Treaty
Q16. In which article of Indian constitution lays down some Directive Principles of state policy on
promotion of international peace and security?
Ans. (a) Article 51 (b) Article 63
(c ) Article 358 (d) Article 281
Q17. Which is a major issue of dispute between India and Pakistan?

Ans. (a) Laddakh (b) Kashmir
(c ) Goa (d) Kerala
Q18. When was the first nuclear experiment undertaken by India?

Ans. (A) May 1974. (B) June 1974
(C) July 1974 (D) September 1974
VERY SHORT TYPE QUESTION ANSWERS – 2 MARKS

Q1. Mention the objective of Nehru’s foreign policy. What was the strategy through which he
wanted to achieve them?
Ans. Objective of Nehru’s foreign policy:-
(1) To protect hard earned sovereignty.
(2) To preserve territorial integrity.
(3) Rapid Economic development.
Strategy: Jawaharlal Nehru wanted to achieve these objectives through the policy of Non-
alignment.
Q2. Name two determinants (one internal factor and external factor) of India’s foreign policy?
Ans. (i) Ideal that inspired one national leader.
(ii) Cold war between USSR (Eastern Bloc) and USA (Western Bloc).
Q3. What does Co-existence mean in the context of India’s foreign policy?
Ans. Co –existence means that all nations and system of government should exist side by side. In other
words, no nation has a right to impose its system of governance or economic policies on other
nations.
Q4. Mention the causes of the Kargil Conflict?

Ans. Pakistani troop captured Batalik, Kargil and Mashkoh ranges in Kashmir. Pakistan thus violated not
only international law but also the Shimla agreement.
Q5. Mention India’s efforts to improve relation with Myanmar?

Ans. Prime minister Atal Bihari Vajpayee aimed at improving relations with nations in South-east Asia in
order to reduce China’s growing influence in that reason. Present APJ Abdul Kalam visited Myanmar
in 2006. Prime Minister Namenda Modi paid a State Visit to Myanmar in 2017.
Q6. Israel was created in 1948, but diplomatic relation between India and Israel were
established too late in 1992.Why was it so?
Ans. It was because of Arab hostility towards Israel. Our rulers all these years thought that growing Indo
– Israel relation could have adversely affected India’s relations with countries in the Gulf reason,
especially United Arab Emirates (UAE).Bahrain, Saudi Arabia and others.
Q7. Mention two conditions of Shimla Agreement?

Ans. 1. Both the countries had resolved to solve their conflict and confrontation through bilateral.
Peaceful talks.
2. Both countries would not use force against each other’s territorial integrity.
Q8. What were the two main consequences of Indo- Pakistan conflict of 1971?
Ans. 1. One lac Pakistan soldiers surrendered and General Niazi signed the document of surrender.
2. Bangladesh emerged as an independent country.
Q9. Why did India not sign the Comprehensive Test Ban Treaty (CTBT)?
Ans. 1. India did not sign the Comprehensive Test Ban Treaty because according to India, this treaty was
discriminatory.
2. India’s two neighboring countries had nuclear weapons therefore it was necessary for India to
have minimum deterrent.
FOUR MARKS QUESTION

Q1. Describe any four main events of India’s war with Pakistan in 1965?
Ans Relations between India and Pakistan remained tense because of persistent clashes on the issue of
displaced property, disputes over Junagarh, Hyderabad and Kashmir.
• Two wars took place between both the countries on Kashmir issue first in 1948 and then in 1965.
• In april 1965, Pakistan launched armed attacks in the Rann of Kutch area of Gujarat. This war was
followed by a bigger offensive strike in Jammu and Kashmir in August- September 1965.
• Prime minister, Lal Bahadur Shastri ordered Indian troops to launch a counter offensive strike on
the Punjab Border.
Q2. Describe any four principles of India’s foreign policy?

Ans. 1. Non-alignment. Non alignment is the basic principle of India’s foreign policy. In fact, India was
the first country which initiated the policy of Non-alignment which was adopted by most of the
countries of Asia and Africa which attained independence in the post-world war – II period.
2. Opposition to the policy of caste, colour and Discrimination. Another basic principle of India’s
foreign policy is that it has always raised voice against the policy of caste, color and Discrimination.
3. Oppose to Imperialism – India has always opposed imperialism and colonialism. India regards
imperialism to be injurious to world peace as it leads to war.
4. Faith in United Nations. India is a founding of the united nation and has full faith in the aims and
principle of the United Nations. India believes that the United Nation is the only hope of world peace
in the present age, so it should be strengthened.
Q3. Highlight the development in India’s Nuclear Programme?

Ans. 1. In the late 1940s, under the guidance of Homi Jahangir Bhabha the Nuclear programmer was
initiated
2. The first nuclear explosion was undertaken by India in May, 1974
3. .The second nuclear explosion was undertaken by India in 11 and 13may, 1998.
4. India signed Civil Nuclear Treaty with U.S.A. in 2005.
Q4. Explain any two factors responsible for Pakistan’s failure in building a stable democracy?
Ans. 1. The social dominance of the military, clergy and landowning aristocracy are responsible for
overthrowing the democratic government. Wars with India have made military rulers and pro-
military groups very powerful. Democracy has not succeeded in Pakistan, there has been strong
pro-democratic sentiments in the country. America and other western countries have encouraged
military rulers for their own interests.
2. Another factor responsible for Pakistan’s failure in building a stable democracy in fundamentalist
element working in Pakistan.
Q5. Explain the circumstances that forced the Tibetans to leave China. Highlight India role in
helping the Tibetan refugees?
Ans. India’s policy of contentment crossed its limit when India gave its extra-territorial right enjoyed in
Tibet. To china by signing a trade agreement on 29 th April, 1954. Both the countries at the time of
agreement expressed their faith in the principles of Panchsheel. There was an armed uprising in
Tibet protest against china’s infiltration in 1958.Chinese forces suppressed the movement. In 1959,
the Dalai Lama crossed over to Indian border and sought asylum under the Indian government.
Large number of Tibetans had also sought refuge in India. Tibet became an issue of tension between
India and china.
Q6 What was the Tibet issue?

Ans. In 1950 China took over the control of Tibet. Large section of the Tibetan population oppose the
takeover in 1958 there was an armed uprising in Tibet against china occupation. This was
suppressed by the Chinese forces in 1959. The Dalai Lama crossed over in to the Indian border and
sought asylum which was granted. The chines government strongly protest against this.
Q7. What is No First Use Policy of India related to nuclear weapons?

Ans. India's nuclear policy has always been peace-oriented, whose clear impression is reflected in the
policy of No First Use. But in view of contemporary regional security challenges, the present
government led by Prime Minister Narendra Modi has made it clear that the policy of no first use
can be reviewed and changed in consonance with India's regional and national security In addition,
India is committed to ensuring its membership in the Nuclear Suppliers Group (NSG) and opposing
partisan and unjust nuclear treaties like CTBT and NPT.
Q8 Describe the meaning of Non-alignment?
Ans. Meaning of Non-alignment. Following are the meaning derived from the policy of Non-alignment
1. India will remain independent by not joining and group.it will not join even an organization
formed by different countries of the world.
2. The policy is an independent policy. A nation, by adopting it , can easily from its opinion about
any problem after its thorough analysis. Opinion about any problem after its thorough analysis.
3. Non-alignment does not mean neutrality in international affairs.
4. The policy of peacefulness. The permanent feature of India’s foreign policy should be to have
friendly and co-operative relations with all the nation.so that it may remain aloof from that
agreement which divide the world in to opposed Block and endanger world peace.
5. Non-alignment is a positive one. India wanted to bridge the gap between eastern and western
alliance. It is a positive as well as creative policy.
Q9 How 1971 war was forced open India? Explain in brief?

Ans. In 1971 India and Pakistan fought another war on Bangladesh issue. In fact, 1971 war was forced
upon India. East Bengal was not given fair treatment by the rulers of Pakistan and it was virtually
made a colony. In an election held early in 1971. Sheikh Mujibur’s Awami League not majority in
Pakistan parliament. But Sheikh Mujibur Rahman was not called to from the government and was
arrested. Under the military rulers of general Yahiya Khan. Pakistani army tried to suppress the
mass movement of the Bengali people. This led to a large scale migration in to India and big refugee
problem was created for India India help the Awami league in the war. War took place between
India and Pakistan in December 1971 and Pakistan was defeated in the war. India was the first
country to grant recognition to the People’s Republic of Bangladesh.
Q.10- What do you understand by Panchsheel? What are its main principles?
Ans. Pt. Nehru formulated five principles of peaceful co-existence among the nation of the world. They
were accepted first by the Chines Prime-Minister Zhou En-Lie .These principles are known as
Panchsheel. They are:-
1. To respect the sovereignty and territorial integrity of each other.
2. Non-aggression on each other.
3. Non-interference in each other’s internal affairs.
4. Peaceful settlement of disputes.
5. To promote world peace
LONG TYPE QUESTION ANSWER 6 MARKS
Q.1- Describe the main objectives and principles of Indian foreign affairs?
Main Objectives and Principles of India's Foreign Affairs
➢ Non-Alignment
➢ Vasudhev Kutumbakam (Complete world is family)
➢ Independence and active participation in international affairs
➢ Opposition to expansionism/colonialism
➢ Peaceful resolution of international disputes
➢ Disarmament
➢ Panchsheel Theory :- The Panchsheel Agreement was signed between Prime Minister Nehru and
Chinese Premier Chow Ann Lai on April 29, 1954 between India and China:-
➢ Mutual respect for each other’s sovereignty.
➢ Not to attack each other.
➢ Not interfering in each other's matters.
➢ To respect each other's territorial integrity.
➢ Peaceful co-existence.
Major objectives of India’s foreign policy
➢ Promote rapid Economic Development.
➢ To preserve India’s Self-respect, hard-earned Sovereignty and Independence.
➢ Reducing Cold War conditions for keeping peace in the world.
➢ Support to the United Nations.
➢ Oppose Imperialism.
Q.2- Explain the Nuclear Policy of India?

Ans.-
➢ Nehru had always faith in science and technology for rapidly building a modern India.
➢ A significant component of his industrialization plans was the nuclear program initiated in the
late 1940 under the guidance of Homi Jahangir Bhabha.
➢ Nehru was not only deeply committed to the complete elimination of all nuclear weapons but
also opposed to the manufacture and possession by any state including India.
➢ He was opposed to nuclear weapons on moral, political and strategic ground scaling their
possession a “crime against humanity”.
➢ He integrated this opposition in to India's foreign policy giving it an activist edge.
➢ He was the first world leader to call for an end to all nuclear testing following US bomb test in
the Pacific in 1954.
➢ However, India’s civilian nuclear energy programme under the Department of Atomic Energy
(DAE) also had a dual use capacity major figures such as Homi J. Bhabha were nota ware of this
Bhabha himself was not as categorically opposed to a possible future bomb as was Nehru.
➢ India's nuclear policy has always been peace-oriented, whose clear impression is reflected in the policy of No First
Use. But in view of contemporary regional security challenges,
➢ The present government led by Prime Minister Narendra Modi has made it clear that the policy of no first use can
be reviewed and changed in consonance with India's regional and national security.
➢ In addition, India is committed to ensuring its membership in the Nuclear Suppliers Group (NSG) and opposing
Comprehensive Test Ban Treaty (CTBT)

➢ The Comprehensive Nuclear-Test-Ban Treaty (CTBT) is the treaty banning all nuclear
explosions on earth. The treaty was negotiated at the conference on disarmament in Geneva
and adopted by the United Nations General assembly. It opened for signature on 24 September
1966. Since then, the treaty has reached
➢ Near universality. 182 countries have signed the Treaty – Best country to do so was Trinidad
and Tobago on 8 October 2009. 151 countries have ratified the treaty– most recently, Marshall
is lands on 28 October 2009.
Q3. Describe the relations between India and Pakistan in details?

Ans.
➢ The conflict started just after the partition over the dispute of Kashmir.
➢ The issue was then referred to the UN.
➢ The Kashmir conflict did not prevent cooperation between the governments of India and Pakistan.
Both the governments worked together to restore the women abducted during Partition to their
original families.
➢ The India-Pakistan Indus Waters Treaty was signed by Nehru and General Ayub Khan in 1960.
Despite all ups and downs in the Indo-Pak relations this treaty has worked well.
➢ In April 1965 Pakistan launched armed attacks in the Rann of Kutch area of Gujrat.
➢ This was followed by a bigger offensive in Jammu and Kashmir in August-September.
➢ The Prime Minister Shastri ordered Indian troops to launch a counter offensive on the Punjab
border.
➢ In a fierce battle, the Indian army reached close to Lahore.
➢ The hostilities came to an end with the UN intervention.
➢ Indian Prime Minister Lal Bahadur Shastri and Pakistan's Gen. Ayub Khan signed the Tashkent
Agreement brokered by the Soviet Union, in January 1996.
Q.4- Describe in detail the relations between India and Israel?

➢ India and Israel always have friendly relations with each other.
➢ Israel gained independence from the British Colonial rule in 1948.
➢ On September 17, 1950, India recognized Israel as a nation.
➢ India and Israel are strategic and trading partner of India.
➢ The political relation between India and Israel are very warm and forward- looking.
➢ Diplomatic relations formally developed between India and Israel after the opening of Israel
Embassy in India in 1992.
➢ Israel helped India by giving sophisticated weapons.
➢ Both countries has agreement to exchange information on terrorism.
➢ Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi's first visit to Israel has promised a number of agreements
between both countries on defense, space, technology, agriculture, water and security.
➢ India has successfully completed 25 years of good political relations with Israel. After Russia and
the United States, Israel is India's largest exporter.
Q5 Explain the India and Russia relations?

➢ India’s Relationship with Russia an important aspect of India’s foreign policy.
➢ India Russia relations are embedded command interests and are matched by popular perceptions
➢ India and Russia s bilateral agreements have been signed as part of the Indo-Russian strategic
Agreement of hare a vision of a multipolar world order
➢ More than 80 bilateral agreements have been signed between India and Russia as part of the Indo
Russian Strategic Agreement of 2001.
➢ Russia stand to benefit from the relationship because India is the second largest arms market for
Russia.
➢ The Indian military gets most of its hardware from Russia.
➢ India is an oil important nation. Russia has repeatedly come to the assistance of India during its oil
crisis.
➢ India is seeking to increase its energy imports from Russia.
➢ Russia is important for India’s nuclear energy plant.
➢ Russia assisted India’s space industry by giving, for example the cryogenic rocket when India
needed in.
➢ Russia and India have collaborated on various scientific projects.
➢ Russia president Boris Yeltsin in and India signed nine agreement s in respect of scientific-
Equipment, Environment protection and research in to space Russia agreed to deliver to India the
most ultra –modern aircraft (sukoi-30).
➢ Indo Russian strategic agreement for joint fighting international terrorism
➢ An agreement signed in 2006 enabled India to import space Technology from Russia.
➢ An agreement signed in 2008 construction of Russia designed nuclear plants in Kundankulam.
➢ An inter- government cooperation for long term gas supply.
➢ Agreements and a study to build a multi-billion dollar pipeline were among the deal for the
president Putin and Prime Minister Narendra Modi to sign in 2014.
➢ Military and technical Co-operation always remained an important pillar on strategic partnership
between the two countries.
➢ In April, 2019 Russia conferred its highest civil award on Indian prime minister for his ‘exceptional
servicer’ in promoting the strategic partnership between the two countries.
Q. 6- Describe in detail the relations between India and China.

➢ China annexed Tibet in 1950 and removed a historical buffer between India and China.
➢ The government of India did not oppose this openly.
➢ China alleged that the government of India was allowing anti-China activities to take place from
within India.
➢ Boundary dispute had surfaced between India and China.
➢ India claimed that the boundary was a matter settled in colonial time but China said that any colonial
decision did not apply.
➢ The main dispute was about the Western and the Eastern end of the long border.
➢ China claimed two area within the Indian Territory.
➢ Aksai-chin area in the Ladakh region of Jammu and Kashmir
➢ Much of the state of Arunachal Pradesh in what was then called NEFA (North Eastern Frontier
Agency.
➢ 1957-59, the Chinese occupied the Aksai chin area and build a strategic road there despite a very
long correspondence and discussion among top leaders.
➢ Several small border skirmishes between the armies of the two countries took place.
➢ China launched a shift and massive invasion in October 1962 on both the disputed regions.
➢ The first attack lasted one week and Chinese forces captured some key areas in Arunachal Pradesh.
➢ The second wave of attack come next month. While the Indian forces could block the chines
advances on the western front in Ladakh.
➢ China declared a unilateral ceasefire and its troops withdrew to where they were before the
invasion began.
➢ The China war dented India’s image at home and abroad.
➢ India had to approach the Americans and the British for military assistance to tide over the crisis.
➢ It induced a sense of national humiliation and at the same time strengthened a spirit of nationalism.
➢ Some of the top army commanders either resigned or were retired.
➢ Nehru’s close associate and the then defense minister, V. Krishna Menon had to leave the cabinet.
➢ Nehru’s own stature suffered as he was severely criticized for his naïve assessment of the Chinese
intentions and the lack of military preparedness.
➢ First time, a no-confidence motion against his government was moved and debated in the Lok
Sabha.
➢ Congress lost some key by-election to Lok Sabha.
Passage Based Question

Q.1- Read the following passage and answer the questions that followed.
The conflict of 1962, in which India suffered military reverses, had long-term implications on India-China
relations. China claimed two areas within the Indian Territory Aksai Chin and Arunachal Pradesh.
Arunachal Pradesh was then called NEFA. Diplomatic relations between the two countries were
downgraded until 1976. Thereafter, relations between the two countries began to improve slowly. After
the change in Chinese political leadership from the mid to late 1970s, China’s policy became more
pragmatic and less ideological. So, it was prepared to put off the settlement of contentious issues while
improving relations with India. A series of talks to resolve the border issue were also initiated in 1981.
Q.1. In which war India got military defeat?
(A) Pakistan war in 1948
(B) Pakistan war in 1971
(C) China war in 1962
(D) Pakistan war in 1965
Q.2. How long did diplomatic relations between China and India deteriorate?
(A) Until the late 1970
(B) Until the 1960
(C) Until the early 1980
(D) None of these
Q.3. What changed in China’s policy in the 70s?
(A) Practical issues become prominent instead of ideological issues.
(B) Ideological issues become prominent instead of ideological issues.
(C )Invaded Aksai Chin and Arunachal Pradesh
(D) None of these
Q.4. Which area was then called NEFA?

(A) Jammu & Kashmir
(B) Aksai Chin
(C) Arunachal Pradesh
(D) Laddhakh
Q.2-Read the given passage and answer the questions that follow.1+1+1+1= 4
Another crucial development of this period was the first nuclear explosion undertaken by India in May
1974. A significant component of his industrialisation plans was the nuclear programme initiated in the
late 1940s under the guidance of Homi J. Bhabha. India wanted to generate atomic energy for peaceful
purposes. When Communist China conducted nuclear tests in October 1964, the five nuclear weapon
powers. When India conducted its first nuclear test, it was termed as peaceful explosion. India argued that
it was committed to the policy of using nuclear power only for peaceful purposes. The period when the
nuclear test was conducted was a difficult period in domestic politics. Following the Arab-Israel War of
1973, the entire world was affected by the Oil Shock due to the massive hike in the oil prices by the Arab
nations.
1- In which year India conduct the First Nuclear Test?
(A) 1975
(B) 1973
(C) 1976
(D) 1974
2- In which year Arab-Israel war fought?
(A) 1972
(B) 1973
(C) 1974
(D) 1975
3- Nuclear Programme was initiated under the guidance of?
(A) Jawahar Lal Nehru
(B) Sardar Vallabh Bhai Patel
(C) A.P.J. Abdul Kalam
(D) Homi Jahangir Bhabha
4- What is the concept of India’s Nuclear Policy?
(A) Not test of atomic energy in coming years.
(B) Use of Nuclear Power on enemy country.
(C) Policy of using nuclear power for peaceful purpose.
(D) All of these.
Q.3- Read the given passage and answer the questions that follow. (1+1+1+1=4Marks)
India's nuclear policy has always been peace-oriented, whose clear impression is reflected in the
policy of No First Use. But in view of contemporary regional security challenges, the present
government led by Prime Minister Narendra Modi has made it clear that the policy of no first use
can be reviewed and changed in consonance with India's regional and national security. In Addition,
India is committed to ensuring its membership in the Nuclear Suppliers Group (NSG) and opposing
(i) Why was the policy of “NO FIRST USE” reviewed and changed?
(a)India is not a peace- oriented nation any more
(b)India wants to be a permanent member of UNSC.
(C)India regional and national security is permanent
(d)All of these
(ii) India wants to ensure its place in?
(a)United Nation Security Council
(b)International Atomic Energy Agency.
(C)National Security guard
(d)Missile technology control regime
(iii) Which one of the correct option for CTBT?
(a)Compact test ban treaty
(b)Comprehensive Testing Ban Treaty.
(C) Comprehensive Test Ban Treaty.
(d) Compact Testing Ban Treaty
(iv) India’s nuclear policy reiterates its resolve in:
(a) Establishing its regional supremacy
(b) Establish it as the guardian of SAARC.
(C) Establishing disarmament and regional peace.
(d) Engage in hostilities with others.
Q.4- Read the given passage and answer the questions that follow. (1+1+1+1= 4)
Historical and culture ties between India and Israel have gone back from times immemorial,
diplomatic relations formally developed between the two after the opening of Israeli embassy in
India in 1992.But even after the establishment of formal diplomatic relation, The relations between
the two countries started gaining firmness only after the formation of the BJP-led NDA government
in 1996 and 1998 onwards. Relations between the two democratic nations further intensified with
the visits of the Two Heads of government; Prime Minister Narendra Modi to Israel in 2017 and
Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu to India in 2018.
(i) When was the embassy of Israel established in India?
(a) 1985 (b) 1990.
(C) 1992 (d) 1993
(ii) When did the relation between India and Israel strengthen?
(a)After the establishment of NDA government in 1996 and 1998
(b) After the establishment of NDA government in 1996 and 1998.
(C) After the establishment of NDA government in 1996 and 1998
(d) None of these
(iii) When did diplomatic relations between India and Israel formally begin?
(a) From1989 (b) From 1992
(C) From 1919 (d) From 2004
(iv) When did the prime minister of Israel visit India?

(a) 2019 (b) 2020
(C) 2015 (d) 2018
PICTURE BASED
Q.1- Study the Newspaper cutting given below and answer the question that fallow:
1+1+1+1=4 marks
(i) Which country’s army officer signed for surrender in the above picture?
(a) Pakistan (b) Nepal
(c) India (d) None of these
(ii)Who was the Prime minister of the India at the time of this event?
(a) Lal Bahadur Shashtri (b) Charan singh
(c) Indira Gandhi (d) Morarji Desai
(iii)When did the event happen?
(a) December 1971 (b) May 1971
(c) March 1971 (d) August1971
(iv) What was the agreement after this event?
(a) Shimla agreement (b) October agreement
(c) May agreement (d) Tashkent
MAP BASED
In the given political outline map of India, five states have been shown as (A),(B),(C),(D) and (E). Identify
them on the basis of the given information. Give their correct names with the respective serial number of
the information and alphabet concerned in the format below:
(i)The State which came into existence due to bifurcation at the time of partition in 1947.
(ii) A Princely State whose ruler resisted its merger with India.
(iii)The State where the Congress party failed to win a majority in the First general Elections of India.
(iv) The 29th State of India
Sr. No. of the information Alphabet concerned Name of the state
used
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
ANSWER
Sr. No. of the information Alphabet concerned Name of the state
used
(i) E West Bengal
(ii) D Jammu and Kashmir
(iii) A Kerala
(iv) B Telangana
CHALLENGES TO AND RESTORATION OF THE CONGRESS SYSTEM
Challenges of Political Succession.
India’s first Prime Minister J.L. Nehru passed away in May 1964
There were two challenges of political succession.
(i). Whether India’s democratic system will survive after Nehru.
(ii) Whether question of political succession will be solved peacefully and democratically.
Because many newly independent countries of Asia and Africa and Latin America could not solve
their political succession after the death of popular leader and couldn’t be maintained democratic
system. Example- Pakistan after Mohammad Ali Jinnah and Indonesia after Sukarno.
But India solved both questions peacefully and democratically and proved the critics wrong.
Lal Bahadur Shastri became the second prime minister of India.
1960s were labeled as the dangerous decade.Beacause there were many unresolved problems like poverty.
Inequality communal and regional divison etc. could lead to a failure of the democratic system or even
disintegration of the country.
From Nehru to Shastri
Lal Bahadur Shastri (1964 to 1966)
There were three major challenges of Shastri.
(i). Economic problems due to the war with china in 1962.
(ii) Serious food crisis due to failure of monsoon and draught in large part of the country.
(iii) War with Pakistan in 1964.
To overcome these challenges Shastriji gave the slogan ‘Jay Jawan Jay Kisan’
10th January1966 Shastriji was suddenly expired in Tanshkent. Then in USSR and currently the
capital of Uzbekistan. He was there to disccuss and sign an agreement with Muhammad Ayub
Khan, the then President of Pakistan, to end the war
From Shastri to Indira Gandhi

The Congress faced the challenge of political succession for second time in two years.
This time there was intense competition between Morarji Desai and Indira Gandhi.
Indira Gandhi was also cabinet minister in Shastri’s Cabinet.
Most of the congress leader supported Indira Gandhi.
Indira Gandhi won the contest and became the next Prime minister of India.
Fourth General Election 1967.
Fourth general election was held in 1967.
The year 1967 is considered a landmark year in India’s political and electoral history.
(i). Congress won with over 40% vote share, but seats were reduced from 361/494 to 283/520.
(ii) First Elections Congress fought under leadership of Indira Gandhi.
(iii) Parliamentary constituencies went up from 494 to 520
(iv) Swantantrata Party, Formed by anti-Congress sentiments won 44 seat.
Context of electons:
The first time congress was going to contest the election without Pandit Nehru.
There was serious economic crisis in the country.
A large part of the country faced draught due to continues failure of monsoon.
There was a shortage of food grains, Agriculture production was being decreased.
The Industrial production and exports were also decreased.
India had to raise its expenditure on military.
Indian rupee was devaluated in comparison of US dollar.
Non –Congressism
Most of the opposition’s parties realized that the division of their votes kept the congress in power. Thus,
parties that’s were entirely different and disparate in their programs and ideology got together to from
anti-congress fronts in some states.
The socialist leader Ram Manohar Lohiya gave this strategy the name of Non-Congressism. He also
produced a theoretical argument in its defense and said congress rule was undemocratic and opposed to
the interest of ordinary poor people. Therefore the coming together of the non-Congress parties was
necessary for reclaiming democracy for the people.
Electoral verdict –
➢ The fourth general elections to the Lok Sabha and state Assemblies were held in February 1967.
➢ The result jolted the congress at both the national and state level.
➢ Many contemporary political observers described the election as ‘political earthquake’.
➢ The congress did manage to get a majority in the Lok Sabha but with its lowest tally of seats and
share of votes since 1952.
➢ Half the ministers in Indira Gandhi’s cabinet were defeated.
Coalitions –
➢ The election of 1967 brought into picture the phenomenon of coalition.
➢ Since no single party had got majority, various non-congress parties came together to form joint
legislative parties (called Samyukt Vidhayak Dal in Hindi) that supported non-congress
governments.
➢ That is why these government came to be described as SVD governments.
➢ The SVD in Bihar included the two socialist parties SSP and PSP along with CPI on the left and Jana
Sangha on the right. In Punjab it was called popular united front and comprised the two rival Akali
parties at that time – Sant group and the Master group.
Defection –
➢ Defection means an elected representative leaves the party on whose symbol he/she was elected
and joins another party.
➢ In 1967 elections defection played an important role in the making and unmaking of governments
in the states.
➢ After the 1967 general election the breakaway congress legislators played a major role in installing
non-congress governments in three states – Haryana, Madhya Pradesh and Uttar Pradesh.
➢ The constant realignments and shifting political loyalties in this period gave rise to the expression
‘Aya Ram’ – ‘Gaya Ram’ split in the congress.
➢ After the 1967 elections, the congress retained power at the center but with a reduced majority and
lost power in many states.
➢ The results proved that the congress could be defeated at the elections.
Indira Gandhi vs the syndicate –
➢ The real challenge to Indira Gandhi within her own party, she had to deal with syndicate.
➢ The syndicate, a group of powerful and influential leaders from within the congress.
➢ Gradually Indira Gandhi attempted to assert her position within the government and the party.
➢ She chose her trusted group of advisers from outside the party and carefully sidelined the syndicate.
➢ Indira Gandhi faced two challenges to build her independence and to work towards regaining the
ground that the congress had lost in the 1967 elections.
➢ She adopted a very bold strategy and launched a series of initiatives and got the congress working
committee to adopt ‘Ten-point programme’ in 1967.
➢ This programme included social control of Banks, nationalization of general insurance, ceiling on
urban property and income, public distribution of food grains, land reforms, provision of house sites
to the rural poor.
Presidential election, 1969
• President-------------------------- Zakir Hussain

• Vice-President –----------------- V.V.Giri
• Prime Minister –----------------- Indira Gandhi
• Deputy Prime Minister – --------Morarji Desai
• Speaker –-------------------------- Neelam Sanjeeva Reddy
➢
The factional rivalry between the Syndicate and Indira Gandhi came in the open in 1969.
➢
President Zakir Hussain’s death, the post of President of the India fell vacant.
➢
Speaker of the Lok Sabha, N. Sanjeeva Reddy, as the official Congress candidate for the ensuing
Presidential elections.
➢
Indira Gandhi retaliated by encouraging the then Vice-President, V.V. Giri, to file his nomination
as an independent candidate.
➢
Indira Gandhi also announced several big and popular policy measures like the nationalisation
of fourteen leading private banks and the abolition of the ‘privy purse’ or the special privileges
given to former princes.
➢
Morarji Desai was the Deputy Prime Minister and Finance
Minister.
➢
The then Congress President S. Nijalingappa issued a ‘whip’ asking all the Congress MPs and
MLAs to vote in favour of
Sanjeeva Reddy.
➢
Supporters of Indira Gandhi requisitioned a special meeting of the AICC (that is why this faction
came to be known as
‘requisitionists’) but this was refused.
➢
After silently supporting V.V. Giri, the Prime Minister openly called for a ‘conscience vote’ which
meant that the MPs and MLAs from the Congress should be free to vote the way they want.
The election ultimately resulted in the victory of V.V. Giri, the independent candidate, and the
defeat of Sanjeeva Reddy, the official Congress candidate. The defeat of the official Congress
candidate formalised the split in the party.
➢
The Congress President expelled the Prime Minister from the party. Indira Gandhi claimed that
her group was the real
Congress.
➢
The Congress group led by the ‘syndicate’ came to be referred to as the Congress (Organisation)
and the group led by Indira Gandhi came to be called the Congress (Requisitionists) in November
1969.
➢
Congress (O) described as Old Congress and Congress (R) were also New Congress.
➢
Indira Gandhi projected the split as an ideological divide between socialists and conservatives,
between the pro-poor and the pro-rich.
Abolition of Privy Purse
➢
The rulers’ families would be allowed to retain certain private property, and given a grant in
heredity or government allowance, measured on the basis of the extent, revenue and potential of
the merging state. This grant was called the Privy
Purse.
➢
Hereditary privileges were not consonant with the principles of equality and social and
economic justice laid down in the Constitution of India.
➢
Following the 1967 elections, Indira Gandhi supported the demand that the government should
abolish privy purses. Morarji Desai called the move morally wrong and amounting to a ‘breach
of faith with the princes’.
➢
The government tried to bring a Constitutional amendment in 1970 but it was not passed in
Rajya Sabha.
➢
It then issued an ordinance which was struck down by the Supreme Court. Indira Gandhi made
this into a major election issue in 1971 and got a lot of public support.
➢
The Constitution was amended to remove legal obstacles for abolition of ‘privy purse’.
The 1971 Election and Restoration of Congress

➢
The split in the Congress reduced Indira Gandhi Government to a minority.
➢
Indira’s government continued in office with the issue-based support of a few other parties
including the Communist Party of
India (CPI) and the DMK.
➢
The government made conscious attempts to project its socialist credentials. This was also a phase
when Indira Gandhi vigorously campaigned for implementing the existing land reform laws and
undertook further land ceiling legislation.
➢
Indira Gandhi’s government recommended the dissolution of the Lok Sabha in December 1970.
➢
The fifth general election to Lok Sabha were held in February 1971.
The contest
➢
The electoral contest appeared to be loaded against Congress (R). After all, the new Congress was
just one faction of an already weak party.
➢
Everyone believed that the real organisational strength of the Congress party was under the
command of Congress (O).
➢
To make matters worse for Indira Gandhi, all the major non-communist, non- Congress opposition
parties formed an electoral alliance known as the Grand Alliance.
➢
The SSP, PSP, Bharatiya Jana Sangh, Swatantra Party and the Bharatiya Kranti Dal came
together under this umbrella.
➢
The ruling party had an alliance with the CPI.
➢
The new Congress had something that its big opponents lacked it had an issue, an agenda and a
positive slogan.
➢
Grand Alliance did not have a coherent political programme.
➢
Indira Gandhi said that the opposition alliance had only one common programme- Indira
Hatao (Remove Indira).
➢
Indira Gandhi put forward a positive programme captured in the famous slogan: Garibi Hatao
(Remove Poverty).
➢
Indira Gandhi focused on the growth of the public sector, imposition of ceiling on rural land
holdings and urban property, removal of disparities in income and opportunity, and abolition
of princely privileges.
➢
Through garibi hatao Indira Gandhi tried to generate a support base among the disadvantaged,
especially among the landless labourers, Dalits and Adivasis, minorities, women and the
unemployed youth.
➢
The slogan of garibi hatao and the programmes that followed it were part of Indira Gandhi’s
political strategy of building an independent nationwide political support base.
The outcome and after

➢
The results of the Lok Sabha elections of 1971, were as dramatic as was the decision to hold
these elections.
➢
The Congress(R)-CPI alliance won more seats and votes than the Congress had ever won in the
first four general elections.
➢
The combine won 375 seats in Lok Sabha and secured 48.4 per cent votes.
➢
Indira Gandhi’s Congress(R) won 352 seats with about 44 per cent of the popular votes on its
own.
➢
Contrast this with the performance of the Congress (O): the party with so many stalwarts could get
less than one-fourth of the votes secured by Indira Gandhi’s party and win merely 16 seats.
➢
The Congress party led by Indira Gandhi established its claim to being the ‘real’ Congress and
restored to it the dominant position in Indian politics.
➢
The Grand Alliance of the opposition proved a grand failure.
➢
After the 1971 Lok Sabha elections, a major political and military crisis broke out in East
Pakistan (now Bangladesh).
➢
The crisis in East Pakistan and the Indo- Pak war leading to the establishment of Bangladesh.
These events added to the popularity of Indira Gandhi.
➢
Indira Gandhi was seen not only as the protector of the poor and the underprivileged, but also
a strong nationalist leader.
➢
With two successive election victories, one at the centre and other at the State level, the
dominance of the Congress was restored.
➢
The Congress was now in power in almost all the States. It was also popular across different
social sections.
Restoration?
➢
In many ways she had re-invented the party. The party occupied a similar position in terms of its
popularity as in the past. But it was a different kind of a party.
➢
It relied entirely on the popularity of the supreme leader.
➢
It had a somewhat weak organisational structure.
➢
This Congress party now did not have many factions, thus it could not accommodate all kinds of
opinions and interests.
➢
While it won elections, it depended more on some social groups: the poor, the women, Dalits,
Adivasis and the minorities.
➢
This was a new Congress that had emerged.
➢
Indira Gandhi restored the Congress system by changing the nature of the Congress system
itself.
➢
The new Congress did not have the kind of capacity to absorb all tensions and conflicts that the
Congress system was known for.
➢
The Congress consolidated its position and Indira Gandhi assumed a position of unprecedented
political authority, the spaces for democratic expression of people’s aspirations actually
shrank.
➢
The popular unrest and mobilisation around issues of development and economic deprivation
continued to grow.
(SECTION-A)
(12 Q X 1 Mark = 12)
Q.1- In which magazine wrote that Jawaharlal Nehru “would live to confess the failure of universal
adult franchise in India?
(A) The Hindu (B) Times of India
(C) Organizer (D) Common wealth (C)
Q.2- How many seats did congress won in 1952?

(A) 364 (B) 265
(C) 423 (D) 399 (A)
Q.3- Which political party laid emphasis on the idea of one country, one culture and one nation?
(A) Praja socialist Party (B) Bhartiya jana Sangh
(C) Communist party of India (D) Akali Dal (B)
Q.4- Who was appointed as first Chief Election Commissioner?
(A) Anup Chandra Pandey (B) Sushil Chandra
(C) Sukumar Sen (D) Rajiv Kumar (C)
Q.5- Which of the following facts about the political parties is incorrect?
➢ They shape public opinion.
➢ They provide people with access to government machinery.
➢ They put forward policies and programmes to attract voters.
➢ They play an active role to resolve public policy problems. (A)
Q.6- What was the famous scheme of Mr. K.Kamraj?
(A) Dam scheme (B) Water scheme
(C) Mid-day meal scheme (D) Save soil scheme (C)
Q.7- Prime minister Pt. Jawaharlal Nehru passed away in?
(A) May 1965 (B) January 1964
(C) March 1964 (D) May 1964 (D)
Q.8- The factional rivalry between the syndicate and Indira Gandhi came in the open ____?
(A) Presidential Election, 1969 (B) Parliamentary Election, 1969
(C) State Election, 1969 (D) None of the above (A)
Q.9- The Socialist leader who gave the strategy ‘Non-Congressism’ was?
(A) Giani Zail Singh (B) V.V Giri.
(C) Ram Manohar Lohia (D) V.P. Singh. (C)
Q.10- The founder of Bharatiya Jana Sangh was……?
(A) Atal Bihari Vajpayee (B) Rajgopalchari

(C) Deen Dayal Upadhyay (D) Shyama Prasad Mukherjee (D)
Q.11- Privy purse was a grant or allowance given to the families of ______?
(A) Poor People (B) Civil servants
(C) Princely Ruler (D) Middle Class (C)
Q.12- The result of which election were called political earthquake?
(A) 1952 elections (B) 1967 elections
(C) 1972 elections (D) 1977 elections (B)
Q.13- The concept of Alliance politics emerged after …………………

(A) 1952 (B) 1957
(C) 1967 (D) 1971 (C)
Q.14- Which party dominated the first three general elections?
(A) Communist party of India (B) Indian National Congress
(C) Bhartiya Jan Sangh (D) Socialist party (B)
Q.15- The Constitution of India was ready and signed on ……………………..
(A) 26 October, 1949 (B) 26 November, 1949
(C) 26 November, 1950 (D) 26 October, 1950 (B)
Section B (6QX2M=12)
Q.16- Why is the decade of 1960 called the dangerous decade? 2

Ans - a) 1962 India –China war , 1965 India Pakistan war
b) Monsoon failure resulting in drought
Q.17- What were the beliefs of Socialist Party? 2
Ans - In a socialist system, the ownership and distribution of wealth and property are under the control
of the society. Socialism as an economic, social and ideological concept opposes rights based on private
property. It also has a fundamental promise that the production and distribution of wealth should be in
the hands of the society or the state.
Q.18-Mention any two reason for the winning of congress (R) in 1971 elections? 2
Ans - a) Slogan of Garibi hatao
b) Indira’s victory in 1971 Indo Pak war.
Q.19- Define syndicate? 2

Ans - A group of powerfull and influential leaders from within the congress.
Q.20- Name the two countries where one party dominance is prevalent? 2
Ans - South Korea , Taiwan
Q.21- Who signed the Tashkent agreement and when? 2

Ans - Tashkent agreement was signed between Shastri ji and Ayub khan
President of Pakistan in 1966.
(SECTION-C)
(5QX4M=20)
Q.22- Examine the factors which helped V.V. Giri to become the President of India? 4
Ans - During 1969 presidential election, a series of events took place which helped Shri VV Giri to become
the President of India. These were
• The factional rivalry between the syndicate and Indira Gandhi, the then PM became public in 1969.
• Despite Indira Gandhi’s reservations, the Syndicate nominated her long time opponent and the then
speaker of the Lok Sabha, N Sanjeeva Reddy, as the official Congress candidate for presidential elections.
Smt. Indira Gandhi reacted by encouraging the then Vice-President, VV Giri to stand for presidential
eletion as an independent candidate.
Q.23- Describe any four features of the ideology of the Bharatiya Jana Sangh? 4
Ans - The Bharatiya Jana Sangha was formed in 1951. Its main features are
• The lineage of Bhartiya Jana Sangh can be traced back to the Rashtriya Swayamsevak Sangh (RSS) and
the Hindu Mahasabha before independence.
• It was different from other parties in terms of ideology and programmes. It emphasised the idea of one
country, one culture and one nation. It believed that the country could become modern, progressive and
strong on the basis of Indian culture and traditions.
• The party called for a reunion of India and Pakistan in Akhand Bharat.
• The party was in forefront of the agitation to replace English with Hindi as the official language of India.
It was opposed to the granting of concessions to religious and cultural minorities.
Q.24- Describe any two advantages and two disadvantages of ‘coalition’ government in India? 4
Ans - The advantages of coalition government in India are=
(i) Coalition government provides an alternative to form government, whenever there is a case of hung
Parliament.
(ii) It gives small and regional parties to have opportunities to representation in government.
The disadvantage of coalition government in India are=

(i) It leads to instability in government, as different partners pull the government differently and
government finds itself unable to take right decision at right time.
(ii) It reduces the credibility of office of PM/CM as their tenure depends at the pleasure of coalition
partners. It produces weak government.
Q.25- what factors were responsible for the rival of the Congress party in India in 1971?
4
Ans - The main outcomes of the General Elections of 1971 which were responsible for restoration or
revival of Congress were the following:
1. The Congress (R)-CPI alliance won more seats and votes than the Congress had ever won in the first
four general elections.
2. The 1971 elections were followed by the crisis in East Pakistan and Indo-Pak war leading to the
establishment of Bangladesh.
3. Under leadership of Indira Gandhi, her party swept through all the State Assembly elections held in
1972.
4. With two successive election victories, one at the centre and other at the state level, the dominance of
the Congress was restored.
Q.26- Highlight the changes introduced in voting in India after 1952? 4

Ans - The following changes introduced in the voting methods in India afte’ 1952 :
(i) During the first general election a box was placed in each pooling booth with the election symbol of
candidates. Each voter got a blank ballot paper and had to drop into the box of the candidate they wanted
to vote for.
(II)Initially about 20 lakh steel boxes were used for this purpose.
(Iii) the ballot paper carried the name and symbols of all the candidates an l votes had put a stamp on the
candidates. This technique worked for 40 years.from 3 rd to the 13th general elections.
(iv) In the end of 1990s, the Election Commission introduced Electronic Voting Machine (EVM) and in
2004 it was used extensively all over the country.
(SECTION-D)
(3QX4M=20)
Q.27- Read the following passage and answer the questions given below? 1+1+1+1 = 4
Ans - India is not the only country to have experienced the dominance of one party. If we look around the
world, we find many other examples of one-party dominance. But there is a crucial difference between
these and the Indian experience. In the rest of the cases the dominance of one party was ensured by
compromising democracy. In some countries like China, Cuba and Syria the Constitution permits only a
single party to rule the country.
➢ Which political party dominated the political scene of India after independence?
➢ Bhartiya Jana Sangh
➢ Indian National Congress
➢ Swatantra Party
➢ Communist Party of india (B)
(ii) In India, One-party dominance of single party was the result of ………… .?
(a) General elections that gave majority to the party
(b) Consensus of people
(c) Democratic set-up of India
(d) All of the above (D)
(iii) For how many years one-party dominance was there in the Independent India?
(a) 10 years
(b) 12 years
(c) 15 years
(d) 17 years (C)
(iv) Which of the following are the drawbacks of a single party rule?
(a) It tries to establish anarchy and tyranny order.
(b) It brings crises of the constitutional
(c) It encourages more opposition parties.
(d) Both (a) and (b) (D)
Q.28- Observe the cartoon given below and answer the following questions?
1+1+1+1 = 4
Q.1- Which event does the picture refer to?
(A) Prime Minister Elections
(B) Vice-President Elections
(C)President Elections
(D) None of these (C)
Q.2- Who is the play crucial role in presidential election in 1969?

(A) Rajkumari Amrit Kaur
(B) Meera Devi
(C)Droupadi Murmu
(D) Indira Gandhi (D)
Q.3- Who is the Indira’s supported candidate in presidential election in 1969?
(A) S. Nijlingappa
(B) N.S.Reddy
(C)V.V.Giri
(D) Morarji Desai (C)

Q.4- Who defeat in this election?
(A) N. Sanjeeva Reddy
(B) V. V. Giri
(C)Morarji Desai
(D) S. Nijlingappa (A)
Q.29- In the given outline political map of India, four states have been marked as (A) (B) (C) and (D).
Identify these states on the basis of the information given below and write their correct names in your
answer book along with the respective serial numbers of the information used and the concerned
alphabets as per the format that follows: 1+1+1+1=4
information used
(I)
(II)
(III)
(IV)
(i) The 29th State of India, Telangana.
(ii) The State where Nagpur Session of the Congress Party was held in 1959.
(iii) The State to which the Communist leader E.M.S. Namboodiripad belonged.
(iv) The home State of Rajkumari Amrit Kaur, the first Health Minister of independent India.
(SECTION-E)
(4QX6M=24)
Q.30- Analyse the reasons for the dominance of Congress Party in the first three general elections?
Ans - The Congress Party succeed in maintaining its dominance till 1967 due to following reasons=
(i) The roots of this extraordinary success of the Congress Party go back to the legacy of the
freedom struggle. Congress was seen as inheritor of the national movement. Many leaders who were in
forefront of the struggle were now contesting elections as Congress candidates.
(ii) The Congress Party was supported by elites, educated business classes and middle classes
people. It also got support from peasants because of its socialist nature.
(iii) It had many popular faces like Jawaharlal Nehru, C Rajagopalachari, Vallabhbhai Patel, etc.
Moreover, Jawaharlal Nehru was charismatic and very popular leader.
(iv) Congress worked at upper level as well as at grassroot level. Congress was popularised due to
the participation in civil disobedience movement.
(v) During period of Nehruji, Congress attained mass popularity, but the powerful narrow elite of
congress confined to benefit from the low level of political consciousness of the electorate.
(vi) The traditional loyalities made Congress a one-party dominance.
Q.31- Why were the general elections of 1967 called as the political earthquake for Congress? Explain?
Ans - The general elections of 1967 called as the political earthquake for Congress party. The results of
1967 elections jolted the Congress at both the national and state level. Congress managed to get majority
in the Lok Sabha but with its lowest tally of seats and share of votes since 1952. The
reasons behind this were-
(i) The Fourth General Election held in 1967 was the first election to be held without Jawaharlal Nehru.
(ii) Congress was dominant party before 1967, but scenario was likely to change after 1967’s election.
Several non-Congress parties joined together to bring Congress down. They realised that their
disintegration kept Congress in power. So, they joined to form a big alliance called Samyukt Vidhayak Dal.
(iii) Congress still managed to win in Lok Sabha election, but with the poorest performance ever.
Congress lost in many states and influential leaders of Congress lost their positions.
(iv) Many Congress leaders left the party in order to join the other party. Local politics gained
momentum. Defection and coalition played an important role and new elements were in the scene of
electoral politics.
Q.32- Discuss the major issues which led to the formal split of the Congress Party in 1969?
Ans - Three major events that led to the formal split in the Congress Party in 1969 were as follows
(i) The political tension inside the Congress over the unsettled question of relation between its
ministerial and organisation wings became more pronounced. Indira Gandhi had acquired a certain
control over the government but after the blow suffered by the Syndicate in 1967 elections, she had
hardly any organisational base in the party. The veteran leader wanted that Indira should not interfere in
party affairs.
(ii) After retirement of Kamaraj as party President at the end of 1967, the other members of party foiled
Indira Gandhi’s attempt to have her own men elected to succeed him. But Nijalingappa was
elected and none of the Indira Gandhi’s men were elected to the new working committee. She did not
want to harm the unity of the party and the existence of her government by creating a conflict with the
organisational wing, as the party enjoyed only a small majority in Lok Sabha.
(iii) Indira Gandhi adopted a radical ten-point programme which included social control of banks,
nationalisation of 14 private banks and abolition of the privy purse or the special privileges given to
former princes. The Congress divided into two factions, one was right and second was left. Left attacked
on Morarji Desai as the representative of big business houses. The defeat of the Congress formalised the
split in the party. The Congress President expelled the Prime Minister from the party. Indira Gandhi
claimed that her group was the real Congress.
Q.33- Analyse the issue “Indira vs the Syndicate”? What type of challenges did the issue pose before
Indira Gandhi? 6
Ans - Indira vs Syndicate:-
(i) The real challenge to Indira Gandhi came not only from the opposition but from within her own party.
Indira Gandhi had to deal with the ‘syndicate’, a group of powerful and influential leaders from within the
Congress.
(ii) The Syndicate had played a role in the installation of Indira Gandhi as the Prime Minister by ensuring
her election as a leader of the Parliamentary party, but Syndicate wanted to control after they managed to
make her the Prime Minister.
Challenges faced by Indira Gandhi

(i) She needed to build her independence from the Syndicate.
(ii) She needed to work to regain the ground, the Congress had lost in the 1967elections.
(iii) Indira Gandhi adopted a very bold strategy. She converted a simple power struggle into an
ideological struggle.
(iv)She launched a series of initiatives and a Ten Point Programme, included social control of banks,
nationalisation of general insurance, ceiling on urban property and income
DEMOCRATIC RESURGENCE
Introduction:
The events that took place between 1973 and 1975 posed new challenges to the balance between India’s
democratic politics and the institutional balance by constitution.
These developments led to the imposition of ‘emergency’ in June 1975.
Background of Emergency
➢ Indira Gandhi had emerged as a towering leader with tremendous popularity.
➢ Party competition during this period become bitter and polorised.
➢ The relationship between the government and the judiciary were tensed.
➢ The supreme court found many initiatives of the government to be violative of the constitution.
➢ The congress termed this stand of the court as against the principles of democracy and
parliamentary supremacy.
➢ The opposition left that politics was personalized and that governmental authority was converted
in to personal authority.
Economy context:
➢ In the 1971 elections, the congress gave the slogan of ‘Garibi Hatao’ but there was no significant
improvement in the socio-economic condition of the country.
➢ The Bangladesh crisis had put a heavy strain on India’s economy. It was followed by war with
Pakistan.
➢ The U.S. government stopped all aid to India.
➢ In the international market, oil prices increased manifold during this period.
➢ Industrial growth was low and unemployment was very high, particularly in the rural areas.
➢ The government reduce expenditure and froze the salaries of its employees.
➢ Monsoons was failed in 1972-73. This resulted in a sharp decline in agricultural productivity.
➢ There was an atmosphere of dissatisfaction in the whole country regarding the prevailing economic
condition.
➢ In such a context opposition parties were able to organize popular protests effectively.
➢ Students unrest in this period.
➢ The Marxist group also launched arms struggle to overthrow the capitalist order and established
political system.
Gujrat and Bihar movements:
Protest in Gujrat:
➢ In January 1974 students in Gujrat started an agitation against rising prices of essential
commodities and corruption.
➢ Major opposition parties joined the students protest and became widespread leading to the
imposition of president’s rule in the state.
➢ The opposition parties demands fresh elections.
➢ Morarji Desai, a prominent leader of congress (o), who was the main rival of Indira Gandhi. He was
announcement to go on an indefinite fast if fresh elections were not held in the state.
➢ Under intense pressure from student and opposition parties, assembly elections were held in Gujrat
in June 1975 and congress was defeated in this election.
Protest in Bihar:
➢ In march 1974 students in Bihar to protest against rising prices, food scarcity, unemployment and
corruption.
➢ Students invited Jayaprakash Narayan (JP) to lead their movement.
➢ JP was accepted it on the condition that the movement will remain non-violent and will not limit
itself to Bihar.
➢ The student’s movement assumed a political character and had nation appeal.
➢ JP demanded the dismissal of congress government in Bihar.
➢ He called ‘Total Revolution’ in the social, economic and political spheres for establishing true
democracy.
➢ A series of bandhs, gehraos and strikes were organized in protest against the Bihar government.
➢ Jayprakash wanted to spread the Bihar movement to other parts of the country.
➢ Alongside the agitation led by Jayprakash Narayan, a nationwide strike by all employees’ the
railways was led by the George Fernandes.
➢ In 1975, JP led a people march to the parliament. This was one of the largest political rallies ever
held the capital.
➢ The Gujrat and Bihar agitations were seen as anti-congress.
The Naxalite movement:
➢ In 1967 a peasant uprising took place in the Naxalbari police station area of Darjeeling hills district
in west Bengal. Under the leadership of the local cadres of the communist party of India [Marxist].
➢ Beginning from the Naxalbari police station, the peasant movement spread to several states of India
and came to be referred broadly as the Naxalite movement.
➢ In 1969, Naxalist broke off from the CPI(M) and a new party, communist party [Marxist-Leninist]
(CPI-ML) was formed under the leadership of Charu Majumdar.
➢ Naxalites argued that democracy in India was a sham mand decided to adopt a strategy of
protracted guerrilla warfare in order to lead to a revolution.
➢ The Naxalite movement has used force to snatch land from rich landowners and give it to the poor
and the landless.
➢ Its supporter advocated the use of violet means to achieve their political goals.
➢ The Naxalite movement split into various parties and organization.
➢ Many districts in nine states are affected by Naxalite violence.
➢ Most of these are very backward areas inhabited by Adivasis.
➢ In these areas the sharecroppers, under tenants and small cultivators were denied their basic right
with regard to security of tenure of their share in produce payment of fair wages.
➢ Forced labour, expropriation of resources by outsiders and exploitation by moneylenders are
common in these areas.
➢ These conditions lead to the growth of the Naxalite movement.
➢ Government have taken stern measures in dealing with the Naxalite movement.
Conflict with judiciary:
Three constitutional issues had emerged in this period –
i. The parliament to abridge fundamental right.
ii. Parliament can abridge the right to property making an amendment.
iii. The parliament abridge fundamental right to give effect to the directive principles.
➢ All these issues were struck down by the supreme court.
➢ This led to a crisis as far as the relations between the government and the judiciary were concerned.
➢ This crisis culminated in the Kesavananda Bharti case.
➢ In this case the court gave a decision that there are some basic features of the constitution and the
parliament cannot amend these features.
➢ Two developments further added to the tension between the judiciary and the executive.
➢ In India, it was a practice to make the senior most judge of the supreme court the chief justice, but
in 1973 the government set aside the seniority of three judges and appointed justice Ajit Nath Ray
as the chief justice of India.
➢ A state’s high court declared Indira Gandhi’s election invalid.
Declaration of Emergency :
➢ On 12th June 1975, the Allahabad high court declared Indira Gandhi’s election invalid.
➢ This petition was filed by Raj Narain, a socialist challenging. Indira Gandhi’s election as invalid as
she has used government machinery for election campaign.
➢ The high court declared her election as invalid so legally she was, no more an MP and therefore, she
could not remain the prime minister unless once again elected as an MP within six months.
➢ On June 24, the supreme court a partial stay on the high court order.
Crisis and response:
➢ The opposition political parties led Jayaprakash Narayan organized a massive demonstration in
Ram Leela grounds on 25th June, 1975 for resignation of Indira Gandhi.
➢ JP announced a nationwide satyagraha for her resignation and asked the army, the police and
government employees not to obey ‘illegal immoral order’
➢ Indira Gandhi’s government respond to this crisis by declaring a state of emergency.
➢ On 25th June, 1975 the government declared that there was threat of internal disturbances and
therefore, she imposed emergency under article 352 of the constitution [During the emergency,
Indian constitution provided its special powers to union government.]
➢ Once on emergency is proclaimed, the federal distribution of power remains practically suspended
and all the powers get concentrated in union government.
➢ Government also gets power to restrict all or any of the fundamental right during the emergency.
➢ Emergency is seen as an extraordinary condition in which normal democratic politics cannot
function.
➢ On the night of 25th June 1975, the prime minister recommended the imposition of emergency to
president Fakhruddin Ali Ahmed.
➢ He issued the proclamation immediately.
➢ The electricity was disconnected for all major newspaper offices.
➢ A large number of leaders and worker of the opposition parties were arrested.
Consequences:
➢ With imposition of emergency, agitation and strikes were banned.
➢ Many opposition leaders were put in Jail and political atmosphere become quiet but little tense as
well.
➢ The government suspended the freedom of the press.
➢ ‘Newspapers were asked to get prior approval for all material to be published, this known as press
censorship.
➢ Apprehending social and communal disharmony, the government banned Rashtriya Swayansevak
sangh (RSS) and Jamait-e-Islam.
➢ Protest, trikes and public agitation’s were also disallowed.
➢ Under the provisions of emergency the various fundamental rights of citizens stood suspended
including the right of citizens to move the court for restoring.
➢ The government made extensive use of preventive detention, under this provision people are
arrested and detained not because they have committed any offence, but on the apprehension that
they may commit an offence.
➢ Using this acts government arrested political workers, they could not challenge their arrest through
habeas carpus petitions.
➢ Many cases were brought by and on behalf of arrested individuals in the high courts and supreme
court, but the government contended that it was not even necessary to tell the arrested individuals
of the reason and grounds for their arrest.
➢ Several high courts have ruled that a writ of habeas corpus field by a person challenging his or her
detention can be heard even after the proclamation of emergency.
➢ The constitution bench of the supreme court over ruled the high courts in April 1976 and approved
the government’s plea.
➢ It meant that the government may take away a citizen’s right to life and liberty during the
emergency.
➢ This judgement closed the doors of judiciary for the citizens and is regarded as one of the most
controversial judgements of the supreme court.
➢ Many journalists were arrested for writing against the emergency.
➢ Kannada writer Shivarama karanth, awarded with Padma Bhushan, Hindi writer Fanishwarnath
Renu awarded with Padma Shri, returned their awards in protest against the suspension of
democracy.
➢ In the background of the ruling of the Allahabad high court the parliament brought in many changes
to the constitution.
➢ An amendment was made declaring that election of prime minster, president and vice-present could
not be challenged in the court.
➢ The 42nd amendment was passed during the emergency, in this amendment consisted of a series of
changes in many parts of the constitution.
➢ By this amendment that the duration of the legislature in the country was extended from five to six
years.
➢ This change was not only for emergency period but was intended to be of a permanent nature.
➢ During emergency election can be postpended by one year.
Consequences of Emergency
Many opposition leaders were arrested and sent to jail.
Protest, Strikes and public agitations were also banned.
The political situation in the country became very quiet though tense.
Government imposed censorship on press. Newspaper was asked to get prior approval for all material to
be published.
The Government banned R.S.S. and Jamait -e-Islami .
The various Fundamental right of citizen were also suspended.
The Government made extensive use of preventive detention.
During emergency government passed 42nd Constitution amendment was made declaring that election of
Prime-minister, President and vice president could not be challenged in the court.
Controversies regarding Emergency
Emergency is one of the most controversial episodes in Indian politics. The Government declared
emergency on ground of “Internal disturbance”
Was the Emergency necessary ?
The Constitution simply mentioned ‘internal disturbances’ as the reason for declaring Emergency.
Government’s Arguments ( favor of Emergency)
The government argued that in a democracy the opposition must allow the elected ruling party to govern
according to its policies. Frequent agitation, protests and collective action are not good democracy.
Continuous agitations, demonstrations and strikes lead to instability and distract day today
administration and development.
CPI supported emergency and said that there was an international conspiracy against the unity of India.
Supporter of Indira Gandhi said the opposition cannot continuously have extra-parliamentary politics
targeting the government.
Arguments against the government
In a democracy people have right to criticize and protest against the government.
People those were arrested were never tried for any anti-national activities.
The threat was not to the unity and integrity of the country but to the ruling parties and to the prime
minister herself. There was no need to suspend democratic functioning and use draconian measures like
the Emergency.
Shah Commission
In May 1977, the Janata Party government appointed a commission of inquiry
headed by Justice J.C. Shah, retired Chief justice of Supreme Court of India, to
enquiry “into several aspects of allegations of abuse of authority , excesses
and malpractices committed and action taken in the wake of the Emergency
proclaimed on the 25th June 1975.
What happened during Emergency?

The government said that it wanted to use the emergency.
To bring law and order
To restore efficiency
To implement the proper welfare programmes.
For this purpose Indira Gandhi Government announced a twenty point programme.
Land reform
Land redistribution
Review of agricultural wages
Workers participation in management
Eradication of bonded labours.
Nearly one lakh eleven thousand people were arrested under preventive detention laws. Restrictions
under preventive detention laws.
Death and torture in custody.
A large number of poor people were displaced.
Compulsory sterilization for population control.
Several restriction on press.
Serious allegation regarding the exercise of government power by people who held no official position.
Lesson of the Emergency
It is extremely difficult to do away with democracy in India.
It brought out some ambiguities regarding the emergency provision in the constitution. Now Internal
Emergency can be proclaimed only on the ground of armed rebellion and it is necessary that the advice
to the president to proclaim emergency must be given in writing by the Council of ministers.
The Emergency made everyone more aware of the value of civil liberties.
Politics after Emergency

After the eighteen month of emergency election were held in 1977.
The opposition parties fought the election on the slogan of “Save Democracy”
Opposition parties contest the election collectively
They came together and formed a new party named “Janata Party”
Janata Party – Jay prakash Narayan was the leader of Janata Party
Some leaders came out from congress and formed a separate party under the
leadership of Jagjiven Ram, named congress for democracy. Later it was merged with Janata Party
Result of Election
For the first time since independence, the congress party was defeated in Lok Sabha.
Congress could win only 154 seats in the Loksabha.
Its share of votes fells to less than 35 percent.
Janata party and its allies won 330 out of the 542 seats in the Lok Sabha.
Congress party could not win even one seat in Bihar, UP, Delhi, Harayana, and the Punjab and could only
one seat win in Rajasthan and MP.
Indira Gandhi and her son Sanjay Gandhi were defeated.
Janata Government
The janata party government came to power after 1977 elections.
There was competition among three leaders for the post of Prime Minister Morarji Desai, Charan singh,
and Jagjivan Ram.
Morarji Desai became Prime Minister.
Janata party lacked direction, leadership and a common programme.
It could not bring fundamental change in policies.
The Janta party split and lost its majority in less than 18 months.
Charan Singh formed government but it also lost majority within 4 months.
In 1980 election took place again, congress party led by Indira Gandhi won the election
Legacy
The legacy of emergency was felt in every sphere of people’s life and politics
Between the election of 1977 and 1980, Congress identified itself with particular ideology, claiming to be
only socialist and pro-poor party.
The issue of welfare of backward classes began to dominate politics i.e northern states elected non –
congress leader of backward class since 1977.
This period of emergency saw the period of constitutional crisis to lose its origin in constitutional battle
over jurisdiction of parliament and judiciary.
This period created political crisis also as the party in power enjoyed absolute majority, still decided to
suspend the democratic process.
The emergency tensed between institutions based democracy and democracy based on spontaneous
popular participation for which party system was to be blamed.
1 Mark Questions
Question 1. Name the political party which came to power at the centre in 1977.
a) Congress party b) janata party c) Left party d) Socialist party
Q.2. Match the following

a) Total revolution i) Indira Gandhi
b) Garibi Hatao ii) Jayaprakash Narayan
c) Students protest iii) Bihar Movement
d) Railway Strike iv) George Fernandes
a ) ii b) I c) iii d) iv
Q.3. Find the odd one out in the context of proclamation of Emergency .
a) The call for ‘Total Revolution’
b) The railway strike of 1974
c) The Naxalite movement
d) The Allahabad High court verdict
e) The findings of the shah Commission Report
Q.4. In which year internal emergency was declared by Smt. Indira Gandhi?
(a) 1965
(b) 1971
(c) 1975
(d) 1980
Q.5. Who became the Prime Minister after 1977 Lok Sabha election result ?
a) Chaudhary Charan singh b) Moraraji Desai c) Indira gandhi d) Jagjivan Ram
Q.6. Which Commission investigate abuse of authority during emergency .
a) Charan aayog b) Shah aayog c) Vajpai aayog d) none of the above
Q.7. The Bihar movement was led by.
a) Jay Prakash Narayan B) JC Shah c) Bindeshwari mandal d) None of the above
Q.8. The congress was defeated Loksabha election of .
a) 1960 b) 1977 c) 1980 d) 1971
Q.9.Through which article of the constitution. Government declared emergency in 1975.
a) 352 b) 356 c) 377 d) 360
Q.10 The railway strike 1974 was called by…………………led by Geogre Fernandes
a) National Coordination committee
b)National Coordination samiti
c) National Coordination Counsil
d) National movement of India
Very short Questions
Question 11. Mention the main reason for the defeat of Congress Party in the election of 1977?
Answer: The main reason for the defeat of Congress party was declaration of emergency by the then
Prime Minister and anti-democratic nature of their government.
Question 12. Who led the Railway Strike in 1974? What was its main demand?
Answer: Railway Strike of 1974 was led by George Fernandes. Its main demand was related to
bonus and service conditions.
Question 13. Students of which two states started agitation against the rising food
prices in 1974?
Answer: The students Gujarat and Bihar started agitation against the rising food
prices in 1974.
Question 14. Why did the magazines like ‘Seminar’ and ‘Mainstream’ choose to close down after the
declaration of emergency in 1975?
Answer: They choose to close down after the declaration of emergency of 1975 due to censorship of
press. Question 15. Who was Charu Majumdar?
Answer: Charu Majumdar was the leader of the Naxalbari uprising. He was the founder of Communist
Party of India (Marxist-Leninist). He adopted guerrilla warfare.
Short type Question
Question 16. Describe any two outcomes of the Naxalite movements,
Answer: Two outcomes of the Naxalite movements were:

• Naxalite movement, particularly, strong in West Bengal spread to the different parts of India.
Nine states had been affected by their activities.
• Human right activist alleged government for using violence and harsh measures against them
and criticized government for violating the Constitution.
Question 17. How many Lok Sabha seats were won by the Janata Party and its allies in the General
Elections of March 1977?
Answer: Janata Party and its allies won 330 out of 542 seats in the Lok Sabha. Janata Party itself won 295
seats.
Question 18. What was Naxalite movement?
Answer: Marxist-Leninist group of people, believed in violent means to achieve their goals. They
distributed the land to landless peasant after forcefully taking it away from rich landlords. This
movement was known as Naxalite movement.
Question 19.Match the following meaningfully from the names in Column ‘A’ with the information in
Column ‘B’:
Column A Column B
(i) Indira Gandhi (a) A Member of Parliament
from 1952 till his death
(ii) Ram Manohar Lohia (b) Symbol of opposition during
the emergency of 1975
(iii) Jai Prakash Narayan (c) Nationalization of banks
(iv) Jagjiwan Ram (d) Best known for his sharp
Answer:
Column A Column B
(i) Indira Gandhi (c) Nationalization of banks

(ii) Ram Manohar Lohia (d) Best known for his sharp
(iii) Jai Prakash Narayan (b) Symbol of opposition during
the emergency of 1975
(iv) Jagjiwan Ram (a) A Member of Parliament
from 1952 till his death
Question 20. Match the following in Column ‘A’ with those in Column ‘B’ in a meaningful way :
Column A Column B
(i) Head of the (a) Choudhary Charan Singh

commission of Enquiry
of abuse use of authority
during emergency
(ii) Deputy Prime (b) Jagjiwan Ram
Minister of India from
(iii) 1967 to 1969 (c) JC Shah
Deputy Prime
1977 – 79
(iv) Union Minister of (d) Morarji Desai
India from 1952 – 1977
Answer
Column A Column B
(i) Head of the (c) JC Shah

commission of Enquiry
of abuse use of authority
during emergency
(ii) Deputy Prime (d) Morarji Desai
(iii) 1967 to 1969 (a) Choudhary Charan Singh
Deputy Prime
1977 – 79
(iv) Union Minister of (b) Jagjiwan Ram
India from 1952 – 1977
Question 21. What was ‘Shah Commission of Inquiry’? How did the government react to it?
Answer: Shah Commission was a commission appointed by the Janata Party government in 1977 to
inquire into several aspects of allegations of abuse of authority, excesses and malpractices committed in
the wake of the emergency.
The Government of India accepted the findings, observations and recommendations contained in
the two interim reports.
Question 22. Mention any two reasons due to which Janata Party won the election of 1977?
Answer: The two reasons were :

• The non-democratic character of the Congress during emergency.
• The public opinion was against the Congress which led to Janata Party win in 1977
4 Marks Questions
Question 23. How did Janata Party make the 1977 elections into a referendum on the emergency
imposed in 1975? Explain.
Answer: Janata Party made the election of 1977 into a referendum on the emergency imposed in 1975
in following ways:
i)Janata Party’s campaign was focused on the non-democratic character of the rule and on the
various excesses that took place during this period.
ii)In the backdrop of arrests of thousands of persons and the censorship of the press, the
public opinion was against the Congress.
iii)Jai Prakash Narayan who led the party became the popular symbol of restoration of democracy.
iv)The party ensured that non-Congress votes would not be divided.
Question 24. Explain the reasons for the student's movement of 1974 in Bihar and role played by Jai
Prakash Narayan in this movement.
Answer: Reasons for the student's movement of 1974 in Bihar are following
i)Rising prices of food grains, cooking oil and other essential commodities and corruption in high
places.
ii) There was demand for fresh elections to the State Legislature.
Role played by Jai Prakash Narayan in this movement is stated in the points below:
1. He demanded the dismissal of the Congress Government in Bihar and gave a call for total
revolution in the social, economic and political spheres.
2. In 1975, he led a peoples’ march to the Parliament.
Question 25..Evaluate the consequences of declaration of emergency in 1975.
Answer: Consequences of emergency were:

• Fundamental Rights were suspended.
• The power of Judiciary was limited.
• Press was censored.

• All the power were concentrated in the hands of Union Government.
• Civil liberties of the citizens were taken away.
Important lessons learnt from emergency are:

3. Several changes to Constitution came into existence e.g., election of Prime Minister,
President and Vice-President could not be challenged in the Supreme Court.
4. Provision of emergency was rectified too internal emerge could only be proclaimed
on the basis of armed rebellion after President’s formal announcement on the advice
of Council of Ministers.
Question 25. What reasons, do you think, were responsible for the declaration of emergency in 1975?
Examine any two reasons.
Answer: The circumstances which led to the proclamation of emergency were (any four):
1.Bihar and Gujarat’s movement created an unrest in the country. Students were protesting against
the price rise and against the established government in these states. Congress as ruling party failed
to handle these protests. Leadership by influential leaders further gave them a momentum against
government.
2.Increases in Naxalite activities against government and violent nature troubled the government.
Naxalite had an anti-government view. Even harsh measures by government could not stop them.
3.George Fernandes gave a call for nationwide strike to all the railway men. Their demands were
suppressed by the government. Shut down of such a big institution created havoc in the country.
4.Declaration of Indira Gandhi’s 1971 election invalid was a last straw. Jai Prakash Narayan
organised a massive demonstration demanding her resignation. The situation was tense and
emergency was declared on 25th June, 1975.
5.Call of complete revolution by Jai Prakash Narayan and unexpected people movement in Delhi.
6.Jai Prakash Narayan announced a nationwide satyagraha for resignation and asked the army,
the police and government employees not to obey ‘illegal and immoral orders.’
Question 26. Why is the ‘emergency’ and the period around it known as the period of constitutional
crisis? Explain.
Answer: The emergency and the period around it can be described as a period of constitutional crisis
because it had its origin in the constitutional battle over the Jurisdiction of the Parliament and the
judiciary.
During emergency government gets extra powers. It gains the power to suspend the Fundamental Rights
of the citizens. Measures like preventive detention could be used by government. Right to move the court
for the restoration of Fundamental Rights were taken away.
It was also a period of political crisis because the party in power had absolute majority and yet, its
leadership decided to suspend the democratic process.
6 Marks Questions
Question 27. Examine the conditions responsible for the growth of Naxalite movement in India. Suggest
ways and means to crush it.
Answer: Naxalite movement is a kind of guerrilla groups in India, mostly associated with the Communist
Party of India (Maoist). The term Naxal derives from the name of the village Naxalbari in West Bengal,
where the movement had its origin.
Naxalite Movement in India In
1967, a peasant uprising took place in the Naxalbari police station area of Darjeeling hills (West
Bengal).
The Communists argued that democracy in India was a shame and decided to adopt a strategy of
protracted guerrilla warfare in order to lead to a revolution.
Role of Naxalite Movement in Indian Politics

Naxalite movement gave impetus to the demand of equal distribution of land. Their demand is
region specific and they have rejuvenated the tribal movements in India. Due to such movement's
separatism has become a burning issue.
Their violent nature has posed risk on the socio-economic-politic structure of India.
Measures to Control
Socio-economic issues should be solved in region specific manner keeping in view that India is a
land of diversity and
nature of problems varies from region to region.
There should be strong political will to keep away regionalism and separatism from politics.
Question 28. Why is emergency considered to be one of the most controversial episodes in Indian
politics?
Answer: Emergency is one of the most controversial episodes in Indian politics. There are varying
assessments of the need and lessons learnt from the emergency:
Condition of Emergency
The Constitution simply mentioned ‘internal disturbances’ as the reason for declaring emergency.
Before 1975, emergency was never proclaimed on this ground. The government argued that in a
democracy, the opposition parties must allow the elected ruling party to govern according to its policies.
It felt that frequent recourse to agitations, protests and collective action are not good for democracy.
Supporters of Indira Gandhi also held that in a democracy, you cannot continuously have extra-
parliamentary politics targeting the government. This leads to instability and distracts the
administration from its routine task of ensuring development.
On the other hand, the critics of the emergency argued that ever since the freedom movement, Indian
politics had a history of popular struggles. JP and many other opposition leaders felt that in a
democracy, people had the right to publicly protest against the government. The Bihar and Gujarat
agitations were mostly peaceful and non-violent.
Assessment of Emergency
Most of promises by the government remained unfulfilled, that these, were simply meant to divert
attention from the excesses that were taking place. They question the use of preventive detention
on such a large scale.
The Shah Commission estimated that nearly one lakh eleven thousand people were arrested under
preventive detention laws. Severe restrictions were put on the press, sometimes without proper legal
sanctions.
Lessons of Emergency
11. It is extremely difficult to remove democracy from India.
12. It brought out some ambiguities regarding the emergency provision in the Constitution that have
been rectified since. Now, ‘Internal’ emergency can be proclaimed only on the grounds of ‘armed
rebellion’ and it is necessary that the advice to the President to proclaim emergency must be given
in writing by the Council of Minister.
13. The emergency made everyone more aware of the value of civil liberties. The Courts too, have
taken an active role after the emergency in protecting the civil liberties of the individuals.
14. The actual implementation of the emergency rule took place through the police and the
administration. These institutions could not function independently. They were turned into
political instruments of the ruling party.
Question 29. What were the major conflicts between the Parliament and the Judiciary during the
leadership of Indira Gandhi?
Answer: This period also witnessed tensions in the relationship between the Parliament and the
Judiciary. The major conflicts between the Parliament and Judiciary during the leadership of Indira
Gandhi were:
i)On the issue of Fundamental Right and right to property, the Supreme Court denied the
amendment to Constitution. While on the issue of Fundamental Right giving effect to Directive
principles, Parliament amended the Constitution, but later Supreme Court rejected it.
ii)Court gave a decision that there are some basic features of the Constitution and the Parliament
cannot amend these basic features. This created tension between parliament and jucidiary.
iii)Tension between judiciary and executive further expanded, when a vacancy arose of the post
of Chief Justice of India. As per the constitutional rule, senior-most judge of the Supreme Court
should be appointed as Chief Justice of India in case of vacancy. But in 1973 government ignored
the seniority of three judges and appointed Ajit Nath Ray as Chief Justice of India.
iv)Appointment became a topic of tension. Government’s decision was questioned by the three
judges who were superseded.
People were talking about the need of a judiciary and bureaucracy which would be committed to
the plan of executive and legislature. Highest point in controversy came when High Court
declared Indira Gandhi’s election invalid.
Picture Based Question
Question 30. Study the cartoon given below carefully and answer the following questions
(i) Identify and name the person holding in his hand , the placard ‘Save Democracy’.
(ii) In your opinion, the group of five persons belongs to which political party?
(iii) According to the group of five, what are the intentions of the person sitting on ‘Dharna’?
(iv) Which issues responsible for the downfall of democracy are highlighted in the
cartoon?
Answer:
(i) Jai Prakash Narayan is holding the placard ‘Save Democracy’.
(ii) Congress Party.
(iii) Support democracy, create chaos, grab power.
(iv) The issue responsible for the downfall of democracy highlighted in the cartoon are corruption,
lawlessness, violence, etc.
REGIONAL ASPIRATIONS
Regional Aspirations-
➢ The rising regional aspirations for autonomy often outside the framework of the Indian Union.
➢ These movements frequently involved armed assertions and main aims of these movements was
collapse of the political and electoral processes.
➢ All movements were settled with dialogue between central government and groups leading for
autonomy.
Indian Approach
➢ India adopted a democratic approach in nation building is to balance the principles of unity and
diversity.
➢ The nation would not mean the negation of the region.
➢ The one basic principle of the Indian approach to diversity is, the Indian Nation shall not deny
the rights of different regions and linguistic groups to retain their own culture.
➢ Democratic politics also means that regional issues and problems will receive adequate
attention and accommodation in the policy making process.
➢ India adopted a democratic approach to the question of diversity. Democracy allows the political
expressions of regional aspirations and does not look upon them as anti-national.
➢ After India got Independence many part of India faced mass agitations in Jammu and Kashmir
and some parts of North-East for separation from India.
➢ The mass movement followed the same in many parts for the formation of linguistic states, such
as Karnataka, Maharashtra, Andhra Pradesh and Gujarat.
➢ The official language of the country that is Hindi was protested in some parts of Southern India.
➢ Later the state Chhattisgarh, Jharkhand and Uttrakhand were created and with the passage of
time the challenge of diversity was met by redrawing the internal boundaries of the country.
➢ The success and failure on these cases are instructive not merely for a study of our past, but also
for an understanding of India’s future.
Jammu and Kashmir Issue:-Root of the problem

➢ The ‘Kashmir issue’ is always seen as a major issue between India and Pakistan but the political
situation in the state has many dimensions.
➢ Jammu and Kashmir comprises three social and political regions. Jammu-a mix of foothills and
plains, Kashmir- heart of Kashmir region; Ladakh -mountainous region with very little
population which is equally divided between Buddhists and Muslims.
➢ Before 1947, Jammu and Kashmir was a Princely State. The state was having majority population
of Muslims but Hari Singh was a Hindu ruler of the state.
➢ In October 1947, Pakistan sent tribal infiltrators from its side to capture Kashmir. This forced
Hari Singh to ask for Indian military help. Before the same he didn’t want to merge with India
and Pakistan and negotiate with both for independence status for his state.
➢ Indian Army successfully drove out infiltrators from Kashmir valley and Hari Singh signed an
Instrument of Accession with the Government of India.
➢ Instrument of Accession: An accord signed between Maharaja of Kashmir and government of
India on the accession of state.
➢ It was agreed that once the situation will be normalised, the views of the people of Jammu and
Kashmir will be ascertained about their future and India agreed to maintain the autonomy of
Jammu and Kashmir.
➢ The popular movement was led by Jawahar lal Nehru’s friend Sheikh Abdullah of the National
Conference(a secular organisation) get rid of Maharaja Hari Singh but against joining Pakistan.
➢ Friend Sheikh Abdullah was become the prime minister of J & K and this state maintain the
autonomy after India’s agreed.
External and Internal Disputes

➢ Externally, Pakistan has always claimed that Kashmir valley should be part of Pakistan. Pakistan
sponsored a tribal invasion of The State of 1947 and consequence of it, a part of the state came
under Pakistani control.
➢ India claims this area under illegal occupation whereas Pakistan describes this area as ‘Azad
Kashmir.’ Internally, there is a dispute about the status of Kashmir within the Indian Union.
Kashmir was given special status by article 370 in our constitution. Article 370 gives greater
autonomy to J&K compared to other state of India. State has its own constitution.
The special attention provokes two opposite reactions.
➢ A section of people outside J&K believes that the special status of the state conferred by Article
370 does not allow full integration of the state with India but mostly Kashmiris, believe that
autonomy conferred by Article 370 is not enough.
➢ A section of people outside J&K feels that Article 370 should therefore be revoked and J&K
should be like any other state in India.
➢ Another section, Politics Since 1948 Between 1953 and 1974, the Congress Party exercised a lot
of influence on the politics of the state.
➢ National Conference remained in power with the active support of Congress for some time but
later it merged with the Congress. Thus, Congress gained direct control over the government of
the state.
➢ In 1974, Indira Gandhi reached an agreement with Sheikh Abdullah and he became the Chief
Minister of the State. Farooq Abdullah succeeded after death of his father as Chief Minister in
1982.Farooq Abdullah was soon dismissed by the Governor, his dismissal due to the
intervention of the centre generated a feeling of resentment in Kashmir. Ups and down in state
politics continued till 1986 when National Conference agreed to have an Electoral alliance with
the Congress.
Insurgency and Effect

Insurgency: An affair to be directed against one’s own constitutional government within national
boundary with the support of local people.
➢ In 1987 assembly election the National Conference-Congress alliance gained a massive victory
and Farooq Abdullah returned as Chief Minister.
Road to Peace:-Punjab Issue: Demand of Khalistan

➢ In 1984, the new Prime Minister Rajiv Gandhi initiated a dialogue with moderate Akali leaders
and in July 1985 a peace agreement was signed between Rajiv Gandhi and Harchand Singh
Longowal (the President of Akali Dal).
➢ The agreement known as Rajiv Gandhi- Longowal Accord or the Punjab Accord.
➢ Khalistan: A separate state of Sikh community to maintain the autonomous Sikh identity in
Punjab region.
➢ Operation Blue Star: A code name for army action in Golden Temple in June 1984 by Government
of India when Sikh militants made their headquarters inside Golden Temple. Indian army
forcefully went inside the Golden temple with tank and killed Khalistani or Bhindrawale’s
Supporters.
➢ On 31 Oct 1984 Indira Gandhi was assassinated by her Sikh security gourds.
➢ After this incident riots spread in North India against Sikhs.
➢ The cycle of violence continued nearly for a decade and peace returned to Punjab by the middle
of 1990s. The alliance of Akali Dal (Badal) and the BJP scored a major victory in 1997, in the first
normal elections in the state in the post militancy era.
The North-East Issue
➢ The North-East region of the country now consists of seven states, also referred to as the ‘seven
sister’ including Assam, Manipur, Nagaland, Tripura, Meghalaya, Mizoram, Arunachal Pradesh.
➢ The region witnessed a lot of change in 1947. The Entire region of North-East has undergone
considerable political re-organization.
➢ The vast international border and weak communication between the North-East and the rest of
India have added to the delicate nature of politics there.
➢ Three issues dominate the politics of North¬East: demands for autonomy, movements for
secession and opposition to ‘outsiders,’
Demands for Autonomy
➢ At the time of independence the entire region except Manipur and Tripura comprised the State
of Assam.
➢ There were opposition and protest riots throughout the state on various issues.
➢ At different points of time the Central Government had to create Meghalaya, Mizoram and
Arunachal Pradesh out of Assam. The reorganisation of the North-East was completed by 1972.
Secessionist Movements
➢ For autonomy there were secessionist movements in North-East region like Mizoram and
Nagaland etc.
➢ After independence, the Mizo hills area was made an autonomous district within Assam.
➢ Mizo National Front (MNF): It was formed in 1959 by the groups of Mizo under the leadership
of Laldenga for autonomous States of Mizos
➢ Movement for secession gained popular support after the Assam Government ‘failed to respond
adequately to great famine of 1959 in Mizo hills.’ Mizo’s anger led to formation of Mizo National
Front (MNF) under the leadership of Laldenga. MNF fought guerilla war, got support from
Pakistani Government and secured shelter in East Pakistan.
➢ In 1986 a peace agreement was signed between Rajiv Gandhi and Laldenga. This accord granted
Mizoram as full-fledged statehood with special powers, and MNF agreed to give up secessionist
struggle. Thus, the accord turn Mizoram as one of the most peaceful places in the region.
➢ The story of Nagaland is similar to Mizoram except that started much earlier and had not yet
such a happy ending.
➢ After a section of violent insurgency a section of the Nagas signed an agreement with the
Government of India but it was not acceptable to other rebels.
Movements against Outsiders

➢ The large scale migration into the North-East gave rise to a special kind of problem that pitted
the ‘local’ communities against people who were seen as ‘outsiders’ or migrants.
➢ The Issue has taken political and sometimes violent form in many states of North- East. The
Assam movement from 1979 to 1985 is the best example of such movements against
‘outsiders’. In 1979, the All Assam Students’ Union (AASU), a students’ group not affiliated to
any party, led an anti-foreigner
Movement.
Movement demanded, outsiders who had entered the state after 1951 should be sent back.
➢ With the successful completion of the movement, the AASU and the Asom Gana Sangram
Parishad organised themselves as a regional political party called Asom Gana Parishad (AGP),
which came to power in 1985 with the promise of resolving the foreign national problem as well
as to build a ‘Golden Assam.’
Sikkim’s Merger
➢ At the time of independence Sikkim was a ‘protectorate (A state that is controlled and protected
by other) of India. Chogyal was its monarch. In 1975, Sikkim was merged with India and it
became the 22nd State of the Indian Union.
Accommodation and National Integration

➢ Regional aspirations are very much a part of democratic politics. Expression of regional issues
is not an aberration or an abnormal phenomenon. The best way to respond to regional
aspirations is through democratic negotiations rather than through suppression. Regional
imbalance in economic development contributes to the feeling of regional discrimination.
Goa’s Liberation
➢ Goa was under the Portuguese along with Daman and Diu, which expected freedom in 1947 but
Portuguese refused. Goa wanted to be merged with motherland and suppressed from religious
conversions and civil rights known as ‘Goa Problem’. In 1961, Government of India sent army
under ‘Operation Vijay’ and liberated Goa from Portugal rule. Goa, Daman and Diu was declared
an Union Territories and in 1987, Goa attained the status of ‘State Position’.
FACTS THAT MATTER

➢ 1. 1980s may be seen as a period of rising regional aspirations creating various regional
movements which conclude in a negotiated settlement or accords between the government’s
groups. Indian approach maintained a balance in the principles of unity and diversity even by
redrawing the internal boundaries of country in response to preserve the culture of different
regions and linguistic groups.
➢ 2. Immediately after independence, India had to cope up with the issues of partition,
displacement, integration of princely states and reorganisation of states i.e. Jammu and Kashmir
issues political aspiration, North-East had no consensus to be a part of India and Dravidian
movement briefly toyed with the idea of separate country.
➢ 3. Jammu and Kashmir comprised of three social and political regions namely Kashmir, Jammu
and Ladakh region. On the issue of regional autonomy, Accession was promised on reference of
people. Special federal status guaranteed by Article 370, to protect regional autonomy.
➢ 4. During most of the period between 1953 to 1974, Congress exercised a lot of influence on the
politics of Jammu and Kashmir. Finally, in 1974, Sheikh became Chief Minister of the state.
Except it, from 1989, separatist politics was also surfaced in Kashmir with the stronger demand
for intrastate autonomy rather than state autonomy. In present scenario, most of separatist in
dialogue are trying to renegotiate a relationship of the state with India.
➢ 5. In Punjab, Anandpur Sahib Resolution was passed at the conference of Akali Dal at Anandpur
Sahib in 1973 to ascertain regional autonomy and to redefine centre-state relationship. It had a
limited appeal and Akali government was dismissed in 1980. Afterwards, the movement
launched by Akali Dal took the form of armed insurgency and resolution became controversial.
➢ 6. In 1985, Punjab accord was signed between Rajiv Gandhi and Harchand Singh Longowal,
President of
➢ Akali Dal to transfer Chandigarh, appointment of a commission to resolve border dispute and
agreement for compensation to better treatment. But peace did not come easily, violence led
many excesses and fragmentation of Akali Dal. Hence, it led to president’s rule in the state. In
1997, first normal elections in Punjab were held in post militancy era and alliance of Akali Dal
and BJP scored a major victory.
➢ 7. The North-East region consisted of seven states referred to as ‘Seven Sisters’. The
reorganisation of
➢ North-East was complete by 1972 but did not end the autonomy demands i.e. Bodos, Karbis,
Dimasas demanded separate state in Assam and issues were resolved with the grant of some
autonomy to these issues. Even ‘Assam Accord’ was signed over the issue of’ Outsiders’ in Assam
in 1985.
➢ 8. The Assam movement was combination of cultural pride and economic backwardness as it
was
➢ Against outsiders to maintain cultural integration and poverty, unemployment also existed
despite natural resources like oil, tea and coal.
➢ 9. Regional aspirations range from demands of statehood and economic development to
autonomy and separation were coming up which taught many lessons to us i.e. expression of
regional issues is not abnormal phenomenon, to respond through democratic negotiations,
power sharing among groups and parties, economic development of region and flexible federal
system.
Very Short Answer Type Questions

Q.1. Jammu Kashmir and Laddhakh are?
(A) State
(B) Union Territory
(C) Separate State
(D) None of the Above
Q.2.When did Rajeev -Laldenga Settlement?
(A)1991
(B)1986
(C)1989
(D) 1983
Q.3. Which operation was introduced in 1984 in Punjab?
(A) Operation Desert
(B)Operation Lotus
(C) Operation Blue Star
(D) Operation Blue Stag
Q.4. Who lead the NDA government I & II?
(A) George Farnadis
(B) Lal Krishan Advani
(C) Dr. Man Mohan singh
(D) Atal Bihari vajpayee
Q.5. When Did Punjab and Haryana separated ?
(A) 1963
(B)1965
(C)1987
(D)1966
Q.6. Which article of Indian Constitution removed which was given special status to this state?
(A) 356
(B)370
(C)368
(D)343
Q.7.Which organisation of Assam led the movement against foreign nationals in 1979?
Answer:
Organisation of Assam which led the movement against foreign nationals in 1979 is All Assam
Students’ Union (AASU).
Q. 8. When did liberate Goa from Portugal rule?
(A)1971
(B)1987
(C)1961
(D)1956
(i) Operation Blue Star.
(ii) State formation of Jharkhand.
(iii) Invaded on Goa.
(iv) Rajeev Gandhi Became Prime Minister
(A) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii)
(B) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii)
(C) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii)
(D) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii)
Q.10. The question below, there are two statements marked as Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Read
Assertion: -Indian government sent army to merger Goa with India .
Reason: - Indian Government thought it was not completed Indian Union without merger of Goa and other
Portuguese territory.
Very Short Answer Type Questions.
Q.1- Why were the seven states created in North India?

Ans.
1- For Economic Development
2- Socio-Cultural Issues
Q.2- Which Student Association led movements against the foreigners in Assam (ASHOM) in 1979?
Ans. All Assam Students Union (AASU)
Q3- What was the slogan of Dravid Movement?
Ans. ‘The North Thrives even as the South decays’
Q.4- What was Operation Blue Star? Why did it hurt the sentiments of the Sikhs?
Ans. It was an army action in the Golden Temple to flush out the militants. Sikh community saw that
operation damaged the historical temple military action as an attack on their faith.
Q.5- Who was Laldenga?

Ans.
1- He was the leader of Mozo Nationa Front.
2- He started armed campaign for independent nation.
3- A Peace Agreement was signed between Rajiv Gandhi and Laldenga.
4- This agreement granted statehood to Mizoram with special powers.
Q.6- What was AASU?

Ans.
1- AASU was a student Organisation in Assam.
2- It was independent.
3- Not supported by Political Party.
4- Main demand was deport the foreigners.
Q.7- Who was Angami Zapo Phizo?

Ans. He was leader of Nagaland freedom movement. He was chairman of Naga National Council. He want
that Indian Government to make Nagaland a separate country.
Q.8- What was Rajiv-Longowal Accord?

1- Punjab Accord is known as Rajiv-Longowal Agreement.
2- Separate commission was appointed to resolve Border Disputes between Punjab and Haryana.
3- Chandigarh should be transferred to Punjab.
4- Share water of river Ravi-Beas, A Tribunal had to be set up between Punjab-Haryana-Rajasthan
(P-H-R).
Q.9- Why and how did Mizo Movement for secession gain popular support?
Ans. A great famine struck in Mizo hills. Assam government failed to respond adequately to the famine.
Short Answer Type Questions.

Q.1- Explain the problems of Goa?
Ans.
1- Goa and Daman & Diu were under the Portuguese since 16 Century.
2- When India was expecting freedom, Portuguese refused to withdraw rule whereas the people of
Goa wanted to merge in India.
3- People of Goa were suppressed by religious conversion and civil rights known as ‘Goa Problem’.
4- Goa and Daman & Diu get liberated from the Portuguese rule through ‘Operation Vijay’.
5- Goa became a part of India and got ‘State Position’ in 1987.
Q.2- When did India first use referendum procedure?
Ans.
1- The Government held a ‘Special Opinion Poll’ in Goa.
2- People decided it they wanted to be part of Maharashtra.
3- The majority was in favour of remaining outside Maharashtra, Goa became a Union Territory.
4- Goa was granted statehood in 1987.
Q.3- Why did Anandpur Sahib Resolution become controversial?
Ans.
1- Distribution of water between Punjab and neighbouring states.
2- Akali government lost importance.
3- Akali government dismissed in 1980.
4- Movement went from moderate Akalis to Extrimist Akalis.
Q.4- What was Punjab Accord?
Ans.
5- Punjab Accord is known as Rajiv-Longowal Agreement.
6- Separate commission was appointed to resolve Border Disputes between Punjab and Haryana.
7- Chandigarh should be transferred to Punjab.
8- Share water of river Ravi-Beas, A Tribunal had to be set up between Punjab-Haryana-Rajasthan
(P-H-R).
9- Armed Forces should be withdrawn through Armed Forces Special Power Act in Punjab.
10- To provide compensation agreement for better treatment.
Q.5- Which communities wanted separate states in North-East Region?
Ans.
1- Bodos, Karbis and Dimosas demanded separate states.
2- They mobilised public opinion and popular movement.
3- Federal setup satisfied their autonomy.
4- Karbis and Dimosas were granted autonomy under District Councils.
5- Bodos were recentrly granted autonomous council.
Que.6. Mention any three area of tension which are yet to be solved to retain the concept of unity in
diversity?
Ans. respect diversity- Areas of tension-

We have seen immediately after Independence our nation had to cope with many difficult issues
like Partition, displacement, integration of Princely States, reorganisation of states and so on. Many
observers, both within the country and from outside, had predicted that India as one unified country
cannot last long. Soon after Independence, the issue of Jammu and Kashmir came up. It was not only
a conflict between India and Pakistan. More than that, it was a question of the political aspirations of
the people of Kashmir valley. Similarly, in some parts of the north-east, there was no consensus about
being a part of India. First Nagaland and then Mizoram witnessed strong movements demanding
separation from India. In the south, some groups from the Dravid movement briefly toyed with the
idea of a separate country.
These events were followed by mass agitations in many parts for the formation of linguistic
States. Today's Andhra Pradesh, Karnataka, Maharashtra, and Gujarat were among the regions
affected by these agitations. In some parts of southern India. Particularly Tamil Nadu. There were
protests against making Hindi the official national language of the country. In the north, there were
strong pro-Hindi agitations demanding that Hindi be made the official language immediately. From
the late der 1950s. People speaking the Punjabi language started agitating for a separate State for
themselves. This demand was finally accepted and the States of Punjab and Haryana were created in
1966. Later, the States of Chhattisgarh, Uttarakhand and Jharkhand were created. Thus the challenge
of diversity was met by redrawing the internal boundaries of the country.
Yet this did not lead to resolution of all problems and for all times. In some regions, like Kashmir
and Nagaland, the challenge was so complex that it could not be resolved in the first phase of nation-
building. Besides, new challenges came up in States like Punjab, Assam and Mizoram. Let us study
these cases in some detail. In this process let us also go back to some of the earlier instances of
difficulties of nation building. The successes and failures in these cases are instructive not merely for
a study of our past, but also for an understanding of India's future.
Que 7.Define the politics and separatist movement in Kashmir after 1989.
Ans.Separatist politics which surfaced in Kashmir from 1989 has taken different forms and is made
up of various strands. There is one strand of separatists who want a separate Kashmiri nation, of
India and Pakistan. Then there are groups that want Kashmir to wants greater autonomy v for the
people of the State within the Indian union. The idea of autonomy attracts the people of Jammu merge
with Pakistan. Besides these, there is a third strand which and Ladakh regions in a different way. They
often neglect and backwardness. Therefore, the demand for intra-State complain of. The initial period
of popular support to militancy has most of the separatists s in dialogue are trying to re-negotiate a
way to the urge for peace. The Centre has with separatist groups. Instead of demanding a separate
has started negotiations various relationship of the State with India. Jammu and Kashmir is one of the
living examples of plural society and politics. Not only are there diversities of all kina (religious, cult
i.al, linguistic, ethnic, and tribal) but there are also divergent political aspirations. However, despite
all these diversities and divergence on the one hand, and the continued situation of conflict on the
other, the plural and secular culture of the State has remained largely intact.
Que 8.What was the role of E V Ramaswamy Naicker in the Dravidian Movement?
Ans. Dravidian movement- The north thrives even as the south decaysl This popular slogan sums up the
dominant sentiments of one of India's most effective regional movements, the Dravidian movement
at one point of time. This was one of the first regional movements in Indian politics. Though some
sections of this movement had ambitions of creating a Dravida nation, the movement did not take to
arms. It used democratic means like public debates and the electoral platform to achieve its ends.
This strategy paid off as the movement acquired political power in the State and also became
influential at the national level.
The Dravidian movement led to the formation of Dravidar Kazhagam [DK] under the leadership
of Tamil social reformer E.V. Ramasami Periyar. The organisation strongly opposed the Brahmins'
dominance and affirmed regional pride against the political, economic and cultural domination of the
North. Initially. The Dravidian movement spoke in terms of the whole of south India .However lack
of support from other States limited the movement to Tamil Nadu. The DK split and the political
legacy of the movement was transferred to Dravida Munnetra Kazhagam (DMK). The DMK made its
entry into politics with a three pronged agitation in 1953-54. First, it demanded the restoration of the
original name of Kallakudi railway station which had been renamed Dalmiapuram,after an industrial
house from the North. This demand brought out its opposition to the North Indian economic and
cultural symbols. The second agitation was for giving Tamil cultural history greater importance in
school curricula. The third agitation was against the craft education scheme of the State government,
which it alleged was linked to the Brahmanical social outlook. It also agitated against making Hindi
the country's official language. The success of the anti-Hindi agitation of 1965 added to the DMK's
popularity.Sustained political agitations brought the DMK to power in the Assembly elections of
1967. Since then, the Dravidian parties have dominated the politics of Tamil Nadu. Though the DMK
split after the death of its leader, C. Annadurai, the influence of Dravidian parties in Tamil politics
actually increased. After the split there were two parties - the DMK and the All India Anna DMK
(AIADMK) - that claimed Dravidian legacy. Both these parties have dominated politics in Tamil Nadu
for the last four decades. Since 1996, one of these parties has been a part of the ruling coalition at the
Centre. In the 1990s, many other parties have emerged. These include Marumalarchchi Dravida
Munnetra Kazhagam (MDMK), Pattali Makkal Katchi (PMK) and Desiya Murpokku vider Kazhagam
(DMDK), All these parties have kept alive the i of regional pride in the politics of Tamil Nadu. Initially
seen as a threat to Indian nationalism, regional politics in Tamil Nadu is a good example of the
compatibility of regionalism and nationalism.
Que 9. What is the status of problems in Nagaland?
Ans.The story of Nagaland is similar to Mizoram, except that it started much earlier and has not yet
had suchahappy ending. Led by Angami Zaphu Phizo, a section of the Nagas declared independence
from India way back in 1951. Phizo turned down many offers of negotiated settlement. The Naga
National Council launched an armed struggle for sovereignty of Nagas. After a period of violent
insurgency a section of the Nagas signed an agreement with the Government of India but this was not
acceptable to other rebels. The problem in Nagaland still await a final resolution.
Long Answer Type Questions

Q.1- Explain the internal dimension of the problem of Jammu and Kashmir?
Ans.
1- Special status by Art. 370 has provoked two reaction- A- Outsider J and K believes that special
status of the state under Art. 370 does not allow full integration of state. B- Kashmiri – believe that
the autonomy conferred by article 370 is not enough.
2- Promise that accession would be referred to the people of the state after the situation created by
tribal invasion was normalised has not been fulfilled.
3- There is feeling that special federal status guaranteed by article 370 has been eroded in practice.
4- It is felt that democracy which is practiced in the rest of India has not been similarly.
Q.2- Explain the story of Sikkim from the time of India’s Independence to its merger with India?
Ans. –
1- Sikkim was not a part of India. It was also not a fully sovereign country. Sikkim’s defence and foreign
relations were looked after by India.
2- While the power of internal administration was with the Chogyal, Sikkim’s monarch.
3- An overwhelming majority of Sikkim’s population was Nepali. But the Chogyal was seen as
perpetuating the rule of a small elite from the minority Lepcha-Bhutia community.
4- The anti-Chogyal leaders of both the communities sought and got support from the Government of
India.
5- The first democratic elections to Sikkim assembly in 1974 were swept by Sikkim Congress.
6- The assembly first sought the status of ‘associate state’ and then in April 1975 passed a resolution
asking for full integration with India.
7- This was followed by a hurriedly organised referendum that put a stamp of popular approval on the
assembly’s request.
8- The Indian Parliament accepted this request immediately and Sikkim became the 22nd State of the
Indian union.
Q.3- “The accommodation of regional demands and the formation of linguistic states were also seen
as more democratic.” Explain?
Ans.
1- Formation on the basis of language became a uniform basis for the state boundary.
2- It has united country and leading disintegration.
3- Formation of linguistic states has changed the nature of democratic politics in positive way.
Q.4- Regional demands from different parts of India exemplify the principal of unity with diversity.
Justify this statement.
Ans. India's democratic politics allows people and groups to address the people on the basis of their
regional identity, aspiration regional problems.
(i)India's democratic politics given importance on regional issues and problems to receive adequate
making process. That is, regional aspirations attention and accommodation of Punjab, Assam,
Kashmir, etc. in the policy the eighties.
(ii) Mizoram is an example of settlement to resolve the problem of political separation effectively.
(iii) Its examples are in the erupted in Punjab, problems persisted in the North East, students
agitated in Assam and Kashmir valley was on the boil
(iv) The Government of India settled down some negotiations with these regional aspirations to
reduce tensions in many regions.
Q. 5- Explain in details the secessionist movement in Mizoram.

Ans. It was much more difficult when some groups demanded of these two cases offers us a lesson in
democratic politics very long time in at least two States in the North-East. A comparison principled
position.
After Independence, the Mizo Hills area was made an autonomous district within Assam. Some Mizos
believed that they were never a part of British India and therefore did not belong to the Indian union
Assam government failed to respond adequately to the great famine but the movement for secession
gained popular support after the National Front (MNF) under the leadership of Laldenga. of 1959 in
Mizo hills. The Mizos' anger led to the formation of ihe Mizo In 1966 the MNF started an armed
campaign for independence Thus, started a two decade long battle between Mizo insurgents and the
Indian army. The MNF fought a guerrilla war, got support from Pakistani government and secured
shelter in the then East Pakistan. The Indian security forces countered it with a series of repressive
measures of which the common people were the victims. At one point even Air Force was used. These
measures caused more anger and alienation among the people. At the end of two decades of
insurgency everyone was a loser. This is where maturity of the political leadership at both ends made
a difference. Laldenga came back from exile in Pakistan and started negotiations with the Indian
government. Rajiv Gandhi steered these was signed between Rajiv Gandhi and Laldenga. As per this
accord negotiations to a positive conclusion. In 1986 a peace agreement Mizoram was granted full-
fledged statehood with special powers and the MNF agreed to give up secessionist struggle. Laldenga
took over as the Chief Minister. This accord proved a turning point in the history of Mizoram. Today,
Mizoram is of the most peaceful places in the region and has taken big strides literacy and
development.
4 MARKS PASSAGE BASED QUESTION
In the North-East, regional aspirations reached a turning point in 1980s. This region now consists of seven
States, also referred to as the ‘seven sisters’. Three issues dominate the politics of North-East: demands for
autonomy, movements for secession, and opposition to ‘outsiders’. The reorganisation of the North-East
was completed by 1972. But this was not the end of autonomy demands in this region. In Assam, for
example, communities like the Bodos, Karbis and Dimasas wanted separate States. The Mizos’ anger led to
the formation of the Mizo National Front (MNF) under the leadership of Laldenga.
1- In which year regional aspiration reached a turning point?

(A) 1970
(B) 1980
(C) 1990
(D) 2000
2- Which region is known as Seven Sisters?
(A) North-West
(B) North-South
(C) North-North
(D) North-East
3- How many issues are dominated on North-East?
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 4
(D) 5
4- Who was the leader of Mizo National Front?
(A) Angami Zaphu Phizo
(B) Chogyal
(C) Longowal
(D) Laldenga
Soon, the leadership of the movement passed from the moderate Akalis to the extremist elements and took
the form of armed insurgency. These militants made their headquarters inside the Sikh holy shrine, the
Golden Temple in Amritsar. In June 1984, the Government of India carried out ‘Operation Blue Star’, code
name for army action in the Golden Temple. Prime Minister Indira Gandhi was assassinated on 31 October
1984 outside her residence by her bodyguards. While the entire country was shocked by this development,
in Delhi and in many parts of northern India violence broke out against the Sikh community. Twenty years
later, speaking in the Parliament in 2005, Prime Minister Manmohan Singh expressed regret over these
killings and apologised to the nation for the anti-Sikh violence in 2005.
1- Which place was made by extremist elements?

(A) Jammu and Kashmir
(B) Meghalaya
(C) Golden Temple
(D) Mosque
2- In which year the government of India carried out Operation Blue Star?
(A) January 1984
(B) March 1982
(C) July 1980
(D) June 1984
3- When Prime Minister Indira Gandhi was assassinated?
(A) 21 Oct. 1984
(B) 31 Oct. 1984
(C) 21 Sep. 1991
(D) 31 Sep. 1991
4- Where the Prime Minister Manmohan Singh express regret over these killing?
(A) Punjab State Assembly
(B) Rajya Sabha
(C) Lok Shabha
(D) Parliament
Article 370 gives greater autonomy to Jammu Kashmir as compared to other states of India The state has
its own constitution. All provisions of the Indian Constitution are not applicable to the state Laws passed
by the Parliament apply to J&K only if the state agrees. This special status has provoked two opposite
reactions. There is a section of people outside J&K that believe that the special status of the state conferred
by article 370 does not allow full integration of the state with India. This section feels that Article 370
should therefore be revoked and J&K should be like any other state in India.
(i) The people of state………………… have strongly resisted the question of repeal of article 370 from Indian
Constitution?
(E) J & K
(F) Punjab
(G) Haryana
(H) Bihar
(ii) Which article given the special provision for J & K?
(E) 376
(F) 370
(G) 368
(H) 343
(iii)What is the current status of J& K?
(A) State
(B) Union Territory
(C) Separate State
(D) All of the Above
(iv) Where is the headquarter of Ladakh Union territory?
(A) Sri Nagar
(B) Jammu
(C) Leh
(D)Kargil
At the time of Independence, Sikkim was a 'protectorate of India. It meant that while it was not a part of
India, it was also not a fully sovereign country. Sikkim's defence and foreign relations were looked after by
India, while the power of internal administration was with the Chogyal, Sikkim's monarch. This
arrangement ran into difficulty as the Chogyal was unable to deal with the democratic aspirations of the
people. An overwhelming majority of Sikkim's population was Nepali. But the Chogyal seen as perpetuating
the rule of a small elite from the minority Lepcha-Bhutia community. The anti-Chogyal leaders of both the
communities sought and got support from the Government of India. The first democratic elections to
Sikkim assembly in 1974 were swept by Sikkim Congress which stood for greater integration with India.
The assembly first sought the status of 'associate state' and then in April 1975 passed a resolution asking
for full integration with India. This was followed by a hurriedly organised referendum that put a stamp of
popular approval on the assembly's request. The Indian Parliament accepted this request immediately and
Sikkim became the 22nd State of the Indian union. Chogyal did not accept this merger and his supporters
accused the Government of India of foul play and use of force. Yet the merger enjoyed popular support and
did not become a divisive issue in Sikkim's politics.
Q-1.When did the first democratic elections to Sikkim assembly in?
(A) 1980
(B)1985
(C)1974
(D)1990
Q-2.The Indian Parliament accepted this request immediately and which state became the 22nd State of
the Indian union?
(A) Rajasthan
(B) Bihar
(C) UP
(D)Sikkim
Q-3.Which dynasty rules in Sikkim?
(A)Kuruba
(B)Gonda
(C)Khasi
(D)Chogyal
Q-4.Sikkim Congress was merged with which party?
(A)BJP
(B)CPI
(C)INC
(D)AAP
Q.5-In the given map of India, identify the places marked as (A), (B), (C) and (D) write their correct
information used
(I)
(II)
(III)
(IV)
(E) The state which was colony of Portuguese. Goa
(F) The state which effected by Khalistani Militancy. Punjab
(G) MR Lal Denga relevant to which state. Mizoram
(H) The union AASU and AGP party relevant to Which State. Assam
INDIAN POLITICS – TRANDS AND DEVELOPMENT

CONTEXT OF 1990’S
The trends and development in Indian politics are complex at different stages.
After the assassination of Indira Gandhi in 1984 Rajiv Gandhi become the prime minister through a massive
victory in the 1984 Lok Sabha election the decade of the 1980’s the country witnessed five developments
that were to make a long-lasting impact on our politics.
1. End of congress system:
• In this period the congress party was defeated in the election held 1989.
• The party that had won 415 seats in the Lok Sabha in 1984 was reduced to only 197 in this election.
• The election of 1989 marked the end of the ‘Congress system’.
• The congress remains an important party and ruled the country more that any other party but it
last the kind of centrality it earlier enjoyed in the party system.
2. Mandal Issue
• The new ‘National Front’ government in 1990 implemented the recommendation of the Mandal
commission.
• It held that jobs in central government should be reserved for the other backward classes (OBC).
• This led to violent ‘Anti-Mandal’ protests in different parts of the country.
• This dispute between the supporters and opponents of OBC reservations was known as the ‘Mandal
Issue’.
• The Mandal issue helped in shaping Indian politics since 1989.
3. New Economic reforms:

• This is known as the initiation of the structural adjustment programme or the new economic
reforms.
• It was initiated by Rajiv Gandhi in 1991 which changed the direction of the Indian economy that was
pursued since independence.
• These policies have been widely criticized by carious movements and organizations.
4. Ayodhya Dispute:
• In December 1992, the demolition of the disputed structure at Ayodhya known as Babri Masjid.
• It symbolized and triggered various changes in the politics of the country.
• It has intensified debates about the nature of Indian Nationalism and Secularism.
• These developments the rise of BJP and politics of ‘Hindutva’.
5. Change in congress leadership:

• In may 1991 the assassination of Rajiv Gandhi led to a change in leadership of the congress party.
• He was assassinated by LTTE.
• In the election of 1991, congress emerged as the single largest party.
• After the assassination of Rajiv Gandhi, the party choose Narsimha Rao as the prime minister.
II Ero of coalitions
• In 1989, the congress defeated election, but did not result in majority for any other party.
• The National Front [An Alliance of Janata Dal and some other regional parties] support from two
opposite political groups: The BJP and the Left Front.
• The National Front formed a coalition government but the BJP and Left Front did not join in this
government.
• The congress was the largest party in the Lok Sabha but it did not have clear majority therefore, it
decided to sit in the opposition.
Decline of congress
• The defeat of the congress party marked end of congress dominance over the India party system.
• The Ero of 1990’s witnessed another challenge to the predominant position of congress as no single
party could replace congress.
• Now, began an era of multi-party system.
• In 1989 several numbers of political parties were emerged but since 1989 till 2014 no sing party
secured a clear majority of seats in any Lok Sabha elections.
• This development initiated an era of coalition government at the center.
• The regional parties played an important role in forming ruling alliances.
Alliance politics
• The 90’s witnessed the emergence of powerful parties and movements that represented the Dalit
and other backward class (OBS’s)
• These parties played an important role in the formation of united front government in 1996.
• The united front was similar to the national front of 1989, included Janata dal and several regional
parties.
• This time the BJP did not support the government, but congress party supported the united front.
• In 1989, both the left and the BJP supported the national front government because the wanted to
keep the congress out of power.
• In 1996 the left continued to support the non-congress government but this time the congress,
supported it because the (congress and left) wanted to keep the BJP out of power.
• They did not succeed for long.
• BJP made a strong party from 1991 to 1996 and emerged as the largest party in the 1996 election
and was invited to from the government.
• But other parties were opposed to its policies, therefore, the BJP government could not secure a
majority in the Lok Sabha.
• It finally came to power by leading a coalition government from may 1998 to June 1999 and was re-
elected in oct 1999 Atal Bihari Vajpayee was the prime minister during both this NDA (National
Democratic Alliance) government.
• Since 1989, there have been II government at the center, all have been coalition governments.
o National Front - 1989
o United Front - 1996 to 1997
o NDA - 1998 to 2004
o UPA (United Progressive Alliance) - 2004 and 2009
• However, this trend of coalition government changed in 2014.
III political rise of other backward classes
• One long term development of this period was the rise of other backward classes as a political force.
• These are communities other than SC and ST who suffer from educational and social backwardness.
• These are referred to as ‘backward castes.
• The support for the congress among many sections of the backward castes had declined.
• This created a space for non-congress parties that got support from these communities.
• The Bhartiya Kranti dal and the samyukta socialist party got more support from these castes.
Manal implemented
• In the 1980’s the Janata dal brought together a similar combination of political groups with strong
support among the OBCs.
• The decision of the national front government to implement the recommendations of the Mandal
commission.
• It helped in shaping the politics of OBCs.
• This intense was to give reservation in jobs.
• This period witnessed the emergence many parties that gave better opportunities for OBCs in
education and employment.
The Mandal commissions
• Southern states have had reservation for the OBCs since the 1960, but this policy did not apply to
the states of North India.
• During the tenure of Janata party govt. in 1977-79 that the demand for reservations for backward
casted in north India.
• Kapoori Thakur, the chief minister of Bihar was introduced a new policy of reservations for OBCs in
Bihar.
• Following this, the central government appointed a commission in 1978 to investigate and
recommended methods to improve the conditions of the poor.
• This commission is known as ‘Mandal commission’, after the name of its chair person, bindeshwari
prasad Mandal.
• The commission gave its recommendation in 1980.
• It recommended reserving 27 percent of seats in the educational institution and government jobs
and also made many other recommendations like land reforms to improve the conditions of OBCs.
• In august 1990 the national front government decided to implement one of the recommendations
of Mandal commission.
• It was related to reservations for OBCs in jobs at the central government level and its undertaking.
• The decision was challenged in the supreme court and came to be known as ‘Indira Sawhney case’
• In Nov 1992 the supreme court gave its decision in the favor of the government.
Political fallouts
• In 1978, the backward and minority communities’ employee’s federation (BAMCEF) was formed.
• BAMCEF was a trade union of government employees.
• It took a strong position in favor of political power to the ‘Bahujan – the SC, ST OBC and minorities.
• It was out of this that the subsequent ‘Dalit Shoshit Samaj Sangharsh samiti and leter the Bahujan
samaj party (BSP) emerged under the leadership of Kanshi Ram.
• BSP supported largely by Dalit voters in Punjab, Haryana and up.
• But in 1989 and 1991 elections, it achieved a victory in up.
• Than the BSP has emerged as a major political party and made a government more than once.
• It has expanded its support now to various other social groups.
Communalism, secularism, democracy
• During this period 1990 the politics based on religious identity, debate about secularism and
democracy.
• After emergency, the Bhartiya Jana Sangh had merged in to the Janata party.
• After the tall of Janata party and its break up Bhartiya Janata Party (BJP) in 1980.
• It adopted ‘Gandhi a socialism’ as its ideology.
• After 1986 the party began to emphasize the Hindu nationalist elements in its ideology.
• The BJP started the politics of ‘Hindutva’ and adopted strategy of mobilizing the Hindus.
• Two development around 1986 become central to the politics of BJP as ‘Hindutva Party’
1. The Shah Bano case 1985

• Shah Bano was a 62 years old divorced Muslim woman, had filed a case for maintenance from here
former husband.
• Supreme court ruled in her favor. The orthodox Muslims saw the supreme court order as an
interference in ‘Muslim personal law’
• On the demand of some Muslim leaders, the government passed the Muslim women (protection of
rights on divorce) act 1986 the nullified the supreme court’s judgment.
• This action of the government was opposed by many women’s organizations Muslim groups
• The BJP criticized this action of the government as an unnecessary concession and appeasement of
the minority community.
2. Ayodhya diputa 1986
• The Faizabad district court ordered that the Babri masjid premises be unlocked so that
Hindus could offer prayers at the site which they considered as a temple.
• The Babri masjid was built by Mir Baqi Mughal emperor Babar’s general.
• Some Hindu believe that it was build after demolishing a temple for Lord Rama in what is
believed to be his birthplace.
• The BJP made this issue its major electoral and political plank, along with RSS and the Vishva
Hindu Parisad.
• The BJP, in order to generate public support, took out a massive march called the Rathyatra
from Somnath in Gujrat to Ayodhya in up.
Demolition and after:
• In Dec 1992, the organizations supporting the constructions of the temple had organized a karseva,
for building the ram temple.
• The situation had vecome tense all over the country and especially at Ajodhya.
• The supreme court had ordered the state government ot take care that the disputed site will note
be endangered.
• On 6th December 1992, thousands of people gathered from all over the country at Ajodhya and
demolished the mosque.
• This news led to clashed between the Hindus and Muslims in many parts of the country.
• The state government, with the BJP as the ruling party was dismissed by the center and other states
where the BJP was in hower, were but under president’s rule.
• A case of contempt of court was filed against the chief minister of Uttar Pradesh.
• The central government appointed a commission to investigate into the circumstances leading to
the demolition of the mosque.
• Most political parties condemned this demolition and declared It against the principles of
secularism.
Anti-Muslimism riots in Gujarat
• In February-march 2002, large scale violence against Muslims accure in Gujrat.
• This violence was an incident that accure at a station called Godhra.
• A bogey of a train that was returning from Ajodhya, was full of karsevaks was set on fire and 57
people died in that fire.
• Suspecting the hand of the Muslims in setting to the bogey. Large scale violence against Muslims
began in many parts of Gujrat.
• This violence continued for almost a whole month.
• The National Human Right commission critised the Gujrat government role in failing to control
violence.
• The election commission of India ordered the assembly elections to be postponed.
V Emergence of a new consensus
• The period after 1989 as the period of decline of congress and rise of BJP.
• In this period both parties were engaged in a tough competition.
• The votes polled by the two parties congress and BJP do not add upto more than 50 percent.
• The political competition during the 90’s is divided between the coalition led by BJP and congress.
Lok Sabha Election 2004
• In the election of 2004, the congress party entered into coalition with UPA (United Progressive
Alliance) came to power and NDA (National Democratic Alliance) was defeated.
• UPA government received support from the left front parties.
• Congress increase its seats for the first time since 1991.
• In the 2004 elections, there was a negligible difference between the BJP and congress.
• After the 1990’s the emergence of broadly four groups of parties – congress, BJP, left front and other
parties who are not part of these three.
Growing consensus
• After 1990’s a consensus appears to have emerged among most parties which consists of following
element –
1. Agreement of new economic policies: while many groups are opposed to the new economic
policy most parties believe that these policies would lead the country to prosperity.
2. Acceptance of the political and social claims of the backward castes. All political parties now
support reservation of seats for the backward castes in education and employment.
3. Acceptance of the role of state level parties in governance of the country. State level parties are
sharing power at the national level and have played a central role in the country’s politics.
4. Emphasis on work rather than ideological position and political alliance without ideological
agreement.
UNITED PROGRESSIVE ALLIANCE
UPA I AND II
UPA I
• In the general election of 2009, Dr. Manmohan Singh formed another UPA coalition cabinet and was
sworn in for second term becoming the prime minister.
• The government made employment generation and social equity as the important features of its
agenda.
• Under UPA II, women began occupying senior positions in state and union territory governments
notably in highly populated Tamil Nadu, Uttar Pradesh and west Bengal.
• It also works upon the issues of revitalizing the agrarian economy.
• Stepping up investment in agriculture.
• Providing access to credit and improving the quality of rural infrastructure.
National democratic alliance
NDA III and IV
• The Bhartiya Janata party led by Prime Minister Narendra Modi got majority in the Lok Sabha
elections held in May 2014.
• After near 30 years in Indian politics, a strong government with an absolute majority was
established at the center.
• The NDA III coalition was no only steed by a national party i.e. BJP it was also dominated by BJP
with an absolute majority of its won in Lok Sabha.
• It was also called a ‘surplus majority coalition.
• In that since a major transformation could be seen in the nature of coalition politics which could be
seen from one party led coalition to one party dominated coalition.
NDA IV
• The 2019 Lok Sabha elections, once again brought back BJP led NDA to the center of power by
wining more than 350 seats out of 543.
• The BJP on its own won 303 seats in Lok Sabha.
• It is the biggest number for any single party since 1984.
Issues of development and governance
• A major change in Indian politics after 2014 is shift from caste and religion-based politics to
development and governance-oriented politics.
• With its predefined goal ‘sabka sath, sabka vikas’ the nda III government started several socio –
economic schemes to make development and governance accessible to the masses such as
o Pradhan matri ujjwala yojna
o Kisan fasal bima yojna
o Swachh bharat abhiyan
o Jana dhan yojna
o Beti padhao, desh bachao
• All these schemes perpose to take administration to the doorstep of the commen man. Try kaning
the rural households. Particularty women, real befeficiaries of the central government schemes. ‘
• The success of these schemes could be seen from the result of 2019 lok sabha elections.
• Where the voters across states – castes, classes, communities, gender and regions brought back the
issues of development and governance to the center stage under the BJP led NDA government
characterzing the current change with ‘sabka sath, sabka vikas and sabka vishwas’.
1 MARKS QUESTIONS
1. BJP led coalition of 2014 was also called as-
a. Majority coalition
b. Clear majority coalition
c. Surplus majority coalition
d. Democratic coalition
2. With its pre-intended goal _________ the NDA III government started several socio-economic
welfare schemes to make development accessible to the masses.
a. Jai Jawan, Jai Kisan
b. Sabka Saath, Sabka Vikas
c. Sabka Saath, Sabka Vikas, Sabka Vishwas
d. Garibi Hatao
3. In ___________ the demolition of the disputed structure at Ayodhya.
a. December 1992
b. December 1991
c. November 1992
d. November 1991
4. Morarji Desai presided over which of the following –
a. The First coalition government
b. The First five years plane
c. The Green revolution
d. Economic reforms
5. What is the full form of BAMCEF?
a. Backward and majority communities’ employee’s federation.
b. Backward and minority community’s employee federation.
c. Backward and most of community’s employee federation.
d. Backward and mass community’s employee federation.
6. Which states in north India had adopted the policy of reservation for OBCs?
a. Uttar Pradesh
b. Madhya Pradesh
c. Bihar
d. Gujrat
7. Which of the following statement regarding Mandal Commission is incorrect?
a. This commission was appointed second time.
b. Its char person was bindeshwari prasad Mandal.
c. The commission gave its recommendations in 1995
d. National front government decided to implement the recommendations.
8. Bahujan Samaj Party (BSP) emerged under the leadership ……………
a. Kanshi Ram
b. Ram Manohar Lohiya
c. Morarji Desai
d. V.P. Singh
9. Which of the following statement (s)about the general election 1989 is a correct?
i. Congress party got less seats in this election.
ii. The elections of 1989 marked the end of ‘congress system’
iii. In this election congress won any 197 seats
iv. Even during this time, the congress remained an important party.
a. Only i, ii
b. Only ii, iii
c. Only I, ii, iii
d. All of these
10. Rajiv Gandhi was assassinated by ___________
a. LTTE
b. LET
c. LIMI
d. LSMI
11. Which groups/parties was supported the national Front Party to form the government in the 1989
elections?
a. Congress and communist party
b. BJP and Left font
c. BJP and BSPA
d. Congress and Left front
12. The united front was included ___________
i. Janata Dal
ii. Several regional parties
iii. Janata Dal and BIJU Dal
iv. BJP and Janata Dal
a. i, ii
b. i, ii, iii
c. ii, iv
d. i, ii, iii, iv
13. Arrange the chronological order
i. National Front government lead by V.P. Singh
ii. United Front government lead by I.K. Gujral
iii. Mandal commission
iv. Indira Sawhney case
a. i, ii, iii, iv
b. iii, i, iv, ii
c. iv, iii, ii, i
d. ii, i, iv, iii
14. assertion -: Political parties are ensuring that the OBC, get adequate share of power.
Reason -: Political parties have recognized that the social and political claims of the OBSs need to
be accepted.
a. Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b. Both (A) and (R) are true, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c. (A) is true, but (B) is false
d. (A) is false, but (R) is true
15. Assertion -: The distention between state level and national level parties is getting smaller now.
Reason -: State level parties are sharing power in the central government and playing an
important role in politics of the country.
a. Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b. Both (A) and (R) are true, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c. (A) is true, but (R) is false
d. (A) is false, but (R) is true
2 MARKS QUESTINOS
1. Which coalition came to power in 1989? Name its two major supporting parties?
Ans: - The National Front came to power in 1989. BJP and the left front were two major
supporting parties.
2. What are the major changes that took place in our politics in the decade of 90s? describe any
two impact.
Ans: -The two major impact are –
i. End of Congress system –
In this period the congress party was defeated. The elections of 1989 marked the endo
off ‘congress system’.
ii. Mandal Issue –
The national front government in 1990 implemented the recommendation of the
Mandal commission that jobs in central government should be reserved for the OBSs.
3. Describe the Ayodhya Dispute?
Ans: - The Ayodhya dispute arose due tot the demolition of Babri Masjid.
It symbolized and triggered various changes in the politics of the country.
It has intensified debate about the nature of Indian nationalism and secularism.
4. Write a short note on Era of coalition?
Ans: - An Era of coalitions came up with the beginning of third electoral system.
With the defeat of congress party in the 1989 elections, no other party emerged in majority at
the central level.
Congress was the largest party in the Lok Sabha but as it didn’t clear majority so it decided in
the opposition.
The National front formed the government supported by BJP and the left front in this period.
5. What were the effects of Gujrat riots? (any two)
Ans:- in February-march 2002, a bogey of a train that was returning from Ayodhya and was
full of karsevaks was set on fire. 57 people died in that fire. This incident is known as Gujrat
riot or Godhra incident.
Effects
1. The National Human Right Commission criticized the Gujrat government.
2. The Election commission of India ordered the assembly elections to be postponed.
6. Give any two arguments in favor of reservation for the SCs, STs and OBCs in higher education
institution in India –
Ans: - The two arguments are –
i. The Backward classes had very low representation in educational institution.
ii. The employment in public offices also had very low representation of the backward
classes.
7. What does a coalition government mean? Mention any two examples of such a government.
Ans: -When two or more parties join hands together to form a government is known as
coalition government.
i. In 1977, the first coalition government was formed lead by Morarji Desai.
ii. The National front, An Alliance of Janata Dal and some other regional parties.
8. What was the change in the electoral performance of the congress party and BJP from 1984-
2004?
Ans: -The Changes in the electoral performance of the congress and BJP from 1984-2004 is as –
i. The BJP had gained the electoral performance from two seats to 138 seats.
ii. The political competition during the 1990s is divided between the coalition led by BJP
and congress. Congress lost its seats from 415 to 145.
9. Highlight any two recommendations of the Mandal Commission –
Ans: - The two recommendation of the Mandal commission –
i. 27 percent of the posts in public services should be reserved for other backward
classes.
ii. Welfare programmes specially meant for OBSs should be financed by the government of
India.
10. In what way do the coalition government prove to be more democratic that the one-party
governments?
i. Coalition government protect the rights and liberties of the minorities.
ii. In a coalition government, various parties accommodate each other.
iii. It restricts the dictatorship of one-party rule.
4 MARKS QUESTIONS
1. Read the passage given below carefully and answer the questions that follows –
The BJP continued to consolidate its position in the elections of 1991 and 1996. It
emerged as the largest party in the 1996 elections and was invited to form the
government. But most other parties were opposed to its policies and therefore, the BJP
government could not secure a majority in the Lok Sabha. It finally came to power by
leading a coalition government from May 1998 to June 1999 and was re-elected in
October 1999. Atal Bihari Vajpayee was the Prime Minister during both these NDA
government and is government formed in 1999 composited its full term.
1. Atal Bihar Vajpayee served as the Prime Minister of India from –
a. 1889 to 1990
b. 1998 to 1999
c. 2001 to 2003
d. 2014 to 2019
2. According to the above paragraph is which government is mentioned?
a. UPA
b. National Front
c. NDA
d. United Front
3. In which year NDA government were formed?
a. 1998
b. 2001
c. 1977
d. 1989
4. NDA III Government started _______________________ to the masses.
a. Jai Jawan, Jai Kisan
b. Jai Jawan, Jai Kisan, Jai Vigyan
c. Sabka Saath, Sabka Vikas
d. Garibi Hatao
2. The Mandal Commission further helped in shaping the politics of ‘Other Backward Classes’.
The intense national debate for and against reservation in jobs made people from the OBC
communities more aware of this identity. Thus, it helped those who wanted to mobilize these
groups in politics. This period saw the emergence of many parties that sought better
opportunities for OBCs in education and employment and also raised the question of the
share of power enjoyed by the OBCs. These parties claimed that since OBCs constituted a
large segment of Indian Society. It was only democratic that the OBCs should get adequate
representation in administration and have their due share of political power.
1. Which commission was appointed on OBC?
a. Shah Commission
b. Mandal Commission
c. Election Commission
d. State Commission
2. Which government implemented the recommendation of Mandal commission?
a. United Front Government
b. NDA
c. National Front
d. UPA
3. Which recommendation of Mandal commission was implemented by government of
national front?
a. Reservations for OBCs in Jobs
b. Reservation for STs in Jobs
c. Reservation for SCs in Jobs
4. What is the full form of OBCs?
a. Other Backward Caste
b. Other Backward Classes
c. Other Below Classes
3. The 1980s also saw the rise of political organization of the Dalits. In 1978 the Backward and
Minority Communities Employees Federation (BAMCEF) was formed. This organization was
not an ordinary trade union of government employees. It took a strong position in favor of
political power to the ‘Bahujan- The SC, ST, OBC and Minorities. It was out of this that the
subsequent Dalit Shoshit Samaj Sangharsh Samiti and later the Bahujan Samaj Party (BSP)
emerged under the leadership of Kanshi Ram. The BSP began as a small party supported
largely by Dalit voters in Punjab, Haryana and Uttar Pradesh. But in 1989 and the 191
election it achieved a breakthrough in Uttar Pradesh. This was the first time in independent
India that a political party supported mainly by Dalit voters had achieved this kind of political
success.
1. What is the full form of BAMCEF?
a. Backward and majority communities’ employee’s federation.
b. Backward and minority community’s employee federation.
c. Backward and most of community’s employee federation.
d. Backward and mass community’s employee federation.
2. Bahujan refers to
a. The SC, ST, OBC and Minorities
b. Only SCs
c. Only STs
d. Only OBC and Minorities
3. The Bahujan Samaj Party emerged under the leadership of __________
a. Bindeshwari Prasad
b. Jagjivan Ram
c. Kanshi Ram
d. Ram Manohar Lohiya
4. In which years elections BSP achieved a breakthrough
a. 1979 and 1981
b. 1989 and 1991
c. 1969 and 1971
d. 1959 and 1961
MAP
In the given political outline map of India are marked (A), (B), (C), (D).
Identify the states basis of the information given below.
1. The state where introduce a new policy of reservations for OBCs.
2. The state where BSP achieved a breakthrough in 1989 and 1991.
3. The state where election commission of India ordered the assembly elections to be
postponed in 2002.
4. The state related with H.D. Deve Gowda.
Observe the cartoon given below and answer the following question –
1. Who was head of the government formed by the national front in 1989?
a. V.P. Singh
b. H.D. Deve Gowda
c. P.V. Narasimha Rao
d. Chandra Shekhar
2. Identify the puppeteers pulling the string.
a. V.P. Singh and P.V. Narasimha Rao
b. Jyoti Basu and L.K. Adwani
c. Chandra Shekar and A.B. Vajpayee
d. Jagjivan Ram and Kanshi Ram
3. The national front was an alliance of __________
a. Janata Dal and other regional parties
b. Janata Dal and Congress
c. AIDMK and BSP
d. BAMCEF and AIDMK
4. Which party was largest party in the Lok Sabha in 1989 elections?
a. Congress
b. BJP
c. BSP
d. AIDMK
4 marks question
1. “Political parties are no longer aligned on ideological grounds in the new era of coalition politics.” Explain.
Ans – Three feature of coalition government has been given in which we have to understand the not aligning
and re-aligning on the basis of ideologies. These are –
i. Unstable government:
The coalition government has its own interest and they fight for their own self-interest. This leads to
the breakup of not only of various fonts, but of governments as well.
ii. Political opportunism:
Government formed on the basis of coalition becomes selfish, as opportunist, power hungry and
unscrupulous politicians focus on the self-interest only.
iii. Lack of polarization:
The coalition governments are formed not the basis of polarization of political forces. But for the sake
of capturing power and vested interest.
There has been no sincere urge even among the parties of same ideology for political polarization.
2. Assess the impact of coalition government on the politics of India.
Ans – The impact of coalition government on the politics of India are –
i. The parties in the coalition government believe in the same economic policy and think this would
lead the country to prosperity and a status of economic power in the world.
ii. All political parties now support reservation of seats for the backward classes in education and
employment.
iii. The distinction between state level and national level parties as fast becoming less important. State
level and have played a central role in the country’s politics.
iv. Coalition politics has shifted the focus of political parties from ideological differences to power
sharing arrangements.
3. Examine the impact of political rise of other backward classes in India?
Ans - 1970s onward, caste-based politics began to rise and gave rise to political leaders from OBC
communities.
These leaders further formed social and political parties and started to rise in support from these
communities especially in state politics.
The Mandal agitation gave rise to electoral consolidation of OBC.
The political rise of other backward classes was also connected to the increase in regional aspirations in
states politics.
4. What was Mandal commission? Did it try to solve the problems of other backward classes? State any two
arguments in support of your answer.
Ans – the Mandal commission under the chairmanship of mindshare prasad Mandal set up in 1978.
The commission investigate the extent of education and social backwardness among various sections of
society.
The commission’s recommendations the ‘back classes’ should be understood to mean ‘backward caste’, since
many castes other than the scheduled castes. Were also treated as low in the caste hierarchy.
It recommended reserving 27 percent of seats in educational institutions and government jobs for these
groups.
It recommended land reform to improve the conditions of the OBCs.
The government of India accepted recommendations in 1990.
27 percent reservations have been made in central and state government.
5. Write any two benefits and drawback of coalition government.
Ans – Two benefits –
i. Dominance of one patty is minimized.
ii. More than one ideology come together and gives strength to democracy.
Drawbacks
i. Coalition government unstable government.

ii. It slows the process of policy making.
6 marks
1. Highlight any three issues on which a broad agreement has emerged among most of the political parties in
India.
Ans – A broad agreement has emerged among most parties.
In the midst of severe competition and many conflicts, a consensus appears to have emerged among most
parties.
i. New economic policies:
Most political parties are in support of the new economic policies. Most political parties believe that
these policies would lead the country to prosperity and a status of economic power in the world.
ii. Acceptance of the political and social claims of the backward castes:
Political parties have recognized that the social and political claims of the backward castes need to
be accepted.
All political parties now support reservation of seats for the backward classes in education and
employment.
These are also willing to ensure that the OBCs get adequate share of power.
iii. Role of state level parties:
The distinction between state level and national level parties is fast becoming less important.
State level parties are sharing power at the national level and have played a central Rome in the
country’s politics.
iv. Ideological position:
Coalition politics has shifted the focus of political parties from ideological differences to power
sharing arrangements.
Example: most parties of the NDA did not agree with the ‘Hindutva’ ideology of the BJP. Now they
came together to form a government and remained in power for a full term.
2. “Towards the end of 1980s, five major changes took place in Indian political system” in the light of this
statement. Examine any three changes.
Ans – The decade of the 80s came to close, the country witnessed five major changes took place in Indian
political system.
i. The End of congress system:
In this period the congress party was defeated in the election held 1989.
The party that had won 415 seats in the Lok Sabha in 1984 was reduced to only 197 in this election.
The elections of 1989 marked the end of the congress system.
ii. Mandal issue:
The new national front government in 1990 implemented the recommendation of the Mandal
commission.
It held that jobs in central government should be reserved for the OBCs
The Mandal issue helped in shaping Indian politics since 1989.
iii. New economic reforms:
This is known as the initiation of the structural adjustment programmed or the new economic
reforms.
It was changed the direction of the Indian economy that was pursued since independence.
iv. Ajodhya dispute:
In December 1992, the demolition of the disputed structure at Ajodhya known as barb masjid.
It symbolized and triggered various changes in the politics of the country.
These developments the rise of BJP and politics of ‘Hindutva’
v. Change in congress leadership:
May 1991, the assassination of Rajiv Gandhi led to change in leadership of the congress party.
The elections of 1991, congress emerged as the single largest party and the party chose Narsimha
Rao as the prime minister.
3. Describe the major developments that have taken place in Indian politics during the NDA III & IV.
Ans – A major change in Indian politics after 2014 is the shift from caste and religion-based politics to
development and governance-oriented politics.
With its pre-intended goal sabkha swath, sabkha Vikas the NDA III government started several socio-
economic welfare schemes to make development and governance accessible to masses such as – Pradhan
mantra Ujjwal yojana
Swachh bhagat Bhuiyan etc.
All these schemes intended to take administration to doorstep of the common man by making the rural
households, particularly the women real beneficiaries of the central government schemes. ‘the success of
those schemes could be seen from the result of 2019 Lok Sabha elections.
The voters across states, castes, classes communities, gender and regions brought back the issues of
development and governance to the center stage.
It was under the BJP led NDA government characterizing the current change with sabkha sat sabkha Vikas
and sabkha Vishwa’s.
4. ‘Coalition government is a bane or boon for democracy in India’ explain any three arguments in support of
your answer.
Ans – coalition government is a boon because
i. State level parties played a crucial role in the country politics for last twenty years. Therefore, the
differences between state level parties and central parties is decreasing.
ii. Coalition politics has shifted the focus of political parties from ideological distinctions to power
sharing accommodation. The government of NDA that most of the parties did not agree with the
ideology of Hindutva of BJP However they allied with Bupa to form a government for a full term.
iii. Various radical parties opposed the new economic policies, but some parties came to support new
economic policies because they believed that these polices would lead the country towards
prosperity and raise its status all over the world.
Coalition government is a bane for democracy in India
i. The coalition government has its own interest and they fight for their own self-interest.
ii. Government which is formed on the basis of coalition becomes selfish as opportunist power and
unscrupulous, politician’s emphasis on their self interest only.
iii. The coalition governments are formed on the basis of polarization of political forces.
iv. These are widely heterogeneous elements like CPI and BJP.
5. Describe the UPA-I and II.
Ans – In the general election of 2009, UPA won 262 seats of which the congress accounted for 206 seats.
Manmohan Singh formed another UPA coalition cabinet and was sworn in for a second term, becoming the
first prime minister since Nehru to do so after having served a full-face year fist term.
The government made employment generation and social equity as the important features of its agenda.
Under UPA-II, women began occupying senior positions in state and union territory governments.
Notably in highly populated Tamil Nadu, Uttar Pradesh and west Bengal.
This government also worked upon the issues of revitalizing the agrarian economy, stepping up investment
in agriculture, providing access to credit
It improving the quality of rural infrastructure.

Class XII Study Material - Pol. Science

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Class XII Study Material - Pol. Science

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

केन्द्रीय विद्यालय संगठन

क्षेत्रीय कायाालय, जयपुर

POLITICAL SCIENCE (028)

केन्द्रीय विद्यालय संगठन क्षेत्रीय कायाालय जयपुर

Sh. B.L. Morodia

Sh. D.R. Meena Sh. M.R. Rawal

Sh. Vinod Bhartiya

Mrs. Neelam Vaishnav

Gorbachev and the Disintegration:

Why did Soviet Union Disintegrate?

• I - End of Cold War:

• II- Power Relations Changed:

• III- Emergence of New Countries:

Consequences of Shock Therapy

Tensions and Conflict

India and Post-Communist

MCQ TYPE QUESTIONS -

VERY SHORT TYPE ANSWER - 2 Marks

SHORT TYPE ANSWERS - 4 Marks

LONG TYPE ANSWERS - 6 MARKS

Sr. Number for the Alphabet Concerned Name of the States

NEW CENTERS OF POWER

Rise of the Chinese Economy

MCQ TYPE QUESTIONS -

VERY SHORT TYPE ANSWERS - 2 Marks

SHORT TYPE ANSWERS - 4 Marks

LONG TYPE ANSWERS - 6 MARKS

PASSAGE BASED, CARTOON BASED AND MAP BASED QUESTIONS – 4 MARKS

I- Which part depicted in this cartoon is related to China?

Sr. Number for the Alphabet Concerned Name of the States

(I) An old member country of the European Union? Ireland

CONTEMPORARY SOUTH ASIA

MILITATRY AND DEMOCRACY IN PAKISTAN

ETHNIC CONFLICT AND DEMOCRACY IN SRI LANKA

INDIA AND IT’S NEIGHBOURS

INDIA + SRI LANKA

PEACE AND COOPERATION

MCQ BASED QUESTIONS: 1 MARK

VERY SHORT TYPE QUESTIONS: 2 Marks

SHORT TYPE QUESTIONS: 4 Marks

LONG TYPE QUESTIONS: 6 Marks

PASSAGE BASED, CARTOON BASES AND MAP BASED QUESTION: 4 MARKS

Sr. Number for the Alphabet Concerned Name of the States

UNITED NATIONS AND ITS ORGANIZATIONS

Organs of the United Nations Organization –

S.N.z Secretary-General Country Term

The points defending the Permanent Membership of India in United Nations-

1. Prevent all communicable disease.

Need for reforms in Security Council:

1. UNSC no longer represents contemporary political realities.

3. It lacks equitable representation.

OTHER AGENCIES of United Nations

MCQ (EACH 1 MARKEs)

Question 3. Mention any one function of the World Bank.

Question 7. What is the main function of Amnesty International?

Question 8. What is meant by International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA)?

1. Number of permanent and non-permanent members to security council of UN is to be

Question 4. What is meant by International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA)?

Question 5. What is meant by security council? Mention its composition.

Question 6. . What is World Health Organisation? Give any one objective?

Question 7. Highlight any two jurisdictions of the United Nations.

• Creation of a peace building commission.

1. To increase the number of permanent and non-permanent members of security council.